Panasonic RRXS420E, RRXS450E Operating instructions

Panasonic RRXS420E, RRXS450E Operating instructions
Operating Instructions
Bedienungsanleitung
Istruzioni per l’uso
Upute
za d’emploi
uporabu
Mode
Instrucciones de funcionamiento
Diktafon
Manual de Instruções
RR-XS450
IC Recorder
RR-XS420
Digitales Diktiergerät
Model br.
Registratore IC
Magnétophone à puce
Grabadora IC
Gravador de IC
Model No.
E
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
ITALIANO
FRANÇAIS
ESPAÑOL
PORTUGUÊS
RR-XS450
RR-XS420
VQT4J81
M0512KZ0
M0512KZ0
Poštovani,
Dear customer
Zahvaljujemo
kupnji ovog
Thank you for na
purchasing
thisproizvoda.
product.
Za
rad i sigurnost
pažljivo
ove these
Foroptimalan
optimum performance
and
safety,pročitajte
please read
upute.
instructions carefully.
Prije
spajanja,
uporabe
ili podešavanja
uređaja
u cijelosti
Before
connecting,
operating
or adjusting
this product,
pročitajte
ovethe
upute.
Ovaj priručnik
zadržite
za buduću
please read
instructions
completely.
Please
keep this
uporabu.
manual for future reference.
Supplied
accessories
Isporučeni
pribor
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
Please
and identify
the supplied
Provjeritecheck
i identificirajte
isporučeni
pribor.
accessories.
Prilikom
narudžbe zamjenskih dijelova
Use numbers
in parentheses
navedite
brojeveindicated
u zagradama.
(Brojevi
when
replacement
parts.
dijelovaasking
važeći for
su od
svibnja 2012.
Podložni
(Product
numbers correct as of May
su promjenama.)
2012.Ni-MH
Thesebaterija*
may be[HHR-4AGE]
subject to change.)
□ 1 AAA punjiva
2
2
½
●
tekstu označava
sebattery
kao punjiva
baterija.
…● U1 daljnjem
AAA rechargeable
Ni-MH
[HHR-4AGE]
□ Indicated
1 torbica zaas
bateriju
[RFC0156-Q]
*
rechargeable
battery in the text.
□ 11USB-produžni
kabelbag
[K2ZZ04Y00005]
…
Battery carrying
[RFC0156-Q]
* Za područje Europe obavezno kupite [HHR-4MVE],
… a1za
USB
extension
cable
[K2ZZ04Y00005]
područje
Azije
i
Latinske
Amerike kupite [HHR½
Make sure to buy [HHR-4MVE] for Europe or [HHR4MVT] i koristite jednu od tih kada mijenjate punjivu
4MVT] for Asia and Latin America and use one of the
bateriju.
pair when replacing the rechargeable battery.
■■For
Za Ujedinjeno
i Republiku
g
the United Kraljevstvo
Kingdom and
Ireland Irsku
customers
(Podaci
o prodajnim mjestima i tehničkoj podršci)
(Sales
Support Information)
Centarand
za korisničku
podršku
Customer
Communications
• Za korisnike
unutar UK-a:Centre
0844 844 3899
••For
Zacustomers
korisnike uwithin
Irskoj:the
01UK:
2890844
8333844 3899
••For
customers
within Ireland:
01 za
289
8333
Informacije
o dodatnoj
podršci
svoj
proizvod
• For
further na
support
onweb-mjestu:
your product, please visit our
potražite
našem
website:
www.panasonic.co.uk
www.panasonic.co.uk
Direktna
prodaja
za Panasonic
Direct
Sales
at Panasonic
UK UK
Naručite
pribor iand
potrošne
predmete
za for
svojyour
proizvod,
••Order
accessory
consumable
items
jednostavno
i s punim
povjerenjem,
tako da uputite
product
with ease
and confidence
by phoning
our
telefonskiCommunications
poziv našem Centru
za korisničku podršku,
Customer
Centre
od ponedjeljaka do
četvrtka
od 9,00
do Friday
17,30 sati
Monday–Thursday
9:00
a.m.–5:30
p.m.,
9:30
i petkom od
9,30
do 17,30public
sati (osim
državnih
a.m.–5:30
p.m.
(Excluding
holidays)
• Orpraznika).
go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering
•application
Ili ispuniteat
našu
narudžbenicu za pribor na internetu
www.pas-europe.com.
na stranci
www.pas-europe.com.
• Most
major credit
and debit cards accepted.
većinu
kreditnihand
i debitnih
kartica.
••AllPrimamo
enquiries
transactions
distribution
facilities are
•provided
Sve upite,
transakcije
i uvjete UK.
distribucije pruža
directly
by Panasonic
• It direktno
couldn’t Panasonic
be simpler!UK.
Ne može
biti through
jednostavnije!
••Also
available
our Internet is direct shopping
•for
Putem
našeg
izravno
i
a wide
rangeweb-mjesta
of finished možete
products.
Take akupovati
browse on
širok
raspon
Pretražite naše webour
website
forgotovih
further proizvoda.
details.
mjesto i saznajte više detalja.
Ovaj uređaj podržava tehnologiju snimanja Linear
PCM (u daljnjem tekstu "PCM"). Također možete
koristiti funkciju snimanja sa zumiranjem kojom se
smanjuju zvukovi okoline, što omogućava jasno
snimanje zvuka ispred uređaja.
Moguće je optimizirati širok raspon postavki snimanja
u skladu sa snimljenom scenom, što vam omogućava
da uključite uređaj, odaberete postavku snimanja i
zatim odmah započnete snimanje.
Preslušavanje
• Snimljena datoteka
• WMA/MP3-glazbena datoteka
• Podržava reprodukciju datoteka snimljenih drugim
uređajem
Spajanje uređaja na računalo
• Podržava punjenje preko USB-a
• Premještanje i raspoređivanje snimki/glazbe/
podatkovnih datoteka
Snimanje/reprodukcija uz uporabu
mjerača vremena
Moguće je snimanje u određeno vrijeme. Moguće je
i podesiti alarm na određeno vrijeme ili programirati
reprodukciju datoteke u određeno vrijeme.
Sadržaj
Priprema
Isporučeni pribor............................................................. 2
Značajke......................................................................... 3
Nazivi dijelova................................................................ 5
Prikaz na zaslonu .......................................................... 6
Umetanje baterije/punjenje............................................. 7
Uključivanje/isključivanje uređaja................................... 9
Funkcija zaključavanja................................................. 10
Postavljanje sata.......................................................... 11
Datoteka i mapa........................................................... 12
Odabir mape................................................................. 12
Odabir mape ili datoteke sa zaslona s popisom........... 13
HRVATSKI
Značajke
Osnovne radnje
Promjena položaja mikrofona....................................... 14
Snimanje...................................................................... 15
Reprodukcija................................................................ 17
Preslušavanje audiozapisa pomoću slušalica.............. 18
Brisanje datoteka.......................................................... 19
Napredne funkcije
Odabir scene snimanja................................................. 20
Izravna scena............................................................... 23
Odabir načina snimanja................................................ 25
Promjena osjetljivosti mikrofona................................... 26
Smanjenje šumova niske frekvencije tijekom snimanja..... 26
Ručno podešavanje razine snimanja........................... 27
Podešavanje ekvalizatora (EQ).................................... 29
Automatsko snimanje................................................... 30
VQT4J69
Snimanje
3
3
VQT4J69
Sadržaj
4
4
Sprečavanje nepotrebnog snimanja (VAS)................... 31
Funkcija prethodnog snimanja (PRE-RECORD).......... 32
Snimanje pomoću vanjskog mikrofona......................... 33
Kopiranje na druge uređaje.......................................... 34
Snimanje s drugih uređaja............................................ 35
Funkcija indeksa........................................................... 38
Mijenjanje brzine reprodukcije...................................... 39
Ponavljanje od točke A-B............................................. 39
Reprodukcija od određenog položaja (TIME SEARCH)...... 40
Reprodukcija s vraćanjem malo unatrag...................... 40
Ponavljanje reprodukcije (REPEAT)............................. 41
Preskakanje u pravilnim intervalima (TIME SKIP)........ 42
Paralelno ponavljanje................................................... 43
Naglašavanje glasa (VOICE EMPHASIS).................... 44
Podešavanje ekvalizatora reprodukcije (SOUND EQ)....... 45
Uporaba SD-kartice...................................................... 46
Uporaba funkcije pretrage datoteka............................. 47
Slušanje glazbe na ovom uređaju
(WMA/MP3-glazbene datoteke)................................... 48
Korištenje funkcije popisa za izvođenje........................ 49
Uređivanje: Podjela datoteka....................................... 51
Uređivanje: Kombiniranje datoteka.............................. 52
Uređivanje: Kopiranje ili premještanje datoteka........... 53
Funkcija koša za smeće............................................... 54
Korištenje mjerača vremena......................................... 55
Zajednički izbornik........................................................ 58
BEEP SOUND/REC LED/BATT. SETTING/ AUTO
POWER OFF/BACKLIGHT/CONTRAST/ RECYCLE
BIN/FORMAT/INIT MENU/VERSION
Korištenje s računalom
Zahtjevi sustava........................................................... 62
Spajanje uređaja na računalo....................................... 63
Otvaranje mapa na uređaju.......................................... 65
Uvoz datoteka na računalo/raspoređivanje datoteka........66
Naziv datoteke.............................................................. 67
Struktura mapa na uređaju........................................... 69
Prijenos glazbenih datoteka na uređaj......................... 71
Ostalo
Pitanja i odgovori (Često postavljana pitanja).............. 72
Poruke o pogreškama.................................................. 72
Vodič za rješavanje problema...................................... 77
Tehnički podaci............................................................. 85
Održavanje i rukovanje................................................. 87
Održavanje .................................................................. 90
ENGLISH
(Fast
forward)
bl
unaprijed)
i
(Fast
i prebacivanje
(Fast
forward)
forward)
bl i
bl(Brzo
microphone/Line-in
jack
((jack
))( )( )
bm
Utikač
za vanjski
mikrofon/linijski ulazni
utikač
External
microphone/Line-in
microphone/Line-in
jack
bm External
bm External
switch
(OPR:
Operation)
bn
Prekidač
OPR/HOLD
(Rad/(OPR:
zaključavanje)
OPR/HOLD
switch
switch
(OPR:
Operation)
Operation)
bn OPR/HOLD
bn OPR/HOLD
g/RETURN
bo
STOP
■
/RETURN
(Zaustavljanje/vraćanje)
STOP
g/RETURN
g/RETURN
bo STOP
bo STOP
*
bp
REC
REC
*(Snimanje)
*
REC
bp REC
bp●
indicator
(Status
indicator)
bq
Recording
indicator
indicator
(Status
(Status
indicator)
indicator)
bq Recording
bq Recording
Pokazatelj
snimanja
(Pokazatelj
statusa)
&
br
ERASE/A-B
&(Brisanje/A-B)
&
br ERASE/A-B
br ERASE/A-B
ERASE/A-B
speaker
bs
Built-in
speaker
speaker
Ugrađeni
zvučnik
bs Built-in
bs Built-in
bt
Headphone/earphone
jack (W)
(W)
jack (W)
Utikač
za slušalice ( ) jack
bt Headphone/earphone
bt Headphone/earphone
switch
ck
Mic/Line
switch
switch
Prekidač
Mic/Line
ck Mic/Line
ck Mic/Line
card
slot
cl
Battery/SD
card card
slot cover
cover
slotSD-karticu
cover
Poklopac
baterije/utora
za
cl Battery/SD
cl Battery/SD
plug
lever
cm
Ručica
za USB-utikač
USB
plug
lever
plug lever
cm USB
cm USB
eyelet
cn
Rupica
za vrpcu
Strap
eyelet
eyelet
cn Strap
cn Strap
slot
open)
co
cl
Utor
za
je cl
otvoren)
SD
card
SDSD-karticu
card
slot (When
(When
slot(Kada
(When
is
open)
is open)
co SD
cocard
cl is
cover
cp
Poklopac
USB-a
USB
cover
cover
cp USB
cp USB
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Part
names
Part
names
Nazivi
dijelova
MENU
(Izbornik)
5
MENU
5 MENU
5 MENU
(Pojačavanje
up)
6
++ (Volume
(Volume
up)glasnoće)
up)
6+
6 + (Volume
(Brzo
unatrag)
(Fast
backward)
7
u
(Fast
uprebacivanje
(Fast
backward)
backward)
7u
7
►
OK
q
OK
8
q
OK
q
OK
8 8
Gumbima
F1
F2 buttons
upravlja
LIST LIST
The
F1
The
F1
Theand
and
F1iF2
F2
and
buttons
F2 buttons 9
LIST
9 LIST
9
se
funkcijama
prikazanim
operate
the
function
glasnoće)
–
(Volume
down)
bk
operate
operate
the function
the function
–- (Smanjivanje
(Volume
down)
down)
bk
bk – (Volume
na zaslonu.
shown
in
shown
shown
in the
theindisplay.
display.
the display.
VQT4J81
Ugrađeni
mikrofon
microphone
1
Built-in
microphone
microphone
1 Built-in
1 Built-in
Prekidač
Zoom/stereo
switch
2
Zoom/stereo
switch
switch
2 Zoom/stereo
2 Zoom/stereo
LCD-zaslon
display
3
LCD
display
display
3 LCD
3 LCD
F1,4
F2
F2
4
F1,
F2
F1, F2
4 F1,
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
It
is
the
unit
the
ItSpremljen
is stored
stored
It is stored
inside
inside
the kada
unit
thewhen
when
when
the unit
unit
the unit
jeinside
u uređaju
jeunit
uređaj
is
connected
to
isspojen
connected
is na
connected
to a
a computer.
computer.
to a computer.
računalo.
plug
cq
USB-utikač
USB
plug plug
cq USB
cq USB
5
5
5
5
5
5
Prikaz zaslona
• Na sljedećim se primjerima zaslona objašnjavaju sve stavke. Moguće je da se neke stavke neće istovremeno prikazivati.
Prikaz na zaslonu za vrijeme snimanja:
Indeks (→ str. 38)
Broj datoteke (→ str. 16)
Pokazatelj statusa (→ str. 16)
SD-kartica (→ str. 12)
Naziv datoteke (→ str. 12)
Mjerač razine (→ str. 16)
Izravna scena (→ str. 23)
Proteklo vrijeme snimanja
Način snimanja (→ str. 25)
Scena snimanja (→ str. 20)
Pokazatelj mjerača vremena (→ str. 57)
Pokazatelj baterije (→ str. 10)
Postavka baterije (BATT. SETTING) (→ str. 59)
Pokazatelj funkcije OVER (→ str. 16)
Filtar Low cut za smanjenje buke (→ str. 26)
“
” Sinkronizirano snimanje (→ str. 37)
Preostalo vrijeme snimanja
Ulaz: Ugrađeni mikrofon
“
“: Vanjski mikrofon (→ str. 33)
“
”: Ulaz (→ str. 35)
Osjetljivost mikrofona (→ str. 26)
Razina snimanja (→ str. 27)
“
”: VAS (→ str. 31)
Prikaz na zaslonu za vrijeme reprodukcije:
Pokazatelj ponavljanja (→ str 39, 41)
Ekvalizator (EQ) zvuka (→ str. 45)
Pokazatelj statusa (→ str. 39)
Paralelno ponavljanje (→ str. 43)
Naziv datoteke (→ str. 67)
VQT4J69
Proteklo vrijeme reprodukcije
Traka statusa reprodukcije
6
6
Preskakanje vremena (→ str. 42)
Ukupno vrijeme reprodukcije (→ str. 18)
Postavka indeksa (→ str. 38)
Brzina reprodukcije (→ str. 39)
: Naglašavanje glasa (→ str. 44)
Upon
charge
once
initial
Nakon
kupnje napunite
jednom
prije prvog
Upon purchasing,
purchasing,
charge
once before
before
initial
use.
korištenja.
use.
Use
your
for
If
has
Napunite
je na računalu.
Ako se baterija
u potpunosti
Use
your computer
computer
for charging.
charging.
If the
the battery
battery
has
completely
run
takes
hours
for
isprazni, potrebno
2 sata2
potpunog
completely
run out,
out,jeitit približno
takes approx.
approx.
2 do
hours
for a
a full
full
recharge.
punjenja.
recharge.
2
2
Insert
unit’s
plug
the
Insert the
theUSB-utikač
unit’s USB
USB uređaja
plug into
into
the
Utaknite
u računalo.
computer.
computer.
USB
Poklopac
USB-a
USB cover
cover
Inserting
rechargeable
(supplied)
Umetanje
punjive
baterijebattery
(isporučena)
Inserting the
the
rechargeable
battery
(supplied)
1
rechargeable
Ni-MH
1 AAA
punjiva
Ni-MH baterija.
1 AAA
AAA
rechargeable
Ni-MH
battery
sure
Provjerite
je li baterija
battery Make
Make
sure the
the battery
battery
faces
the
right
direction.
umetnuta
u
ispravnom
smjeru.
faces the right direction.
Insert
USB
straight
Insert the
theUSB-utikač
USB plug
plug ravno
straight
Utaknite
in the
direction
the same
same
direction as
as that
that
uinsmjeru
priključka.
of
of the
the terminal.
terminal.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Inserting the
battery/Charging
Umetanje
baterije/punjenje
Firmly
the
plug
Firmly insert
insert
the USB
USBdo
plug all
all
Umetnite
USB-utikač
the
in.
USB
the way
way
in. (The
(The USB-a
USB cover
cover
kraja.
(Poklopac
neće
will
not
impede
insertion
as
it
will
not
impede
insertion
as
smetati pri umetanju jer je it
is
the unit.)
is stored
stored inside
inside
unit.)
pohranjen
unutarthe
uređaja.)
If the
cannot be
connected
to
computer
the unit
unit
be direktno
connected
to the
the
Ako Ifuređaj
nijecannot
moguće
spojiti
na computer
računalo,
directly,
use
cable
directly,USB-produžni
use the
the USB
USB extension
extension
cable (supplied).
(supplied).
upotrijebite
kabel (isporučen).
Na zaslonu
se prikazuje
A
is
on
screen.
A message
message
is displayed
displayed
on the
theporuka.
screen.
Prethodno
uključite
računalo.
•••Start
the
beforehand.
Start
the computer
computer
beforehand.
Prethodno
uređaj. (➜
(→ page
str. 9)9)
•••Turn
the
off
Turn
the unit
unitisključite
off beforehand.
beforehand.
(➜
page
9)
1
1
Take
the
Izvucite
Take out
outUSB-utikač.
the USB
USB plug.
plug.
Push and
and
slide
Gurnite
i povucite
Push
slide
until
“click”
dok
sea
začuje
until
ane
“click”
sound
is
heard.
zvuk
klika.
sound
is heard.
Storing
USB
Spremanje
Storing the
the USB-utikača:
USB plug:
plug:
The

connect
the
Prvo
povezivanje
uređaja
s računalom
The
rst
rst time
time you
you
connect
the unit
unit to
to your
your
PC
Budući
PC da će se pojaviti nekoliko poruka s tekstom
Because
multiple
New
messages
"Found
New Hardware"
(Pronađen
je novi hardver),
Because
multiple “Found
“Found
New Hardware”
Hardware”
messages
will
do
not
the
unit
from
your
nemojte
odspajati
s računala
poruke
ne
will appear,
appear,
do uređaj
not disconnect
disconnect
thedok
unitsve
from
your PC
PC
until
nestanu.
until all
all messages
messages disappear.
disappear.
*
disconnect
the
or
the
SD
●● Nikada
nemojte
isključivati
uređaj
ili vaditi
* Never
Never
disconnect
the unit
unit
or remove
remove
theSDSD
card
while
is
otherwise
karticu
se“ACCESS…”
prikazuje poruka
"ACCESS..."
jer bi
carddok
while
“ACCESS…”
is displayed,
displayed,
otherwise
this
may
damaged.
se uređaj
mogao
oštetiti.
this unit
unit
may be
be
damaged.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Charging
the
Punjenje
Chargingbaterije
the battery
battery
7
7
7
7
Inserting
the
battery/Charging
Umetanje
baterije/punjenje
3
4
Slide
the prekidač
OPR/HOLD
switch to
[ON][ON].
side.
Povucite
OPR/HOLD
nathe
stranu
Slide
the OPR/HOLD
switch to na
thestranu
[OFF]
Povucite
prekidač OPR/HOLD
side.
[OFF].
Prekidač
OPR/
OPR/HOLD
HOLD
switch
Status
indicator
Pokazatelj
statusa
Pokazatelj
statusa
počinje svijetliti
i punjenje
počinje.starts.
Na
The status
indicator
lights and
recharging
zaslonu
uređaja
pojavljuje is
seshown
i natpis in
"CHARGING"
(punjenje),
Also,
“CHARGING”
the unit’s display
and
a pokazatelj
baterije
mijenjachanges
se na način
u nastavku.
the battery
indicator
as prikazan
shown below.
CHARGING
●
Povlačenjem
prekidača
OPR/HOLD
na switch
izvornito
položaj
*● While
charging,
sliding the
OPR/HOLD
the
tijekom
punjenja
ono charging
se može prekinuti.
[ON]
side
can cancel
halfway.
●
Kada se
statusa
isključi,
punjenjeisjecomplete.
gotovo.
*● When
thepokazatelj
status indicator
goes
out, charging
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
■
■ Disconnecting
uređaja
g Odspajanje
the unit
8
8
Dvaput
kliknite
ikonu
(Windows
[ Windows
], Windows
Double-click
thena
icon
(Windows
XP:XP:
[ ],
Vista/
Vista
/ Windows
na alatnoj
na dnuof
zaslona
on[ the])task
tray at traci
the bottom
the
Windows
7: [ ])7:
računala
slijediteand
upute
na zaslonu
za odspajanje
computeri screen
follow
the on-screen
instructions
uređaja.
(Ikona
se možda
neće
prikazati,
ovisno o
to remove
the unit.
(The icon
may
not be displayed
postavkama
sustava.) Uređaj će se isključiti
depending onoperativnog
the OS settings.)
nakon
štounit
ga is
odspojite.
After the
removed, this unit turns off.
●● IfAko
se postavka
(BATT. SETTING)
u to
*
BATT.
SETTINGbaterije
in the common
menu is set
zajedničkom the
izborniku
“ALKALINE”,
batterypostavi
cannotna
be"ALKALINE",
charged.
bateriju
nije amoguće
napuniti.
* When
using
rechargeable
battery, use the supplied
●● rechargeable
Koristite isporučenu
baterijurechargeable
ili neobaveznu
battery punjivu
or the optional
punjivu(➜
bateriju
2). U slučajusold
korištenja
drugih
battery
page (→
2). Ifstr.
commercially
batteries
komercijalno
ispravanisrad
other
than thedostupnih
above arebaterija,
used, operation
notne
može se zajamčiti.
Nemojtea puniti
baterije
sa suhim
guaranteed.
Do not charge
dry cell
battery.
* Ifćelijama.
charging does not start, slide the OPR/HOLD switch
●● to
Ako
neonce,
započne,
povucite
prekidač
OPR/
thepunjenje
[ON] side
and then
to the
[OFF] again.
jednom na of
stranu
[ON],
a zatim
na
* IfHOLD
the temperature
this unit
has
risen, ponovo
an
stranu [OFF]. rechargeable battery has been inserted,
undesignated
●● or
Ako
dođe
do rasta has
temperature
ako se “ ”
BATT.
SETTING
been set uređaja,
to “ALKALINE”,
neodgovarajuća
isumetne
displayed.
(➜ page 77) punjiva baterija, ili ako je
postavka
baterije BATT.
SETTING
postavljena
na
* When
the computer
is in sleep
mode
or is restarted,
"ALKALINE",
prikazat
će se “
“. (→ str. 77)
recharging
may
be impossible.
●● Charging
Kada je računalo
u stanju
mirovanja
ga se ponovno
*
is possible
even during
datailitransfer.
pokrene,
punjenjebattery
se može
prekinuti.
* The
rechargeable
does
not need to be fully
●● depleted
Punjenjebefore
je moguće
i tijekom prijenosa podataka.
recharging.
●● The
Punjivu
bateriju nije
potrebno
u potpunosti
isprazniti
*
rechargeable
battery
or this
unit may become
hot
prije novog
punjenja.
while
charging,
but this is not a malfunction.
●● IfPthe
unjiva
baterija
mogla
bi se jako
zagrijati
*
usage
timeuređaja
becomes
remarkably
short
even
tijekomthe
punjenja,
o kvaru.the battery
though
batteryali
is nije
fully riječ
recharged,
●● has
Akoreached
se vrijeme
rada
baterije
izrazito
skrati
čak
the end of its lifespan. Purchase a inew
nakon što je baterija
u potpunosti
rechargeable
battery (➜
page 2). napunjena, znači
da je došla do kraja svog vijeka trajanja. Kupite novu
punjivu bateriju (→ str. 2).
◄ HOLD
OPR/HOLD
switch
Prekidač
OPR/HOLD
Uključivanje
Turning
the uređaja:
power ON:
Povucite
prekidač OPR/HOLD
na stranu
[ON]
biste
Slide
the OPR/HOLD
switch to [ON]
side to
turndathe
uključilion.
uređaj.
će selights
upaliti.
power
Then,Zaslon
the display
on.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
(nije
isporučena)
* An
AAA
LR03 alkaline battery (not supplied) can also
●● be
Može
se koristiti i AAA LR03 alkalna baterija (nije
used.
* Ifisporučena).
you use an alkaline battery, set the BATT. SETTING
●● in
Ako
koristili
alkalnu
bateriju, postavite
thebudete
common
menu
to “ALKALINE”.
(➜ page 59)
postavku baterije BATT. SETTING u zajedničkom
izborniku na "ALKALINE". (→ str. 59)
Uključivanje/isključivanje
Turning
the Power ON/OFF
Kada
budete
prvi
putand
palili
uređaj,
točni
Set
the
current
date
time
whenpostavite
turning this
unit
datum
i vrijeme.
(→ (➜
str.page
11) 11)
on
for the
first time.
Turning
the power
Isključivanje
uređaja:OFF:
Slide
the OPR/HOLD
switch to [OFF]
side while
unit
Pomaknite
prekidač OPR/HOLD
na stranu
[OFF]the
dok
se
is
in the stop
uređajem
ne state.
snima.
g
power offisključivanje uređaja
■■Auto
■Automatsko
The power automatically turns off after a preset time (the
Uređaj se automatski gasi nakon što istekne zadano
factory setting is 15 minutes) elapses while recording is
vrijeme (tvornička postavka je 15 minuta) tijekom
stopped.
zaustavljanja snimanja.
If the power is turned off by the auto power off function,
Ako je uređaj automatski isključen, pomaknite prekidač
slide the OPR/HOLD switch to the [OFF] side before
OPR/HOLD na stranu [OFF] prije nego što ga uključite.
turning
(→ str. the
59) power on. (➜ page 59)
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
■
koristi
baterija
sa suhim
g■Kada
Whense
using
a dry
cell battery
(notćelijama
supplied)
9
9
Turning the Power ON/OFF
Uključivanje/isključivanje
g
About the battery
■■Pokazatelj
baterijeindicator
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
The remaining battery level is displayed as below
Preostala
baterije prikazuje se kako je
while this razina
unit is operating.
navedeno u nastavku dok uređaj radi.
Blinking
Treperenje
10
10
* If the battery runs out, “ ” blinks. Replace the
●● battery
Ako se baterija
isprazni,
simbol “ battery
” počinje
or charge
the rechargeable
as treperiti.
soon as
Zamijenite bateriju ili napunite punjivu bateriju što prije.
possible.
●● Please
Zamijenite
bateriju
u roku
1 minute
da1biminute
se sačuvalo
*
replace
battery
within
approx.
for
postavljeno vrijeme.
preservation
of the clock data.
●● Depending
Ovisno o statusu
o funkciji
zaoperation
koju se
*
on thebaterije
battery ilistatus
or the
uređaj koristi,
seif uređaj
može
koristiti
neko
content
to use,ovaj
even
the power
turns
off due
to the
vrijeme exhaustion,
i nakon što se
isprazni
akoforgaa while if
battery
thisbaterija
unit may
be used
ponovno
No, zbog
ispražnjene
baterije turn
turned
onuključite.
again. However,
the
unit may suddenly
uređaj
bi se
mogao naglo
off
during
operation
due toisključiti
the low tijekom
level of rada.
battery.
●● Some
Određena
napunjenosti
baterije
potrebna or
*
levelrazina
of battery
is required
when recording,
je tijekom snimanja
kada
izvršava
brisanjefiles
performing
Deleting ili
files
(➜se
page
19), Dividing
datoteka
(→ str.
19), dijeljenje
(→FORMAT
str. 51),
(➜
page 51),
Deleting
index (➜datoteka
page 38),
brisanje
(→battery
str. 38),
formatiranje
(➜
page indeksa
60). If the
indicator
shows(→
“ str.
” 60).
Ako pokazatelj
baterije
prikazujeare
“ performed,
” (treperi)the
dok
(blinking)
and these
operations
izvršavate
radnje,
uređaj će se automatski isključiti.
power
turnsteOFF
automatically.
●● Remove
Izvadite bateriju
iz uređaja
ako
gaifne
namjeravate
*
the battery
from the
unit
you
will not use it
koristiti
dulje
vrijeme.
for
a long
period
of time.
●● Make
Nemojte
zaboraviti
ugasiti
uređaj
prije vađenja
*
sure
to turn the
power
off before
removing
baterije.
the
battery.
•
Ako
izvadite
bateriju
dok
je
uređaj
uključen,
podaci
• If the battery is removed while the unit is on, data
bi sebemogli
izgubiti,
a uređaj
may
lost or
this unit
may beoštetiti.
damaged.
Hold
function
Funkcija
zaključavanja
Radnjeoperations
s gumbimaare
neignored
provodewhen
se kada
uključite
funkciju
Button
the Hold
function
zaključavanja.
is
on.
Uključivanje
zaključavanja:
To
switch thefunkcije
Hold function
on:
Povucite
prekidač OPR/HOLD
na stranu
tijekom
Slide
the OPR/HOLD
switch to the
[HOLD][HOLD]
side during
snimanja or
ili reprodukcije.
recording
playback.
◄ HOLD
To
switch the funkcije
Hold function
off:
Isključivanje
zaključavanja:
Slide
the OPR/HOLD
switch in the
opposite direction
of
Povucite
prekidač OPR/HOLD
u suprotnom
smjeru od
[HOLD].
strane [HOLD].
◄ HOLD
●● When
Kada the
je uključena
funkcija
zaključavanja,
moguće
*
Hold function
is on,
operation is nije
ignored
koristiti
uključeni
čak i kada
suthe
gumbi
pritisnuti
even
if the
buttonsuređaj
are pressed
while
power
is on
(prikazuje
seis“HOLD
ON”),enabling
što vam you
omogućava
(“HOLD
ON”
displayed),
to prevent
da spriječiteoperations
neželjenesuch
radnje,
zaustavljanja
unintended
as poput
the stopping
of
snimanja or
ili reprodukcije.
recording
playback.
●● When
Kada recording
snimanje ili
završiwhile
dok je
uključena
*
orreprodukcija
playback finishes
the
Hold
funkcija is
zaključavanja,
function
on, the poweruređaj
turns se
off automatski
automatically.
isključuje.
snimanja.
Unesite
ispravan
datum
i vrijeme.
Ako
uređaj
a recording
sat nije
postavljen,
prikazuje
information.
Set
the
correct
date
and
time.
If
the
is
on
the
clock
is
not
set,
the
screen
shown
in
step
is
displayed.
4 time
The
clock
ishas
used
as
a file
name
(➜
page
67)
or power
to uključen,
preserve
date
time
clock
not
been
at
the
of
information.
Set
the
correct
date
and
time.
Ifjepurchase.
the
is turned
turned
on when
when
theand
clock
is
The
clock
isscreen
used
a fileset
name
page
67)
or power
to preserve
recording
date
and
time
se
zaslon
prikazan
uas
koraku
. step(➜
not
set,
the
shown
in
is
displayed.
4
The
clock
is
used
as
a
file
name
(➜
page
67)
or
to
preserve
recording
date
and
time
information.
Set
the
correct
date
and
time.
If
the
power
is
turned
on
when
the
clock
not
set,
the
screen
shown
in
step
is
displayed.
4
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
clock
• Turn the power
page 9)date and time. If the
information.
Seton.
the(➜
correct
power is turned on when the clock is
is
7
not
set,the
the
screen
shown
in
stepand
displayed.
4 is
information.
Seton.
the(➜
correct
time.
If the
power
is+,turned
onbiste
when
the
clock
is
the
clock
Pritisnite
- set
da
postavili
••Turn
power
page
9)date
7
not
set,the
the
screen
shown
indication
method
press
i.
Uključite
uređaj.
str.
9) in
Press
+, –
–+,to
to
set
theand
clock
•1
Turn
power
on.(→
(➜
page
9) step 4 is displayed.
7 Press
Press
[MENU].
not
set,
the
screen
shown
in
step
is
displayed.
4
indication
method
and
press
i.
način
prikaza
sata
i
pritisnite
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
clock
“
24h
”
and
“
AM
/
PM
”
are
displayed
for
the
••1Turn
the
power
on.
(➜
page
9)
7
Turn
the power
power
on. (➜
(➜ page
page 9)
9)
Press
[MENU].
indication
method
and
press i. .
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
clock
•2
Turn
the
on.
7 24-hour
Press
+,
–[MENU].
to
select
“COMMON
[MENU].
Pritisnite
“ 24h ””and
“ AM
/set
PM
”the
are
displayed
for
the
i +,
“display
” prikazuju
se za
24-satni
and
the
12-hour
display
Press
–
to
clock
indication
method
and
press
i.
•1Turn
the power
on.select
(➜ page
9)
7
“
24h
”
and
“
AM
/
PM
”
are
displayed
for
the
Press
[MENU].
+,
–
to
“COMMON
indication
method
and
press
i.
1
2
MENU”
[q
OK]
to enter.
24-hour
display
12-hour
display
i 12-satni
prikaz.
respectively.
+,and
–+,to-press
select
“COMMON
Press [MENU].
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
“prikaz
24h
” and
and
“ AM
/and
PM
”the
are
displayed
for
the
1
2
24-hour
display
and
the
12-hour
display
“
24h
”
“
AM
/
PM
”
are
displayed
for
indication
method
and
press
i.
“ 24h ” and “ AM / PM ” are displayed for the
the
[MENU].
MENU”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
1
Press
+,
–
to
select
“COMMON
respectively.
2
display
and
the
display
Press
– to
select[q
& enter.
TIME”
MENU"
i“DATE
zatim
pritisnite
MENU”+,and
press
OK] to
Press
+,
–
to-/set
hour
and
respectively.
24-hour
display
and
the
12-hour
display
“Pritisnite
24h ” and
“ +,
AM
PM biste
”the
are12-hour
displayed
forpress
the i
3
“COMMON
da
postavili
sat
8 24-hour
2 "COMMON
24-hour
display
and
the
12-hour
display
“COMMON
MENU”
and
press
[q
OK] to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“DATE
&
TIME”
respectively.
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
hour
and
press
3
[►
OK]
za
unos.
2
respectively.
24-hour
display
and
the
12-hour
display
8
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
i.
pritisnite
. the hour and press
Press +,and
– topress
select[q
“DATE
& enter.
TIME”
OK] to
Press
+, – to set
respectively.
3 MENU”
8
MENU”
[qenter.
OK]
to
and
[q
OK]
to
Press
+,
–
select
& enter.
TIME”
i.
Press +, – to set the hour and press
3 Pritisnite
8 respectively.
-press
da
biste
odabrali
Press
+,and
–+,to
to
set
and press
press
[q
OK]
to“DATE
enter.
8
+, –+,to- set
the minute.
Pritisnite
da biste
postavili
i.
Press +, – to select “DATE & TIME”
9
hour
and press
8 Press
select
& TIME”
and
press
[qset
OK]
to“DATE
enter.
Press
+,
to
hour
and
Press
+,
to
set
minute.
"DATE
&–
TIME"
i zatim
pritisnite
[►
8
To
change
press
u,
ipress
to
9 i.
the
year
and
press
minute.
Press
+,
–
to
and
press
[qset
OK]
to enter.
Press
+, –
–the
tosetting,
set the
the
minute.
i.
9
To
change
the
setting,
press
u,
i
to
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
the year
year
and
press
OK]
za+,unos.
move
between
the
items,
andu,
then
press
i.
Press
–
to set
Da change
biste
promijenili
postavku,
pritisnite
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
minute.
i.
9
To
the
setting,
press
i
to
the
and
press
Press +, – to set
Press
+, –
to
setitems,
the
minute.
9
move
between
the
andu,
then
press
+,
–
again
to
make
the
setting.
,
da
biste
se
kretali
kroz
stavke
i.
To
change
the
setting,
press
i
to
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
year
and
press
move
between
the
items,
and
then
press
To
change
the
setting,
press
u,
i
to
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
minute.
Pritisnite
+, - press
da
9 To
i.year and
change
the
setting,
press
u,
i
to
the
+,
– again
make
the setting.
i zatim
ponovno
pritisnite
+,
-u,
da
biste
move
between
the
and
then
press
Press
[qto
OK]
toitems,
enter.
+,
–change
again
to
make
the
setting.
move
between
the
items,
and
then
press
To
the
setting,
press
i
to
the year
and press
i.
biste
postavili
10
move
between
the
items,
and
then
press
i.
odabrali
postavku.
+,
–
again
to
make
the
setting.
Press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
date
and
time
set
andthen
the clock
+,
– again
again
toOK]
make
the
setting.
move
between
the
items,
and
press
10
godinu
i pritisnite
i.
Press
[q
toare
enter.
+,
–
to
make
the
setting.
10 The
The above illustration is a display example.
The
date
and
time
are
set
and the clock
starts
to[q
operate.
+,
– again
toOK]
make
the
setting.
Press
toare
enter.
.
Pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
10
date
and
time
set
and the clock
Press
OK]
to enter.
illustration
is a display
example.
10 The
starts
toi[q
operate.
+, –above
to set
the month
and
5 Press The
The
date
and
time
are
set
the
clock
The
above
illustration
is a display
example.
Datum
vrijeme
se
postavljeni,
a sat
radi.
starts
to[q
operate.
The
date
and
time
are
set and
and
the
clock
Press
OK]
toscreen,
enter.
10
To
exit
the
setting
press
The
date
and
time
are
set
and
the
clock
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
month
and
The
above
illustration
is
a
display
example.
5
starts
to
operate.
i.
The
above
illustration
is
a
display
example.
starts
to
operate.
The
date
and
time
are
set
and
the
clock
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
month
and
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
5 press
The
above
illustration
is
a
display
example.
[F2
(CLOSE)].
starts
to
operate.
Gornja ilustracija primjer je prikaza na zaslonu.
To
the
setting screen,
press
Za exit
izlaz
iz
za postavljanje
press
i.
Press
+,
to set
the
and
illustration
is a display
example.
5
starts
to zaslona
operate.
Press
+, –
–above
the month
date
and
press
press The
i.
[F2
(CLOSE)].
6
month
and
To
exit
the
setting
screen, press
+,to- set
da biste
postavili
5 Pritisnite
[F2
(CLOSE)].
pritisnite
[F2
(CLOSE)].
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
month
and
press
i.
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
date
and
press
5
6
i.
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Press i.
+,i –pritisnite
to set the date
press
. and press
To
the setting screen, press
6 mjesec
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
press i.
i.
Press
+,
–
to
set
the
date
and
press
6
[F2
(CLOSE)].
i. +, –+,to- set
Press
the date
and press
da biste
postavili
dan i
6 Pritisnite
Press
– to set
the date and press
i.
6The
*
clock+,
operates
pritisnite
. with the monthly loss/gain of approx. 60 seconds at normal temperature.
i.
i.
operates
loss/gain
of approx.
60 secondsexhausted.
at normal temperature.
*
willwith
be the
lost monthly
if the battery
is removed
or completely
* The
The clock
clock setting
operates
with
the
monthly
loss/gain
of approx.
60 seconds at normal temperature.
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU F2
MENU
MENU
MENU F2
F2
MENU
F2
F2
F2
F2
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Setting
the
clock
Setting
the
clock
Postavljanje
sata
Setting
the
The
clock has not
beenclock
set
at the time of purchase.
Setting
the
clock
The
clock
has
not
been
set
at
the
Sat
nije
postavljen
ua vrijeme
clock
ishas
used
asbeen
file
name
(➜ time
page of
67)purchase.
or to preserve recording date and time
Setting
the
clock
The
clock
not
set
atkupnje.
the
time
of
purchase.
Setting
the
clock
The
clock
is
used
as
a
file
name
(➜
page
67)
or
to
recording
date
time
Sat
se
koristi
kao
naziv
datoteke
(→
str.
67)
ili
za
podataka
o vremenu
i datumu
information.
Set
the
correct
date
and
time.
Ifspremanje
the
is turned
on when
theand
clock
is
The
clock
has
not
been
set
at
the
time
of
purchase.
The clock
used
a fileset
name
(➜ time
page of
67)
or power
to preserve
preserve
recording
date
and
time
The
clockishas
notasbeen
at the
purchase.
* The
The clock
clock operates
setting willwith
be the
lost monthly
if the battery
is removed
or completely
exhausted.
*
loss/gain
of
approx.
60
seconds
at
normal
temperature.
setting
willwith
be the
lost monthly
if the battery
is removed
or completely
exhausted.
*
clock
loss/gain
of
approx.
60
at
temperature.
●
Sat radi
mjesečni
gubitak/dobitak
od otprilike
sekundi
pri normalnim
temperaturama.
*● The
The
clockuzoperates
operates
with
the
monthly
loss/gain
of 60
approx.
60 seconds
seconds
at normal
normal
temperature.
*
The
clock
setting
will
be
lost
ifif the
battery
is
removed
or
completely
exhausted.
*
The
clock
setting
will
be
lost
the
battery
is
removed
or
completely
exhausted.
operates
with
the
monthly
loss/gain
of
approx.
60
seconds
at
normal
●
●
Postavka
sata
se
gubi
ako
izvadite
bateriju
ili
se
baterija
u
potpunosti
isprazni.
* The clock setting will be lost if the battery is removed or completely exhausted. temperature.
* The clock setting will be lost if the battery is removed or completely exhausted.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
4
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
File and Folder
File
Datoteka
i mapa
File and Folder
File
File
File audio data from the starting point to the ending
Recorded
Datoteka
Recorded
audio
data
from the
the starting
starting point
point to
to the
the ending
ending
point
is saved
asdata
a file.
Recorded
audio
from
Recorded
audio
data
from
the starting
point
to the od
ending
Snimljeni
audiopodaci
pohranjuju
se kao
datoteka
point
is saved
saved
asisa
a file.
file. a file.
The
point
is
as
početka
dodata
kraja.
pointsaved
is saved
as acalled
file.
The saved
saved data
data is
is called
called a
a file.
file.
The
Snimljeni
seadatoteke.
The
savedpodaci
data iszovu
called
file.
Folder
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
Folder
Folder
Folder
This
is where files are stored. This unit has the following
Mapa
This is where files are stored. This unit has the following
12
12
12
1212
12
12
12
folders.
This
files
are
This
has
following
This is
is where
where
files
are stored.
stored.
This unit
unitOvaj
has the
the
following
Mjesto
u koje
se datoteke
pohranjuju.
uređaj
ima
folders.
•folders.
“A”, “B”,
“C” and
“D” folders
for microphone
recording
folders.
sljedeće
mape.
“A”,page
“B”, “C”
“C”
and “D”
“D” folders
folders for
for microphone
microphone recording
recording
(➜
15).
••• “A”,
“B”,
and
“A”,
“B”,"A",
“C”"B",
and “D” ifolders
for
microphone
recording
•
Mape
"D" zafrom
snimanje
mikrofonom
(➜
page
15).
• (➜
“L”
folder
for files"C"
recorded
other sdevices
page
15).
(➜
page
15).
(→folder
str. 15).
•• “L”
for
files
recorded
from
other
devices
connected
to
this
unit
(➜
page
35).
“L” folder
folder for files
files recorded
recorded from
from other
other devices
devices
• “L”
•
Mapa "L"forza
datoteke(➜
snimljene
drugim uređajima
to
35).
• connected
“connected
” folder (Recycle)
deleted
connected
to this
this unit
unitwhere
(➜ page
page
35). files are placed
to
this
(➜
page
na
ovajunit
uređaj
(→
str.35).
35).files are placed
•• (➜
““ spojenim
””page
folder
(Recycle)
where
deleted
54).
folder
(Recycle) where
where deleted
deleted files
files are
are placed
placed
• “ Mapa
” folder
•
“ (Recycle)
” (Smeće) gdje se
šalju izbrisane
datoteke
(➜
• “M”
folder54).
for music (➜ page 48).
(➜ page
page
54).
(➜
54).
(→page
str. 54).
•• “M”
folder
for
music
(➜
page
48).
“
”
(OTHER
FOLDER)
where
the
folders
created
by
“M”
folder
for
music
(➜
page
48).
•• “M”
folder
(➜(→
page
48).
Mapa
"M"for
zamusic
glazbu
str. 48).
(OTHER
FOLDER)
where
theplaced
folders(➜
created
by
other
than thiswhere
unit are
page 70).
••• “““the ”””device
(OTHER
FOLDER)
the
folders
created
by
(OTHER
FOLDER)
where
the
folders
created
by
• the
Mapa
“
“
(OTHER
FOLDER)
za
mape
kreirane
na
device
other according
than this
this unit
unit
arepurposes
placed (➜
(➜ page
70).
Using
each folder
to the
recording
the
device
other
are
70).
the
device
other than
than
this
unit
are placed
placed (➜ofpage
page
70).
drugim
uređajima
(→
str.
70).
Using
each
folder
according
to the
thelater.
purposes
of
recording
enables
you
to
search
files
easily
Up
to
199
files
Using
each
folder
according
to
purposes
of
recording
Using
eachkoristite
folder according
to the purposes
ofkasnije
recording
Ako
mape
za odgovarajuću
namjenu,
enables
you
to
search
files
easily
Up
199
can
be recorded
in each
recording
folder.
enables
you
to pretražiti
search
files
easily later.
later.
Up to
to
199 files
files
enables
you
to
search
files
easily
later.
Up
to
199
files
ćete
moći
lako
datoteke.
Ufolder.
svaku
mapu
can
be
recorded
in
each
recording
Folders
are
created
in
the
internal
memory.
When
an SD
can be
be recorded
recorded
injeeach
each
recording
folder.
can
in
recording
folder.
snimanja
moguće
snimiti
do 199memory.
datoteka.
MapeanseSD
½
Folders
are
created
in
the
internal
When
card (➜are
page
46) isin
inserted,
folders
are created
in the
Folders
are
created
in
the
internal
memory.
When
an
SD
Folders
created
the
internal
memory.
When
an
SD
kreiraju
u page
unutrašnjoj
memoriji. folders
Kada se
umetne
SD½
card
(➜
46)
is
inserted,
are
created
the
same
on the
SD
card.
½ way
card½
(➜(→
page
46)
ismape
inserted,
folders
are stvaraju
created in
in
the
card
(➜
page
46)
is
inserted,
are
created
in
kartica*
str.the
46),
se nafolders
isti način
nathe
½
same
way
on
SD
card.
In this
manual,
card is written as
same
way
on
SD
same
way
on the
the microSD/microSDHC
SD card.
card.
SD-kartici.
½
In
this
manual,
microSD/microSDHC
card
is written
as
½
“SD
card”.
In
manual,
microSD/microSDHC
card
½
InUthis
this
manual,
microSD/microSDHC
card is
is written
written as
as
*
ovom
se priručniku
microSD-kartice/microSDHC“SD
card”.
“SD
card”.
“SD
card”.
kartice
označavaju kao "SD-kartica".
Selecting the folder
Selecting
the folder
Odabir mape
• Press [STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
the
unit.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the zaustavili
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj.
• •Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press
[F2
(FOLDER)].
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Press
(FOLDER)].
Press [F2
[F2
(FOLDER)].
Press
[F2
(FOLDER)].
Pritisnite
(FOLDER)].
+, –,[F2
u,
i to
Press
+,
–,folder
u, i
i
to
Press
+,
–,
select
the
Pritisnite
+, u,
-,
,andto
Press +, –,
u,
i
toda
select
the
folder
and
select
theOK]
folder
and
pressodabrali
[q
to enter.
biste
mapu
i zatim
select
the
folder
and
press
[q[►
OK]
toplaylist
enter.
“P1
to P5”
files
pritisnite
OK]
unos.
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
press
[qpresent
OK]
to za
enter.
“P1
to P5”
P5”
present playlist
playlist
files
(➜
"P1
do
P5"49).
označavaju
datoteke
“P1
to
present
files
“P1page
to P5”
present playlist
files
(➜
pageza
49).
s(➜
popisa
izvođenje (→ str. 49).
page
(➜
page 49).
49).
•• “ Simbol
” (OTHER
FOLDER)
is for the playback
“
“ (OTHER FOLDER)
označavaof files
•• ““recorded
”” (OTHER
FOLDER)
is
the
playback
of
by adatoteka
device other
than
unit.uređajima.
This
(OTHER
FOLDER)
is for
for
thethis
playback
of files
files
snimljenih
drugim
• “ reprodukciju
” (OTHER
FOLDER)
is
for
the
playback
of
files
recorded
by
a
device
other
than
this
This
unit
also
music
files
recorded
with
(or
recorded
by
aplay
device
other
than
this unit.
unit.
This
Na can
ovom
uređaju
moguće
je
reproducirati
glazbene
recorded
by
a
device
other
than
this
unit.
This
unit
can
also
play
music
files
recorded
with
(or
transferred
by)
some
Panasonic
Stereo
System
unit
can also
also
play
music files
filesnekim
recorded
with (or
(or
datoteke
kojeplay
su snimljene
uređajima
unit
can
music
recorded
with
transferred
by)
some
Panasonic
Stereo
System
devices
equipped
with
the USB
recording
function.
transferred
by)
some
Panasonic
Stereosnimanja
System
Panasonic
Stereo
System
s funkcijom
na
transferred
by)
some
Panasonic
Stereo
System
devices
equipped
with
the
USB
recording
function.
devices
equipped
withthe
the USB
USB
recording
function.
USB ili su
s njih prenesene.
devices
equipped
with
the
recording
function.
Switching
between
internal
memory
Switching
between
the
memory
Prebacivanje
s unutarnje
memorije
na SDand SD card:
Switching
between
the internal
internal
memory
Switching
between
the
internal
memory
and
SD
card:
karticu
icard
obratno:
If
the
SD
is
inserted,
the
items
for
SD card
and
SD
card:
and
SD
card:
If
the
SD card
card is
is
inserted,
the
items
for
SD
card
Ako
umetnete
SD-karticu,
stavke
za for
. SD
Press
are
displayed
the screen
step
2SD-karticu
If
SD
the
card
If the
the
SD card on
is inserted,
inserted,
theinitems
items
for
SD
card
. Press
are (MEMORY)]
displayed
onzaslonu
theselect
screen
inmemory.
step 2
2. Da
prikazuju
se na
u the
koraku
biste
[F1
are
the
in
Press
are displayed
displayed on
on to
the screen
screen
in step
step 2 .. Press
[F1 (MEMORY)]
to pritisnite
select the[F1
memory.
odabrali
memoriju,
(MEMORY)].
[F1
[F1 (MEMORY)]
(MEMORY)] to
to select
select the
the memory.
memory.
When the internal memory is selected
When the SD card is selected
When
the
internal
is
When
SD
is
Kada
unutarnja
se the
odabere
Whense
theodabere
internal
memory
is selected
selected
When
the
SD card
cardSD-kartica
is selected
selected
When
thememory
SD
card
ismemorija
selected, Kada
When
the
internal
memory
is
selected
When
the
SD
card
is
selected
When
the
SD card
card
isthe
selected,
“ ” is the
displayed
onis
screen.
When
SD
selected,
When
the
SD card
isthe
selected,
Kada
odabere
SD-kartica,
““ se
”” is
displayed
on
screen.
is displayed
displayed
on the
the
screen.
“ ” is
on
na zaslonu
se prikazuje
“ screen.
“.
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
Press [LIST ] for approx. 1 second or
Press
[LIST ]] for
approx.
1 secondilior
Držite [LIST
približno
1 sekundu
duže.
more.
Press
[LIST ] for approx. 1 second or
more.
Iditeto
korak
ako
umetnuli
SD-karticu
(→46),
str.
Go
step
SD
card
is
(➜
2 ifif an
Go
tona
step
an
SDste
card
is inserted
inserted
(➜ page
page
46),
more.
46) to
ili
na korak
niste.is inserted (➜ page 46),
Go
step
if an ako
SD card
2 not.
and
and
step
Go
tostep
step3 2ifif not.
if an SD card is inserted (➜ page 46),
and step+,3– iftonot.
Press
“INT.
Pritisnite
- select
za odabir
and
step 3 +,
if not.
Press
+, – to
select
“INT.
MEMORY”
(internal
"INT. MEMORY"
(unutarnja
Press
+, – to
select
“INT.
MEMORY”
(internal
memory
) or
“microSD
memorija)
ili
"microSD
MEMORY”
(internal
memory
orpress
“microSD
CARD”
[q OK]
CARD" and
i ))zatim
pritisnite
memory
or “microSD
CARD”
press [q OK]
[►enter.
OK] and
za unos.
to
CARD”
and
press [q OK]
to enter.
to enter.
Pritisnite
da biste
Press
+, –+,
to- select
the
Press
+,
–mapu
to
select
odabrali
i zatim
folder
and
press
[q the
OK]
Press
+,
– to
select
the
folder
and[►
press
pritisnite
OK] [q
za OK]
unos.
to
enter.
folder
and press
[q
OK]
Ako
u mapama
MUSIC
ili in
to
enter.
If
created
If
folders
have been
been
created
in
tofolders
enter.have
OTHER
FOLDER
( created
) stvorite
If
folders
have
been
in
the
MUSIC
folder
or
OTHER
the
MUSIC
folder
or
OTHER
If
folders
have
been
created
in
druge
mape,
korak3
the
MUSIC
or OTHER
FOLDER
),ponovite
repeat
step
FOLDER
(( folder
),
repeat
step
the
MUSIC
folder
or OTHER
da
biste
odabrali
ciljnu
mapu.
FOLDER
( target
), repeat
step 3
to
select
folder.
to
select the
the
folder.
FOLDER
( target
), repeat
step 3
to select the target folder.
Pritisnite
-select
dafolder.
biste
Press
–+,
to
the le
to
select+,the
target
Press
+, –datoteku
to
le
odabrali
i the
zatim
and
press
[qselect
OK] to
enter.
Press
+, – to
select
the
le
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
File
playback
starts.
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
File playback
starts.
and
press [q
OK] to enter.
File
playback
starts.
Započinje
reprodukcija
datoteke.
File
playback
starts.
screen
ZaslonList
s popisom
List
screen
List screen
Folder
:: Mapa
Folder
List screen
: Folder
: Folder
,, PLAYLIST
folders
(only
for
folders
files
PLAYLIST
folders
(only
for MUSIC)
MUSIC)
and
folders
or
files
u3 koraku
, prikazuje
se FOLDER”
mapa
PLAYLIST
(samo
When
“MUSIC”
or “OTHER
is and
selected
in or
step
folders
(only forare
MUSIC)
and folders
or files
3 , PLAYLIST
transferred
from
the
computer
displayed.
(For
of
transferred
from
the ili
computer
displayed.
(For details
details
of
za
i mape
datoteke
koje
su and
prenesene
s files
, MUSIC)
PLAYLIST
folders
(only
forare
MUSIC)
folders
or
3
transferred
frompage
the computer
are displayed.
of
PLAYLIST,
see
49.)
a
exists
(on
the
second
PLAYLIST,
see
49.)
IfPLAYLIST
a folder
folder
exists
(on(For
thenadetails
second
računala. (Detalje
mapiIf
potražite
str. of
transferred
frompage
theocomputer
are displayed.
(For
details
PLAYLIST,
see page
49.) If(e.g.
a folder
exists
(on the
second
hierarchy)
under
the
Artist
A),
select
“Artist
hierarchy)
under
the folder
folder
Artist
A), hijerarhije)
select
“Artist
49.) Ako mapa
postoji
(na
drugoj
razini
pod
PLAYLIST,
see page
49.)
If(e.g.
a folder
exists
(on the
second
hierarchy)
under
the folder
(e.g.
Artist A),
select
“Artist
A”
and
[q
OK].
Then,
the
under
A”
A”
and press
press
[q
OK].
Then,
the folder
folder
under
“Artist
A” is
is[►
mapom
(npr.
Artist
odaberite
"Artist
A"
i “Artist
pritisnite
hierarchy)
under
theA),
folder
(e.g.
Artist
A),
select
“Artist
A”
and press
[qdetails
OK]. Then,
the hierarchy,
folder under
“Artist
is
displayed.
(For
of
see
page
69.)
displayed.
(For
details
of folder
folder
see
page A”
69.)
OK].
se mapa
naziva
"Artist
A".“Artist
(Detalje
o
A”
andPrikazat
press
[qće
OK].
Then,
the hierarchy,
folder
under
A”
is
displayed. (For details of folder hierarchy, see page 69.)
hijerarhiji mapa
potražite
na str.
69.)
displayed.
(For details
of folder
hierarchy,
see page 69.)
Pressing
will
Pressing u
u several
several times
times on
on the
the screen
screen in
in step
step 4 will
Pressing
several
times onin
the
screen
step
4 will
switch
the
screen
to
steps
or
.. Also,
itit
2puta
switch
theu
screen
to screens
screens
steps
orin
Also,
Pressing
u
several
times onin
the
screen
inu3
step
will
4
Pritiskom
na
na
zaslonu
nekoliko
koraku
switch
the screen
screens
in steps
it ,
2 or
3to
is
possible
to
folder
hierarchies
select
is
possible
to move
moveto
among
folder
hierarchies
to...Also,
select
switch
the
screen
toamong
screens
in koraka
steps
or
Also,
it
zaslon
se
prebacuje
na
one
iz
ili
Moguće
2
3
is
possible
to
move among folder hierarchies to select
folders
and
files.
folders
and
files.
is
tokroz
move
among folder
to select
jepossible
i kretanje
hijerarhije
mapahierarchies
za odabir mapa
i
folders
and files.
folders
files.
datoteka.
*
When
there
is
*
Whenand
there
is no
no file
file in
in the
the selected
selected folder,
folder, “NO
“NO FILE”
FILE”
*
there
is no file
in the
selected
folder,
“NO FILE”
is
displayed.
is
displayed.
●● When
Kada
u odabranoj
mapi
nema
datoteke,
prikazuje
se
*
When
there
is no file
in the
selected
folder,
“NO FILE”
displayed.
*
The
“A”,
“B”,
“D”,
“L”,
““ (recycle
(recycle bin)”
bin)” and
and
* is
The
“A”, "NO
“B”, “C”,
“C”,
“D”,
“L”, “M”,
“M”,
FILE"
(Nema
datoteke).
isporuka
displayed.
bin)”
and
*
The
“A”,
“B”,"B",
“C”,"C",
“D”,"D",
“L”, "L",
“M”,
“ (recycle
”
folders
are
displayed
as
“MIC_A
(MIC_A_SD),
“
●
●
M
ape
"A",
"M",
“
(Koš
za
smeće)”
”
folders
are
displayed
as
“MIC_A
(MIC_A_SD),
“
* The “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “L”, “M”, “ (recycle bin)” and
are displayed
as “MIC_A
(MIC_A_SD),
“MIC_B
MIC_C
(MIC_C_SD),
MIC_D
i “ ”” folders
” (MIC_B_SD),
prikazuju
se kao
"MIC_A
(MIC_A_SD),
(MIC_B_SD),
MIC_C
(MIC_C_SD),
MIC_D
folders
are displayed
as “MIC_A
(MIC_A_SD),
“MIC_B
MIC_B
MIC_C
MIC_D
(MIC_D_SD),
LINE
MUSIC,
MIC_B(MIC_B_SD),
(MIC_B_SD),
MIC_C(MIC_C_SD),
(MIC_C_SD),
MIC_D
(MIC_D_SD),
LINE (LINE_SD),
(LINE_SD),
MUSIC, RECYCLE
RECYCLE
MIC_B
(MIC_B_SD),
MIC_C
(MIC_C_SD),
MIC_D
(MIC_D_SD),
LINE
MUSIC,
RECYCLE
(MIC_D_SD),
LINE(LINE_SD),
(LINE_SD),
MUSIC,
RECYCLE
and
OTHER
respectively
on
list
and
OTHER FOLDER”
FOLDER”
respectively
on the
the
list screen.
screen.i
(MIC_D_SD),
LINE (LINE_SD),
MUSIC,
RECYCLE
and
OTHER
FOLDER”
respectively
on the list
screen.
OTHER
FOLDER"
na brackets
zaslonu
sare
popisom.
(Oznake
u
(The
indications
in
displayed
when
(The
indications
in the
the
brackets
are
displayed
when
and
OTHER
FOLDER”
respectively
on
the
list
screen.
zagradama
kada se
koristi
SD-kartica).
(The
indications
in the se
brackets
are
displayed
when
using
the
card.)
using
the SD
SDprikazuju
card.)
(The
indications
in
the
brackets
are
displayed
when
●● Pressing
Pritiskom
na card.)
[LIST
P] dok jeunit
uređajstopped
zaustavljen
ili
the [LIST
SD
]] while
*
while the
the unit is
is stopped or
or during
during
* using
Pressing
[LIST
using
thereprodukcije
SD card.)
tijekom
odmah
će se
prikazati
zaslon
] while
the unit
is stopped
or
during
* playback
Pressing
[LIST
will
directly
display
the
screen
(current
folder)
will mapa)
directly
display
the
screen
(current
folder)
] while
the unit
is stopped
or during
* playback
Pressing
[LIST
(trenutačna
prikazan
u
koraku
.
playback
the screen (current folder)
shown
step
4 .. display
shown in
in will
stepdirectly
playback
will
directly
display the screen (current folder)
shown in step 4 .
shown in step 4 .
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj.
••Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the zaustavili
unit.
• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop 1
the
unit.
Press
[LIST
] for approx.
second
or
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Selecting
the
folder
or

le
the
list
screen
Odabir
mape
ili
datoteke
sain
zaslona
s popisom
Selecting
the
folder
or

le
in
the
list
screen
Selecting
the
folder
or

le
in
the
list
screen
When
“MUSIC”
or
“OTHER
FOLDER”
is
in
When
“MUSIC”
or
“OTHER
FOLDER”
is selected
selectedodaberu
in step
step
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press [STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
Ako se mape "MUSIC" ili "“OTHER FOLDER"
When “MUSIC” or “OTHER FOLDER” is selected in step
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Switching
microphone
position
Promjena položaja
mikrofona
Možete
mikrofona
na to
ZOOM
dato
zvuk koji
bio in
naglašen.
Promijenite
položaj
mikrofona
You
switch
microphone
position
ZOOM
with
the
front
emphasised.
Switch
the
You can
canpromijeniti
switch the
the položaj
microphone
position
to
ZOOM
tobirecord
record
withsnimate
the sound
sound
in
front of
of you
you
emphasised.
Switch
the
ovisno
o uporabi.
microphone
position depending
depending on
on the
the use.
use.
microphone
position
STEREO
STEREO
STEREO
Microphone
position
Položaj mikrofona
Microphone
position
STEREO
STEREO
Operates
as
stereo
microphone.
Radi kao uobičajeni
stereo
mikrofon.
Operates
as an
an ordinary
ordinary
stereo
microphone.
ZOOM
ZOOM
Records
the
in
of
Zvuk kojiwith
snimate
je ovime
naglašen.
Records
with
the sound
sound
in front
front
of you
you emphasised.
emphasised.
ZOOM
ZOOM
ZOOM
Recommended
uses
Preporučena
uporaba
Recommended
uses
Suitable
for
recording
events
such
as
meeting
Prikladno
za
snimanje
događaja
poput
Suitable for recording events such as a
a sastanaka
meeting or
orili
performance
by
a
number
izvedbi velikog
ljudi.
performance
bybroja
a large
large
number of
of people.
people.
½
*½
Suitable
such
as
lecture
Prikladnofor
zarecording
snimanjeevents
događaja
poput
Suitable
for
recording
events
such
as a
a predavanja
lecture or
or ili
interview,
where
is
from
cc
intervjua, gdje
sesound
zvuk emitira
iz određenog
smjera.
interview,
where
sound
is emitted
emitted
from a
a speci
speci
direction.
direction.
½
*
Pokazatelj
se mijenja
ovisno
o
The
indication
changes
depending
½
The
indication
changes
depending
položaju
mikrofona.
on
the microphone
position.
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
on the microphone position.
14
14
14
14
●● Uređaj ima scene snimanja (→ str. 20) za koje se, prilikom svake uporabe, bilježe preporučene postavke snimanja,
*
unit
scenes
page
for which
recommended
recording
settings
are
registered
* This
This
unit has
has recording
recording
scenes (➜
(➜također
page 20)
20)
which the
the
recommended
recording
settings
are23))
registered for
for each
each
a promjenom
položaja mikrofona
se for
mijenjaju
scene
snimanja. (Izravna
scena
(→ str.
use, and
switching
the
position also
the
recording
scene.
(Direct
(➜
23))
andsnimanja
switchingnemojte
the microphone
microphone
also changes
changes
thetako
recording
scene.
(Direct scene
scene
(➜ page
page
●● use,
Tijekom
mijenjatiposition
položaj mikrofona
jer se
željene
karakteristike
snimanja
neće23))
sačuvati.
*
Do
not
switch
the
microphone
position
during
recording.
The
intended
recording
characteristics
will
not
be
obtained.
*● Do
not switch
the microphone
positionradi
during
recording.
The
intended
recording
characteristics
will se
notza
besnimanje
obtained.
●
Funkcija
promjene
položaja mikrofona
i kada
se koristi
ugrađeni
mikrofon.
Funkcija
ne radi kada
* The
The microphone
microphone position
position function
function operates when
when the built-in
built-in microphone is
is used.
used. ItIt does
does not
not operate
operate when
when an
an external
external microphone
microphone
*
koristi spojeni vanjski
mikrofonoperates
(→ str. 33) ili the
kada je namicrophone
uređaj spojen
drugi uređaj
za snimanje
(→ str.
35).
is connected
connected for
for recording
recording (➜
(➜ page
page 33)
33) or
or when
when aa different
different device
device is
is connected
connected for
for recording
recording to
to this
this unit
unit (➜
(➜ page
page 35).
35).
is
● 1
2
1
2
2
2
Press [F2
(FOLDER)].
Pritisnite
[F2
(FOLDER)].
u,
i
Press
[F2
(FOLDER)].
Press
u,
i
to
select
the
Pritisnite
Press
u,
i,
to
select
the
Press
u,
i
recording
da
biste
odabrali
to
select
the
recording
to
select thefolder
destination
odredište
recording
destination
folder
recording
snimanja
zatim
and pressi [q
OK]
destination
folder
and
press[►
[q
OK]
destination
folder
pritisnite
OK]
to
enter.
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
and
press
[q
OK]
For
microphone
recording,
select a folder
za
unos.
to
enter.
For
microphone
recording,
select
a folder
among
folders
“A”, “B”, “C” and
“D”.
Za
snimanje
s mikrofonom
odaberite
jednu
to
enter.
For microphone recording, select a folder
3
3
3
3
Press [REC *] (Recording starts).
Press
[REC
*] (Recording
starts).
Pritisnite
[REC
●] (Započinje
Press [REC *] (Recording starts).
snimanje).
Press
[REC *] (Recording
starts).
The recording
indicator
The
indicator
lightsrecording
on.
The
indicator
lightsrecording
on. to
Pokazatelj
snimanja
Press [STOP g/RETURN]
stop
The
recording
indicator
lights
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
se
pali.on.
lights
on.
recording.
Press
[STOP g/RETURN] to stop
recording.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da
recording.
To pause
recording:
recording.
biste zaustavili
snimanje.
To
pause
recording:
1 Press [REC *] during recording.
ToRecording
pause
recording:
Press
[REC
*] during
1
indicator
blinks.recording.
To
pause
recording:
Pauziranje
snimanja:
Press
[REC
*]
during
recording.
1 Recording
indicator
blinks.to
Press
[REC
*]
again
resume
recording.
2
Press
[REC
*]
during
recording.

Pritisnite
[REC
●]
tijekom
snimanja.
1
indicator
blinks.
Press [REC
*] again
to resume
recording.
2 Recording
Recording indicator
blinks.
Pokazatelj
snimanja
treperi.
2 Press [REC *] again to resume recording.
Press [REC
*] again
to resume
recording.
2 Ponovno

pritisnite
[REC
●] za nastavak
4
4
4
4
snimanja.
For microphone
recording,
select
a folder
among
folders
“A”,
“B”,
“C”
“D”.
od
mapa
"A",setting
"B",
"C"
"D".and
(The
factory
is ili
“A”)
For
microphone
recording,
select
a folder
among
folders
“A”, “B”,
“C” and “D”.
(The
setting
isje“A”)
(Tvornička
postavka
"A")
Whenfactory
you
select
a “B”,
folder
for “A”, “B”,
among
folders
“A”,
“C”except
and “D”.
(The factory
setting
is “A”)except for “A”, “B”,
When
you recording
select
a folder
Kada
odaberete
neku
mapu osim
“C” orfactory
“D”,
automatically
saved
(The
setting
isisdrugu
“A”)
When
you
select
a
folder
except
for “A”,
“B”,
“C”
or
“D”,
is automatically
saved
"A",
"B"
"C"recording
ili "D",asnimka
se automatski
in “A”.
When
you
select
folder
except
for “A”,
“B”,
“C”
or
“D”,
recording
is
automatically
saved
in “A”.
sprema
u mapu
"A". is automatically saved
“C”
or “D”,
recording
in “A”.
in “A”.
* Change the recording mode or microphone sensitivity as necessary. (➜ pages 25, 26)
Change
theis
recording
mode
or microphone
sensitivity
as necessary.
(➜
pages
25, 26)
●*
potrebi
promijenite
način
snimanja
ili osjetljivost
mikrofona.
(→ str.
25,
26)recommended
*● Po
A function
available for
simultaneously
retrieving
all
the
recording
settings
for
Change
the
mode
or microphone
sensitivity
as
necessary.
(➜ pages
25, 26) za scenu
●*
ostupna
je
funkcija
istovremeno
preuzimanje
svih
postavki
snimanja
preporučenih
*
A
function
isrecording
available
for
simultaneously
retrieving
all the
recording
settings
recommended
for
the
recording
scene. za
(➜
page
*● D
Change
the
recording
mode
or20)
microphone
sensitivity
as
necessary.
(➜ pages
25, 26)
* koja
A function
is available
forpage
simultaneously
retrieving all the recording settings recommended for
se
(→ str.(➜
20)
recording
scene.
20) recording,
If the
filesnima.
size
exceeds
2 GB
during
the recording
stops tentatively
at the point when
* the
A
function
is available
for
simultaneously
retrieving
all the recording
settings recommended
for
the
recording
scene. (➜
page
20)
●*● A
ko
veličina
premaši
2 GBrecording,
tijekom resumes
snimanja,
snimanje
se
privremeno
u
If
the
file reaches
sizedatoteke
exceeds
GB during
the recording
stops
tentatively
at zaustavlja
thenot
point
when
data
2 GB.
the
with
a new
file.
Recording
is
available
the
recording
scene.
(➜2Then,
page
20) recording
* trenutku
If the
file kada
size exceeds
2Then,
GB during
recording,
the
recording
stopsfile.
tentatively
thenot
point
when
količina
podataka
dostigne
2 GB.
Zatim
se snimanje
nastavlja
satnovom
datotekom.
the
data
reaches
2
GB.
the
recording
resumes
with
a
new
Recording
is
available
during
thesize
interval
(approx.
2during
seconds)
from when
the recording
stops
to when
recording
* Snimanje
If
the file
exceeds
2uGB
recording,
recording
stops
tentatively
atthe
thesnimanja
point when
nije
dostupno
intervalu
(približno
2the
sekunde)
od
trenutka
zaustavljanja
do
the data
reaches
2(approx.
GB. Then,
the recording
a new
file. Recording
is not
available
during
the
interval
2 seconds)
from resumes
when
thewith
recording
to when the
recording
resumes.
the
data
reaches
2 GB.
Then,
the recording
resumes
with
a new stops
file. Recording
is not
available
trenutka
nastavljanja
snimanja.
during
the
interval
(approx.
2
seconds)
from
when
the
recording
stops
to
when
the
recording
resumes.
* during
Note
ifthe
your
finger(approx.
or an object
touches
this
unit
during
recording,
the
noise
will
be
interval
2
seconds)
from
when
the
recording
stops
to
when
the
recording
●*● Ako
vrijeme
snimanja
prstomtouches
ili nekim
predmetom
dotaknete
uređaj,
nastali
resumes.
Noteza
if your
finger
or an
object
this
unit during
recording,
the noise
willšumovi
be
recorded
through
microphone.
resumes.
se finger
prekothe
mikrofona.
* snimit
Note
if će
your
or
an
object touches this unit during recording, the noise will be
recorded
through
the
microphone.
* Note if your finger or an object touches this unit during recording, the noise will be
recorded through the microphone.
recorded through the microphone.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
■
STOP g/RETURN
/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
F2
STOP g/RETURN
F2
STOP g/RETURN
REC *
F2 REC
F2 REC *
REC *
REC *
Turn the
power
on. (➜ pageto9)stop the unit.
••• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
Select
the
microphone
position.
Turn
the
power
on. (➜ page
9) (➜ page 14)
zaustavili
uređaj.
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
unit.
Select
the microphone
position.
(➜the
page
14)
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the
unit.
Odaberite
položaj
mikrofona.
14)
Press
(FOLDER)].
•1Select
the[F2
microphone
position.(→
(➜str.
page
14)
•1Select
the
microphone
position.
(➜
page
14)
Press [F2 (FOLDER)].
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Recording
Snimanje
Recording
Recording
•• Turn
the power
on.(→
(➜ page
Uključite
uređaj.
9) 9)
Recording
•• Turn
the
power
on. (➜str.
page
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to9)stop
the unit.
• Press
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Recording
Snimanje
Screenna
display
during
recording:
Prikaz
zaslonu
za vrijeme
snimanja:
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
1
2
3
16
16
Note za
when
recording
Napomena
snimanje
This unit
is equipped
with a high-sensitivity
Ovaj je uređaj
opremljen
visokoosjetljivim
mikrofonom.
if a breath
or wind za
Zato akomicrophone.
zvuk vjetra iliAccordingly,
daha uđe direktno
u mikrofon
directly
hits
the
microphone
during
recording,
vrijeme snimanja, zvuk izrezivanja vjetra mogao
bi se
wind-cutting
sound
may be recorded or
snimiti ili the
bi se
glas mogao
loše čuti.
6
voice may be difficult to hear.
1. To možete spriječiti
4
1. This can be
7
tako da vlastitim tijelom
prevented by
indication
1
Pokazatelj
statusa
 Status
blokirate vjetar da ne
blocking the
*●: :During
recording
Tijekom
snimanja
bi direktno ulazio u
hII::During
recording
pause,
recording
standby,
past recording
wind with your
Tijekom
pauziranja
snimanja,
snimka
u stanju
mikrofon.
standby
body so that
čekanja,
prethodna snimka u stanju čekanja
2. Dok diktirate u uređaj,
Folder name (➜ page 12), File number
2
the wind does
 Naziv mape (→ str. 12), broj mape
malo odmaknite uređaj
Level
meter
3
not directly hit the unit.
od usta ili ga udaljite.
Mjerač razine
 Displays
the volume input into this unit. (Stereo (L/R))
2. During dictation
prikazuje
glasnoća.
(Razinaduring monaural
L Njime
and Rse
volumes
areulazna
displayed
respectively
Postavljanjem
funkcijeslightly
LOW
recording,
Keep distance
Udaljite
uređaj
glasnoće(➜
za page
stereo25)
(L/R))
L i RNote
prikazuje
se imonaural
tijekom
recording
as well.
that the
CUT FILTER
(→ str.
move
this26)
unitna
monotičkog
snimanja
(→ str. 25).
Imajte
naR.
umu da
recording
data
are synthesised
from
L and
"ON" (Uklj.)from
smanjuju
seyour
front
of
monotičkemode
snimke
sintetiziranjem L i R.
(➜nastaju
page 25)
4 Recording
zvukovi nižih
frekvencija.
mouth
or keepNa
Načinindication
snimanja (→ str. 25)
 OVER
5
ovaj način moguće
distance.je smanjiti
If
the
input
volume
is
excessive
and
the
level
meter
swings,
 Pokazatelj OVER
zvuk izrezivanja
Turning vjetra.
the “LOW CUT FILTER” (➜ page 26) to
“ Ako” je
is ulazna
displayed.
glasnoća prevelika i mjerač razine se
“ON” reduces
the sound
low frequency
range.
Possible
remaining
recording
time
●● Zvuk može
preskakivati
tijekomofsnimanja
(pogotovo
6 njiše, prikazuje se “
”.
This
may help the ovisno
reduction
of the wind-cutting
Displays the remaining recording time (possible recording time)
tijekom
PCM-snimanja)
o uvjetima
korištenja
 Moguće preostalo vrijeme snimanja
sound.
in the selected recording mode.
unutarnje
memorije i SD-kartice. Preporučujemo
U odabranom načinu rada prikazuje se preostalo
sensitivity (➜ page 26)
7 Microphone
da ih formatirate na ovom uređaju (→ str. 60) prije
vrijeme snimanja (moguće vrijeme snimanja).
* Sound may jump during recording (especially
snimanja.
 Osjetljivost mikrofona (→ str. 26)
PCM recording) depending on use conditions
See page 6 for other screen displays.
of the internal memory and SD card.
Objašnjenja ostalih prikaza na zaslonu potražite na 6.
Formatting them on this unit (➜ page 60)
str.
before recording is recommended.
5
STOP g/RETURN
Pritisnite
[► OK]
(Započinje
[q OK]
(Playback
starts).
1 Press
Adjusting
the volume
reprodukcija).
Adjusting
the volume
Turn
up the volume:
Press +.
Podešavanje
glasnoće
Turn
down
volume:
Press
Turn
up thethe
volume:
Press
+. –.
Za
pojačavanje
glasnoće:
Pritisnite
+.
Volume
range is 0 to
20.
Turn
down the volume:
Press
–.
Za
smanjivanje
glasnoće:
Pritisnite
-.
(The factory setting is “10”.)
Volume range
is 0 to 20.se od 0 do 20.
Raspon
glasnoće
If you turn
the unitkreće
off with the volume set to 17
(The factorypostavka
setting isje“10”.)
(Tvornička
10.)
or more, the volume will
be set to 16 next time
If
you
turn
the
unit
off with the volume set to 17
Ako
je glasnoća
the unit
is turned17
on.ili viša u trenutku
or
more,
the
volume
will
bega
setsljedeći
to 16 next
isključivanja uređaja, kada
put time
the
unit isglasnoća
turned on.
Operations
during
uključite,
će biti 16. playback
Operations
during
playback
Radnje
tijekom
reprodukcije
Jump
(Skip):
Press
.
u, i
Press u midway while playing a file and
Preskakanje:
Pritisnite
,. .
Jump (Skip):
Press
u, i
playback jumps
to the beginning of
the
Akothe
pritisnete
tijekom
Press
midway
whilereprodukcije
playing a fileneke
and
u
file. Toreprodukcija
return to the
file,početak.
press u
datoteke,
ćeprevious
sethe
vratiti
na
the playback jumps
to
beginning
of the
within approx.
1 second
from the
beginning
Za povratak
na prethodnu
datoteku,
pritisnite
file. To return
to the previous
file,
press u
of the
file.
unutar
1
sekunde
od
početka
reprodukcije
datoteke.
within approx. 1 second from the beginning
Fast
backward/Fast
forward (Search):
of the
file.
Brzo
prebacivanje
unaprijed/unatrag
Pressbackward/Fast
and hold u, forward
i.
Fast
(Search):
(Pretraživanje):
To
stop:
Press
Press
and
hold[STOP
u, i.
Pritisnite
i držite
, g/RETURN].
.
To stop: Press Pritisnite
[STOP g/RETURN].
Zaustavljanje:
[STOP ■/RETURN].
Odabir
Select adatoteke
le
Pritisnite
za odabir.
Press
u,ai
Select
,leto select.
Nakon
svakog
pritiskathe
mijenja
se brojchanges.
datoteke.
Each time
you press,
file number
Press u, i to select.
Broj
datoteke/Ukupni
broj
File
number/Total
number
of files
Each time you press,
the
file
number
changes.
in datoteka
the folderu mapi
File number/Total number of files
in the folder
Naziv
Folder
mape
name
Preostalo
Folder
name
Remaining
vrijeme
Pokazatelj
recording
Memory
snimanja time
korištenja
Remaining
usage
recording
time
indication
memorije
FOLDER
Memory
Mapa
(➜
12)
usage
(→ page
str. 12)
indication
FOLDER
PrimjerScreen
prikazadisplay
na zaslonu
kada
se uređaj
zaustavi
example
while
stopped
(➜
page
12)
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
■
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
/RETURN
• Select
a folder.
(➜ page 12)
zaustavili
uređaj.
• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
•• Select
a file.mapu.
(➜ right) str. 12)
Odaberite
• Select
a folder. (➜ (→
page 12)
• Select
OPress
daberite
(→ desno)starts).
[qdatoteku.
OK]
(Playback
•1
a file.
(➜
right)
Screen display example while stopped
You can also select the file on the list screen.
Možete
i datoteku sa zaslona s
(➜
pageodabrati
13)
You can also select the file on the list screen.
popisom. (→ str. 13)
(➜ page 13)
*
unitpamti
remembers
last file played
and
●● The
Uređaj
zadnju the
reproduciranu
datoteku
the
stop position
for ieach
folder.kojem je
u svakoj
mapi, kao
mjesto
* The
unit remembers
the
last na
file played and
zaustavljena.
the
stop position for each folder.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Playing
Reprodukcija
Playing ••Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da the
biste
17
17
17
17
Playing
Playing
Checking
Checking information
information
Reprodukcija
Playing
You
the
You can
can check
check
the file
file information
information or
or current
current time.
time.
Playing
Provjera
informacija
•• Press
[STOP
to stop
Pressprovjeriti
[STOP g/RETURN]
g/RETURN]
stop the
theiliunit.
unit.
Checking
information
Možete
informacije otodatoteci
trenutačno
Checking
information
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN].
vrijeme.
1
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN].
1
You
can
check
the
file
information
or
current time.
time.
information
screen
You The
can
check
the
file
information
or
current
The information screen
Pritisnite
[STOP
■
/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj.
••Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the zaustavili
unit.
appears.
• Press
[STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
appears.
11
Press [STOP
[STOP
g/RETURN].
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN].
Press
g/RETURN].
2
2
Move
information
Zaslon
s informacijama
Move the
the
information screen
screen up
up or
or down
down
using
+
or
–.
pomičite
prema
gore
ili
using + or –.
The
contents
dolje
pomoću
+ ili -.can
The following
following
contents
can be
be confirmed
confirmed on
on the
the
information
screen.
Sljedeći
sadržaj
može se screen up or down
Move
the
information
information
screen.
Move
the
information
screen
up
or
down
potvrditi
na
zaslonu
s
informacijama.
Current
:: Current
using ++time
or –.
–.
Current
time
Current time
time
using
or
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
22
18
18
18
18
The information
screen
Prikazuje
se zaslon
s
The
information
screen
appears.
informacijama.
appears.
The
following
contents
be confirmed
on the
Trenutačno
vrijeme
: can
Trenutačno
vrijeme
Remaining
recording
remaining
Remaining
recording
time
Possible
remaining
The
following
contentstime
can:: Possible
be confirmed
on the
information
screen. time)
(Possible
recording
time
the
Preostalorecording
vrijeme
: Preostalo
moguće
vrijeme
(Possible
recording
recording
time in
in
the
information
screen. time)
recording
mode
currently
snimanja
(Moguće snimanja
u trenutačno
Current
time
: Current
time
recording
mode
currently
Current
time
: Current
time
vrijeme
snimanja)
postavljenom
načinu
snimanja
being
set
being setremaining
Remaining recording time : Possible
Remaining
recordingtime
time
½: Possible remaining
Recording
date
and
time
when
Datum i vrijeme
: Datum
½ : Date
(Possible
recording
time)
recording
timesnimanja
in the the
Recording
date and
andtime)
time
:recording
Datei vrijeme
and time
time
when
the
(Possible
recording
in
the
snimanja*
odabrane
datoteke
selected
file
was
recorded
recording
mode
currently
selected
file
wascurrently
recorded
recording
mode
Ukupno
vrijeme
odabrane
datotekefile
Total
playback
time
:: being
Length
of
set
Total
playback
time : Duljina
Length
of the
the selected
selected
file
being
set
reprodukcije
File
format
Format
of
the
selected
Recording
date and time½½ :: Date
and
time
when thefile
File
format
Format
of
the
selected
file
Recording
date
and time
: the
DateModabrane
and
time when
the
½Format
datoteke
:
Format
datoteke
This
is
not
displayed
for
(MUSIC)
folder
or
½
selected
file was
recorded
This is not displayed for the
M (MUSIC)
folder
or
selected
file
was
recorded
*
Ove
informacije
ne
prikazuju
se
za
mape
M
OTHER
FOLDER
). : Length of the selected file
Total
playback
time ( ).
OTHER
FOLDER
Total
playback
time ( FOLDER
: Length( of the
(MUSIC)
ili OTHER
). selected file
File format
: Format of the selected file
To
exit
the
information
screen:
File
format
: Format of the selected file
To
exit
the
information
screen:
½
Da
biste
izašli
iz
zaslona
s
informacijama,
This
is not displayed for the M (MUSIC) folder or
½
Press
[STOP
This
is not g/RETURN].
displayed for the M (MUSIC) folder or
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN].
učinite
sljedeće:
OTHER
FOLDER
( ).
OTHER FOLDER ( ).
Pritisnite [STOP ■/RETURN].
18 To
To exit
exit the
the information
information screen:
screen:
18
Press [STOP
[STOP g/RETURN].
g/RETURN].
18
18 Press
18
18
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 18
18
Listening to the audio
using
earphones
Preslušavanje
audiozapisa
Listening
to
the
audio
Listening
to the
audio
Connect
stereo
(not
pomoću
slušalica
Connect
stereo earphones
earphones
(not supplied).
supplied).
Plug
type:
ø
3.5
mm
stereo
mini
plug
Plug
type: ø 3.5
mm stereo mini plug
using
earphones
using
earphones
Spojite stereoslušalice
(nisu isporučene).
Recommended
Recommended additional
additional earphones:
earphones:
Vrsta utikača:
Ø 3,5 mm stereo
miniutikač
Panasonic
RP-HV154,
RP-HJE120
Connect
stereo
earphones
(not
supplied).
Panasonic
RP-HV154,
RP-HJE120
Connect
stereo
earphones
(not
supplied).
Preporučene
dodatne
slušalice:
(the
product
number
is
correct
asplug
of
Plug
type:
ø
3.5
mm
stereo
mini
(the
product
number
is correct
of May
May 2012.)
2012.)
Plug
type: ø
3.5
mm stereo
miniasplug
Panasonic
RP-HV154,
RP-HJE120
Recommended
additional
earphones:
(brojevi proizvodaadditional
važeći su
od
svibnja 2012.)
Recommended
earphones:
Monitoring
the
Monitoring
the
Panasonic RP-HV154,
RP-HV154, RP-HJE120
RP-HJE120
Panasonic
recording
inMay
progress
snimanja
(the product
product number
number is
isNadgledanje
correct as
as of
ofin
2012.)
recording
progress
(the
correct
May
2012.)
Adjusting
the
volume:
Podešavanje
glasnoće:
Monitoring
the
Adjusting
the
volume:
Built-in
speaker
Ugrađeni
zvučnik
Built-in
speaker
Built-in speaker
Built-in speaker
Insert
Utaknite
Insert
securely.
do
kraja.
securely.
Insert
Insert
securely.
securely.
Monitoring
thevolume tako
You
can
the
Glasnoću
možete
You
can adjust
adjust
thepodesiti
volume by
by
recording
in
progress
pressing
+,
the
recording
recording
in
progress
da
pritisnete
-, što
neće
pressing
+, –,
–,+,but
but
the
recording
level
(➜
page
27)
is
not
utjecati
razinu
(→
level
(➜na
page
27) snimanja
isvolume:
not
Adjusting
the
Adjusting
the
volume:
affected.
str. 27).
affected.
You
can adjust the volume by
You can adjust the volume by
pressing +, –, but the recording
pressing
+, –, but the recording
Preslušavanje
Listening
to
the
level
(➜ page 27)
notaudio
Listening
to isis
the
level
(➜ page 27)
not audio
affected.
audiozapisa
tijekom
during
affected.
during playback
playback
reprodukcije
The
audio
playback
The
audio during
during
playback
Listening
tospeaker.
the audio
audio
Listening
the
comes
from
Audiozapisi
zato
vrijeme
comes
from the
the
speaker.
during
playback
Listening
may
be difficult
difficult
in
reprodukcije
čuju
se preko
duringmay
playback
Listening
be
in
noisy
places
due
the
zvučnika.
Preslušavanje
noisy
places
due to
to
the speaker
speaker
The
audio
during
playback
The
audio
during
playback
output.
In
that
case,
može biti
naconnect
bučnim
output.
In otežano
that
case,
connect
comes
from
the
speaker.
comes
from
the speaker.
stereo
earphones
(not
mjestima
zbogbe
izlaza
stereo
earphones
(not supplied).
supplied).
Listening
may
difficult
in
Listening
may be
difficultisinturned
*
The
built-in
speaker
zvučnika.
U tom
slučaju
*
Theplaces
built-in
speaker
turned
noisy
due
to the is
speaker
noisy
places
due to the speaker
off
when
earphones
are
spojite
stereoslušalice
(nisu
off when
earphones
are
output.
In that
case, connect
output.
In
that
case,
connect
connected.
isporučene).
connected.
stereo
earphones (not supplied).
stereo
earphones
(notisključit
supplied).
●● The
Ugrađeni
će
*
built-inzvučnik
speaker
is turned
* The
built-in
speaker
is turned
se when
kada spojite
slušalice.
off
earphones
are
off when earphones are
connected.
connected.
2012/05/29
2012/05/29 9:35:43
9:35:43
STOP g/RETURN
F2
STOP g/RETURN
F2
F2
1
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
Press
Pritisnite
].
+, –[ERASE/A-B
to
Press [ERASE/A-B&].
[ERASE/A-B&].
select
“FILE”
and
Pritisnite
+,
da
Press +, – to
Press
+, –OK]
to to
biste odabrali
press
[q
select
“FILE” and
select
and
"FILE"“FILE”
(Datoteka)
enter.
press [q OK] to
press
OK] to
i zatim[q
pritisnite
Press +, – to select “YES” and
enter.
[► OK] za unos.
enter.
press [q
to enter.
Press
+, –OK]
to select
“YES” and
Pritisnite
- the
da
biste“YES”
odabrali
"YES"
Press
+, –+,to
select
and
While
deleting,
status
indicator
blinks
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
(Da) i zatim
OK]
zaseveral
unos.
“ERASING”
is pritisnite
displayed.
It[►
may
take
press
[q OK]
to enter.
To
exit thesvih
deletion
press
za brisanje
datotekascreen,
u odabranoj
mapi.
[F2
(CLOSE)].
To
exit
the
deletion
screen,
press
Da
biste
izašli
iz
zaslona
za
brisanje,
To exit the deletion screen, press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
pritisnite
[F2 (CLOSE)].
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Deleting les from the list
Brisanje
datoteka
sa zaslona
s
screen
Deleting
Deleting 
les
les from
from the
the list
list
popisom
Select
files on the list screen (➜ page 13) and
screen
screen
press [ERASE/A-B&]. Then, the screen to
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
■
STOP g/RETURN
STOP /RETURN
• Select a file to delete beforehand. (➜ page
Press
[STOP
to stop
thepage
unit.
•• Select
a file
tog/RETURN]
delete
beforehand.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da (➜
biste
17)
17)
zaustavili
uređaj.
Press
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
[ERASE/A-B&].
• Press [STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
Odaberite
sascreen
zaslona
popisom
Select
filesdatoteke
on the list
(➜s page
13) (→
and
delete
the
file
Select(➜
thepage
folder
and
Select
files
onappears.
the[ERASE/A-B
list screen
13)
and
str. 13)[ERASE/A-B&].
i pritisnite
Prikazuje
press
Then, the ].
screen
to se
press
[ERASE/A-B&].
Then,Odaberite
the screen
to i
zaslon
za
brisanje
datoteke.
mapu
delete the file appears. Select the folder and
all files
in the folder
delete
the
file appears.
Select
the folder
pritisnite
[ERASE/A-B
].appears.
Prikazuje
se and
zaslon
press
[ERASE/A-B&].
Then,
the screen
to
press
[ERASE/A-B&].
Then,
the screen to
za brisanje
svih
mapi.
delete
all files
in datoteka
the folderuappears.
delete all files in the folder appears.
While
deleting,
the status
indicator
blinks and
Pokazatelj
treperiis
tijekom
brisanja,
minutes
untilstatusa
thethe
deletion
complete.
While
deleting,
status
indicator
blinks and
“ERASING”
is se
displayed.
It may
take several
a na zaslonu
prikazuje
"ERASING"
Selecting
“FOLDER”
in step
will move
“ERASING”
is displayed.
It may
take
severalto
2
minutes
until
the
deletion
is
complete.
(Brisanje).
Brisanje
može
nekoliko
the
screen
tothe
delete
all files
in the selected
minutes
until
deletion
ispotrajati
complete.
Selecting
“FOLDER”
in
step
will
move
minuta. Odabirom
stavke
"FOLDER"
2 will move to
folder.
Selecting
“FOLDER”
in step
to
the
screen
to delete all
files in2će
theseselected
(Mapa)
u koraku
prikazat
zaslon
the screen to delete all files in the selected
folder.
folder.the recycle bin function is ON, files are moved to the recycle bin ( ) folder. When the
When
●*● Kada
se funkcija koša za smeće uključi, datoteke se premještaju u mapu koša za smeće ( ).
recycle
bin function
is OFF,
files are
deleted
immediately
without being
movedkoša
to the
bin
za smeće
isključi,
se to
nethe
premještaju
u mapu
zarecycle
smeće
* Kada
Whense
thefunkcija
recyclekoša
bin function
is ON,
filesdatoteke
are moved
recycle bin
( ) folder.
When
the ( )
(When
) folder.
(➜ pages
60)
* nego
theodmah
recycle
bin 54
function
is ON,
files are moved to the recycle bin ( ) folder. When the
se
brišu.
(→and
str.
54
i 60)deleted
recycle
bin function
is OFF,
files
are
immediately without being moved to the recycle bin
Files in bin
the function
MUSIC (M)
or OTHER
FOLDER
( ) are deleted
immediately
irrespective
of the bin
recycle
is OFF,
files are
deleted immediately
without
being moved
to the recycle
●*● Datoteke
mapama
( ) folder.u (➜
pages MUSIC
54 and (M)
60) ili OTHER FOLDER ( ) brišu se odmah bez obzira na
bin
settings.
(recycle
) folder.
(➜
pages
54 and 60)
postavke
koša
za
smeće.
ERASE/A-B
ERASE/A-B& * Files in the MUSIC (M) or OTHER FOLDER ( ) are deleted immediately irrespective of the
The file
numbers
displayed
on
this FOLDER
unit
are moved
forward
after
deletingneke
files.
(➜ page(→
67)the
Files
in the
MUSIC
(M) orna
OTHER
( unaprijed
) are
deleted
immediately
irrespective
of
●*● Brojevi
prikazani
uređaju
pomiču
se
nakon
brisanja
datoteke.
str. 67)
recycledatoteka
bin settings.
*● W
Read-only
music files
transferred
from(samo
the computer,
files
that cannot
be played by the
recycle
binWMA/MP3
settings. datoteke
ERASE/A-B& ●
MA/MP3-glazbene
formata
read-only
za čitanje)
prenesene
s računala,
ERASE/A-B& * The file numbers displayed on this unit are moved forward after deleting files. (➜ page 67)
unit, file
subfolders
pages
69
theovom
MUSIC
folder podmape
created
on thestr.
computer,
ormapi
subfolders
* datoteke
The
numbers
displayed
onand
this71)
unitinare
moved
forward
after deleting
files.
page
67)
se(➜
ne
mogu
reproducirati
na
69(➜
i 71)
* Read-onlykoje
WMA/MP3
music
files transferred
fromuređaju,
the computer,
files(→
that cannot
beuplayed
by the
in the OTHER
FOLDER
cannot
betransferred
deletedu using
this
Deletefiles
them
on cannot
these
computer.
(➜
page
* MUSIC
Read-only
WMA/MP3
music
files
fromOTHER
theunit.
computer,
be played
by
the
kreirane
na pages
računalu
podmape
mapi
nethat
mogu
brisati
ovom
unit, subfolders
(➜
69 ili
and
71) in the
MUSIC
folderFOLDER
created on
the
computer,
or na
subfolders
66) subfolders
unit,
(➜
pages
69 and(→
71)str.
in 66)
the MUSIC folder created on the computer, or subfolders
uređaju.
Izbrišite
ih
na
računalu.
in the OTHER FOLDER cannot be deleted using this unit. Delete them on the computer. (➜ page
in the OTHER FOLDER cannot be deleted using this unit. Delete them on the computer. (➜ page
66)
66)
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Deleting datoteka
les
Brisanje
Deleting

•• Select
a file odaberite
to delete beforehand.
(➜želite
page
datoteku koju
Deleting 17)Prethodno
les
les
izbrisati. (→ str. 17)
19
19
19
19
19
19
Selecting
the
recording
Odabir
scene
snimanja scene
Selecting
the
recording
scene
Na
su
uređaju
ponuđene preporučene
postavke
za svaku
scenuSelecting
snimanja.
Thisovom
unit
offers
recommended
recording
settings
for snimanja
each recording
scene.
Selecting
the
recording
scene
This unit offers recommended recording settings for each recording scene. Selecting
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
Thisrecording
unit offers
recording
settings
each
scene.
Selecting
Odabirom
scene recommended
snimanja
omogućuje
se jednostavno
snimanje
s odgovarajućim
postavkama.
the
enables
easy
recording
with for
the
mostrecording
appropriate
settings.
This
unit offersscene
recommended
recording
settings
for
each
recording
scene.
Selecting
the
the recording
recording scene
scene enables
enables easy
easy recording
recording with
with the
the most
most appropriate
appropriate settings.
settings.
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
the
recording
scene
enables
easy
recording
with
the
most
appropriate
settings.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“LOAD”
and
•
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
3
• Pritisnite [STOP ■/RETURN] da biste
F2
Press
+, –
–
to select
select
“LOAD”
and
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
3
Press
+,
to
“LOAD”
and
"LOAD"
(Učitaj)
i zatim
pritisnite
F2
zaustavili
uređaj
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to
to stop
stop the
the unit.
unit.
3
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
F2 REC
Press
+,
–
to
select
“LOAD”
and
REC
*
Press
[MENU]
for
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop the unit.
3 press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
F2 REC ●
[►
OK]
za
unos.
*
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
[MENU]
for
1
REC * 1 Press
[MENU]
for
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
Držite
[MENU]
approx.
1
second
REC * 1 Press [MENU] for
To
the
setting
press
approx.
1 1second
Za exit
izlaz
iz zaslona
za postavljanje
To
exit
the
setting screen,
screen,
press
approx.
second
približno
[F2
(CLOSE)].
or
more.1
To
exit
the setting screen, press
approx.
1 second
[F2
(CLOSE)].
or
more.
pritisnite
[F2
(CLOSE)].
[F2 (CLOSE)].
The
screenili
to duže.
select
or
more.
sekundu
[F2 (CLOSE)].
or more.
The
screen to select
2
2
2
2
the recording
scene
is
The
screen
selectza
Prikazuje
setozaslon
The
screen toscene
select
the
recording
displayed.
the
recording
scene is
is
odabir
scene snimanja.
the
recording scene is
displayed.
displayed.
displayed.
Press +, – to select the scene and
Press
+,
the
scene
Press
+, –
–+,to
to- select
select
theodabrali
scene and
and
Pritisnite
da
press
[q
to biste
enter.
Press
+, –OK]
to select
the scene and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
scenu
i zatim
pritisnite
OK]
If
you select
“USER”,
skip the[►
step
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
3 .za
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
If
you
If
you select
select “USER”,
“USER”, skip
skip the
the step
step 3
3 ..
unos.
If
you select “USER”, skip the step 3 .
When [REC
[RECwith
*] the
is pressed,
pressed,
recording
isscene
performed
selectedrecording
recordingis
When
*]
is
When
[RECwith
*] the
is pressed,
performed
selectedrecording
recordingisscene
scene
setting.
performed
with the
selected
recording
Kada
pritisnete
[REC
●
],
snimanje
se
performed with the selected recording izvršava
scene
setting.
setting.
s
odabranom
postavkom
scene
snimanja.
setting.
* If you select “USER” in step 2 , the state immediately before the recording scene was set is
*
If
in
state
before
2 ,, the
and“USER”
the recording
disappears.
* restored,
If you
you select
select
“USER”
in step
step scene
theindication
state immediately
immediately
before the
the recording
recording scene
scene was
was set
set is
is
2
* restored,
If you select
in step scene
state immediately
before the recording scene was set is
2 , theindication
and“USER”
the recording
recording
indication
disappears.
* restored,
If you individually
change settings
as the
recording mode when the recording scene is set,
and
the
scene such
disappears.
restored,
and
the
recording
scene
indication
disappears.
*● Ako
If you
you
individually
change
settings
such
as the
the
recording
modescene
whenindication
the recording
recording
scene is
is set,
set,
the
settings
*
If
change
settings
such
as
mode
when
the
scene
the “USER”
settings,
and
the recording
●
u individually
korakuoverwrite
odaberete
"USER",
uređaj
se recording
vraća
u stanje
neposredno
prijedisappears.
postavljanja
* If
you
individually
change
settings settings,
such as the
modescene
whenindication
the recording
scene is set,
the
settings
overwrite
the “USER”
“USER”
andrecording
the
recording
disappears.
the
overwrite
* scene
Thesettings
recording
scene
when
microphone
recording
is scene
used. Recording
scene does not
the
settings,
and
the
recording
indication disappears.
snimanja,
a saoperates
zaslona
nestaje
pokazatelj
scene
snimanja.
the
settings
overwrite
the “USER”
settings,
and the
recording
scene
indication disappears.
*
The
recording
scene
when
microphone
recording
used.
Recording
scene
does
operate
*● Ako
The
recording
scene operates
operates
when
microphone
recording
ispoput
used.načina
Recording
scene
does
not
when
another
device
connected
and the
Mic/Lineis
switch
is
set to
[LINE]
(➜
pagenot
35).
●
nakon
postavljanja
scene is
snimanja
promijenite
postavke
snimanja,
odabrane
* The
recording another
scene operates
when
microphone
recording
isswitch
used. is
Recording
scene
does not
operate
device
connected
and
Mic/Line
to
(➜
35).
pisatset
ćethe
preko
unosais
a [MENU]
pokazatelj
scene
snimanja
nestat
će page
sa zaslona.
operate
* postavke
You can when
also
recording
scene
by“USER”,
pressing
and
selecting
SELECT”
from
when
another
device
ispostavki
connected
and the
the
Mic/Line
switch
is set
set“SCENE
to [LINE]
[LINE]
(➜
page
35).
operate
when
another
device isscene
connected
and the[MENU]
Mic/Line
switch
is set“SCENE
to [LINE]SELECT”
(➜ page from
35).
*
You
can
also
set
the
recording
by
pressing
and
selecting
●
cena
snimanja
je dok
se koristi
mikrofon.
Scena
snimanja
nije
uključena
kada jefrom
“MIC
REC
MENU”.
*● S
You
can
also
set uključena
the recording
scene
by pressing
[MENU]
and
selecting
“SCENE
SELECT”
* You
can
also
set the recording scene by pressing [MENU] and selecting “SCENE SELECT” from
“MIC
REC
MENU”.
spojen
drugi
uređaj te kada je prekidač Mic/Line postavljen na [LINE] (vanjski izvor) (→ str. 35).
“MIC REC
MENU”.
“MIC REC MENU”.
●● Scenu snimanja možete postaviti i tako da pritisnete [MENU] i odaberete “SCENE SELECT” u
izborniku “MIC REC MENU”.
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
Ako ste odabrali "USER" (Korisnik),
preskočite korak
.
20
20
20
202020
20
20
■
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
/RETURN
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
g/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
The selected recording
The
selected
recording
scene
is displayed.
The
selected
recording
Prikazuje
se selected
odabrana
scena
The
recording
scene
is
scene
is displayed.
displayed.
snimanja.
scene *]
is displayed.
When
[REC
is pressed, recording is
CONVERSATION MEETING
LECTURE FAVORITE
Postavka
(str.)
Snimanje
vlastitog
glasa radi
vježbanja
izgovora,
itd.
Snimanje
scene
visoke
glasnoće,
primjerice
karaoke
Snimanje
u visokoj
kvaliteti
za scene
kao što su
koncerti
Snimanje
glasova
drugih ljudi na
razgovorima
ili sastancima,
itd.
Snima širokopojasni
zvuk. Za
snimanje
sastanaka,
itd.
Snimanje
zvukova
poput predavanja u
učionici,
itd.
Moguće je
registrirati
vlastite
postavke
Način snimanja
(25)
MP3:
192 kb/s
MP3:
320 kb/s
PCM:
44,1 kHz
MP3:
64 kb/s
MP3:
192 kb/s
MP3:
192 kb/s
MP3:
192 kb/s
Osjetljivost
mikrofona (26)
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
Razina snimanja (27) AUTO
MANUAL*
MANUAL*
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
Filtar Low cut za
smanjenje šumova
(26)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Ograničivač
snimanja glasnog
zvuka (28)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Automatsko
snimanje (30)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Postavka VAS (31)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Postavke prethodne OFF
snimke (32)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
* Za snimke s najboljom kvalitetom zvuka, unaprijed postavite odgovarajuću razinu snimanja. Detalje o tome
potražite u dijelu "Ručno postavljanje razine snimanja" (→ str. 27 i 28).
VQT4J69
Scena snimanja LANG. STUDY KARAOKE MUSIC PERF.
Primjena
HRVATSKI
■■Tvorničke postavke scena snimanja
21
21
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
Selecting
Selecting the
the recording
recording scene
scene To select the changed recording scene, select
Changing recording
scene
settings
Selecting
the
recording
scene
Odabir
scene
snimanja
Selecting
the
recording
scene
To
select(➜
thepage
changed
“LOAD”
20). recording scene, select
Changing recording
scene settings
Selecting
the
recording
scene
Selecting
the
recording
scene
“LOAD”
(➜
page
20).
To
select
the
changed
recording
scene,
select
The
setting
details
of
each
recording
scene
can
Da
biste
odabrali
promijenjenu
To
select
the
changed
recording scenu
scene,snimanja,
select
Changing
recording
scene
settings
Selecting
the
recording
scene
Izmjena
postavki
scene
snimanja
Changing
recording
scene scene
settings
The
setting details
of each recording
can
“LOAD”
page 20).
To exit
the(➜
setting
screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
22
2222
22
2222
22
22
222222
22
22
be
changed according
to preference.
Changing
recording
scene
settings
Changing
recording
scene
settings
Detalji
za svaku
scenu
mogu se promijeniti
be
changed
according
to preference.
The
setting
details
of
each
recording
scene
can
Changing
recording
scene
settings
The
setting
details
ofsnimanja
each
scene
canu
recording
scene
settings
•Changing
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
torecording
stop
the unit.
postavkama
prema
vlastitim
željama.
The
setting
details
of
each
recording
scene
can
be
changed
according
to
preference.
• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
torecording
stop the unit.
be
changed
according
to
preference.
The
setting
details
of
each
scene
can
The
setting[MENU]
details
of each
each
recording
scene
can
The
setting
details
of
recording
scene
can
Press
for
approx.
1 the
second
or more.
be
changed
according
to preference.
preference.
••1
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
unit.
be
changed
according
to
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the
unit. or uređaj.
•
Pritisnite
[STOP
■
/RETURN]
da
biste
zaustavili
Press
[MENU]
for
approx.
1
second
more.
be
changed
according
to
preference.
1
be
changed
according
to
preference.
••2Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press
+, –g/RETURN]
to select
the
Press
[STOP
to
unit.
Press
[MENU]
for
approx.
1 the
second
more.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the
unit. or
[MENU]
for
approx.
second
or
1
Press
+,
–g/RETURN]
to select
the
••1
Press
[STOP
to
stop
the
unit.
Držite
[MENU]
približno
11sekundu
ili more.
duže.
2
recording
scene
and
Press
[MENU]
for
approx.
1
second
or
more.
1
Press
[MENU]
for
approx.
1
second
or
more.
1
+,
–
to
select
the
recording
scene
and
Press
[MENU]
for
approx.
1
second
or
more.
2
+,
–
to
select
the
1
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
Press
[MENU]
for
approx.
1
second
or
more.
2
[q OK] to enter.
1 press
Press
+, –
–
to select
select
the i
2
recording
scene
and
press
[q
OK]
tosnimanja
enter.
Press
+,
to
odabrali
scenu
recording
scene
andthe
2
Press
+,
to
the
2
Press
+, –
–OK]
to select
select
the
2 zatim
recording
scene
and
press
[q
to
enter.
[►
OK]
za
unos.
recording
scene
and
press
[q
to
enter.
OK]
recording scene
scene and
and
recording
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press [q
+, –OK]
+,to- select
da
3 Pritisnite
press
to
enter.
press [q
OK]
to biste
enter.
Press
+, –
to
select
3 odabrali
"CHANGE
“CHANGE
SETTING”
and
Press
+,
–
to
select
“CHANGE
SETTING”
3
Press
+,
–
to
select
(Promijeni
3 SETTING"
press [q OK] to enter.and
Press
+, –
–OK]
to
select
3
“CHANGE
press
[q
to enter.and
Press
+,
to
select
“CHANGE
SETTING”
and
postavku)
iSETTING”
zatim
3
Press
+,
select
3
Press [q
+, –
– to
to
select
3 pritisnite
“CHANGE
SETTING”
and
press
to
“CHANGE
SETTING”
and
[►
OK]
za unos.
press
[q OK]
OK]
to enter.
enter.
“CHANGE
SETTING”
and
“CHANGE
SETTING”
and
+, –OK]
to
select
the
item you want to
4 Press
press [q
[q
to enter.
enter.
press
OK]
to
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
item
want to
+,
da
biste
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
4 Pritisnite
press [qand
OK]press
to enter.
change
[q OK]
to you
enter.
odabrali
stavku
kojuthe
želite
Press
+,and
– to
select
item
want
to
change
OK]
to you
enter.
4
Press
select
the
item
you
want
to
4
Press +,
+, –
– to
topress
select[q
the
setting
and
press
5
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
item
you
want
to
promijeniti
i zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
4
change
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
setting
and
press
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
item
you
want
5
change
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
4
[q
OK]+,
Press
+,to–
– enter.
to select
select the
the item
item you
you want
want to
to
4 Press
to
to
4
change
and
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
setting
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
postavku
5
change
and
press
[q
OK]
to
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
setting
and
press
5 Repeat
steps
and 5[q
toOK]
change
other items. i
change
and
to
4press
change
and
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
setting
and
press
5
[q
OK]
to
enter.
pritisnite
[► 5OK]
za
unos.
Repeat
steps
and
to change
other
items.
Press
+,
to
the
setting
and
press
[q
OK]
to–
enter.
4select
5
When
you
have
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
setting
and
6
5 zatim
Press
+,
– enter.
to
select
the
setting
and press
press
5
[q OK]
OK]you
to
korake
i 5
dachange
biste promijenili
ostale
Repeat
steps
other
When
have
[q
to
4
6 Ponovite
Repeat
and
to
change
other items.
items.
4 and
55 to
completed
the
settings,
[q OK]
OK]steps
to enter.
enter.
[q
to
enter.
Repeat
steps
and
to
change
other
items.
stavke.
When
you
have
4
5
completed
the
settings,
6
steps
and
to
change
other
items.
When
you
have
4
5
6 Repeat
press
+,
–
to
select
“OK”
Repeat
steps
and
to
change
other
items.
4s and
5 to change other items.
Repeat
stepshave
4
5
When
you
Kada
završite
postavkama,
6
completed
the
settings,
press
+,
– to
select
When
you
have
completed
the
settings,
6
When
you
have
and
press
[q
OK]
to“OK”
enter.
6
When
you
have
6 pritisnite
+,
da
biste
completed
the
settings,
press
+,
–
to
select
and
press
[q
OK]
to“OK”
enter.
completed
the
settings,
press
+, – to
select
“OK”
completed
the
settings,
completed
the
settings,
odabrali
"OK"
i
zatim
press
+,
–
to
select
“OK”
and press
press
[qselect
OK] to
to“OK”
enter.
press
–
and
[q
OK]
enter.
press +,
+, [►
– to
to
select
“OK”
press
+,
–
to
select
“OK”
pritisnite
OK]
za
unos.
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
and
press
[q
OK]
to
and press [q OK] to enter.
enter.
To
select(➜
the
changed
odaberite
"LOAD"
(→ recording
str. 20). scene, select
“LOAD”
page
20).
“LOAD”
20). recording
To
select
the
changed
scene,
To
select
thepage
changed
recording
scene,
select
To exit
the(➜
setting
screen,
press
[F2 select
(CLOSE)].
To
select
the
changed
recording
scene,
select
“LOAD”
(➜
page
20).
“LOAD”
page
20).
Initialising
recording
scene
settings
Za
izlazthe
iz(➜
zaslona
za postavljanje
pritisnite
“LOAD”
(➜
page
20).
To
exit
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
“LOAD”
(➜
page
20).
exit the setting
screen, press
[F2settings
(CLOSE)].
To
Initialising
recording
scene
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
To
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Returns
individual
recording
scenes
whose
settings
have
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Initialising
recording
scene
settings
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Initialising
recording
scene
settings
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Returns
individual
recording
scenes
whose
settings
have
been changed to the factory settings.
Pokretanje
postavki
scene
snimanja
Initialising
recording
scene
settings
been
changed
to the
factory settings.
Initialising
recording
scene
settings
Returns
recording
scenes
whose
settings
recording
scene
settings
Returns
individual
recording
scenes
whose
settings have
have
•Initialising
Press individual
[STOP g/RETURN]
to stop
the unit.
Initialising
recording
scene
settings
Pojedinačne
scene
snimanja
čije
su whose
postavke
been
changed
to
the
factory
settings.
Returns
individual
recording
scenes
•
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
been
changed
to
the
factory
settings.
Returns individual
individual recording
recording scenes
scenes whose
whose settings
settings have
have
Returns
settings
have
promijenjene
vraćaju
se
na
tvorničke
postavke.
Press
[MENU]
for approx.
1 whose
second
or more.
Returns
individual
recording
scenes
settings
have
been
changed
to
the
factory
settings.
••1Press
[STOP
to
unit.
been
changed
tog/RETURN]
the
factory
settings.
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the
unit. or more.
Press
[MENU]
for approx.
1 the
second
been
changed
to
the
settings.
1Press
been
changed
tog/RETURN]
the factory
factory
settings.
••2•Press
[STOP
to
stop
the
unit.
Press
+,[STOP
–g/RETURN]
to ■
select
the
recording
scene
Pritisnite
/RETURN]
da
biste
zaustavili
uređaj.
Press
[STOP
to
stop
the
unit.
Press
[MENU]
for
approx.
1
second
or
more.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the
unit. scene
[MENU]
for approx.
1 the
second
or more.
1
Press
+, –g/RETURN]
to select
the
recording
••1
[STOP
to
unit.
2Press
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
you
want
to initialise
and 1press
[q or
OK]
to
Press
[MENU]
for
approx.
second
more.
Press
[MENU]
for
approx.
second
or
Držite
[MENU]
približno
11
sekundu
ili more.
duže.
+,
–
to
select
the
recording
you
want
and
[qscene
OK]
to
[MENU]
for
1
second
or
more.
Press
+,
–to
toinitialise
select
the
recording
scene
[MENU]
for approx.
approx.
1press
second
or
more.
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
recording
you
want
to
and
press
[q
OK]
enter.
Pritisnite
+,
-initialise
da biste
odabrali
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
recording
scene
you
want
to
initialise
and
pressscenu
[qscene
OK] to
to
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
recording
scene
Press
+, –to
toinitialise
select
the
recording
scene
you
want
and
pressi [q
OK]
to
enter.
snimanja
koju
želite
pokrenuti
zatim
Press
+, –to
toinitialise
select
you
want
and
OK]
enter.
“INITIALIZE”
and
press
you
want
to
initialise
and press
press [q
[q
OK] to
to
you
want
to
initialise
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“INITIALIZE”
and
press
enter.
Press
to select
[q
OK]+,to– enter.
enter.
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“INITIALIZE”
and
press
[q
OK]+,
enter.
Pritisnite
da biste
Press
to
“INITIALIZE”
and
press
Press
+,to–
–+,
to- select
select
Press
+,
–
to
select
“INITIALIZE”
and press
press
[q
OK]
enter.
odabrali
“INITIALIZE”
and
[q
OK] to
to"INITIALIZE"
enter.
“INITIALIZE”
and
press
“INITIALIZE”
and
press
Press
+,to– enter.
to iselect
“YES” and press
[q
OK]
(Pokretanje)
zatim
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“YES” and press
[q OK]
OK] to
to enter.
enter.
[q
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
Press
+,
to
select
“YES”
and
[q
OK]
to–
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“YES”setting
and press
press
The
selected
recording
scene
is returned to
unos.
Press
+,
to
select
“YES”
and
press
The
selected
recording
scene
setting
is returned to
[q
OK]
to
enter.
the
factory
setting.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“YES”
and
press
[q
OK]
to–
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“YES”
and
press
Press
+,to
–setting.
to
“YES”
and
press
the
factory
Pritisnite
+,
- select
da biste
odabrali
"YES"
The
selected
recording
scene
setting
is
to
To
select
the
initialised
recording
scene,
select(Da)
[q
OK]
enter.
The
selected
recording
scene
setting
is returned
returned
to i
[q
OK]
to
enter.
[q
OK]
to
enter.
To
select
the
initialised
recording
scene,
select
zatim
pritisnite
[► OK]
unos.
the
factory
setting.
[q
OK]
to
enter.
“LOAD”
(➜
page
20)
The
selected
recording
scene
is
the
factory
setting.
The
selected
recording
scenezasetting
setting
is returned
returned to
to
The
selected
recording
scene
setting
is returned
returned
to
“LOAD”
(➜
page
20)scene
Odabrana
postavka
snimanja
vraća
se na to
To
select
the
initialised
recording
scene,
select
The
selected
recording
scene
setting
is
the
factory
setting.
To
select
the
initialised
recording
scene,
select
the
factory
setting.
the
factory
setting.
tvorničke
postavke.
“LOAD”
page
20)
To exit
the(➜
setting
screen,
press
[F2 (CLOSE)].
the
factory
setting.
To
select
the
initialised
recording
scene,
select
“LOAD”
(➜
page
20)
To
select
the
initialised
recording
scene,
select
To
select
thepage
initialised
recording
scene,
select
To exit
the(➜
setting
screen,
press
[F2 (CLOSE)].
Da select
biste
odabrali
pokrenutu
scenuscene,
snimanja,
To
the
initialised
recording
select
“LOAD”
20)
“LOAD”
(➜
page
20)
“LOAD”
(➜
page 20)
20)
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
odaberite
"LOAD"
(→
str.
20).
“LOAD”
(➜
page
To exit the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
To
setting
screen,
press
[F2pritisnite
(CLOSE)].
To
exit
the
setting
press
Za exit
izlazthe
iz zaslona
za postavljanje
To
exit
the
setting screen,
screen,
press [F2
[F2 (CLOSE)].
(CLOSE)].
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
[F2 (CLOSE)].
22
22
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 22
2012/05/29 9:35:43
Microphone
position
Položaj mikrofona
Scena snimanja*
Recording
scene½
STEREO
STEREO
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
Direct scene
Izravna
scena
Ova funkcija
prebacivanje
scene
snimanja
(→ str.
kako
mijenjathe
položaj
mikrofona.
(Tvornička
This
function omogućuje
is for switching
the recording
scene
(➜ page
20) 20)
linked
to se
switching
microphone
position.
(The
postavka
je "ON")
factory
setting
is “ON”)
Moguće
je prebaciti
scenu snimanja
koja je dodijeljena
svakom položaju
mikrofona.
You
can switch
to thenarecording
scene assigned
to each microphone
position.
ZOOM
ZOOM
*● At
the time kupnje,
of purchase,
assigned tojeSTEREO,
and “LECTURE”
is assigned
to ZOOM.
●
U trenutku
scena“MEETING”
"MEETING"isdodijeljena
položaju STEREO,
a "LECTURE"
položaju
ZOOM.
can alsomikrofona
change the
recording
scene assigned
to a
microphone
position.
Select
the desired
scene
●● You
Položajima
moguće
je dodijeliti
neke druge
scene
snimanja.
Odaberite
željenu
scenu recording
snimanja između
from
seven recording
scenes. (➜ page 24)
njih sedam.
(→ str. 24)
*● Switch
the microphone
positionkada
when
unituisstanju
in thezaustavljanja.
stopped state.Tijekom
During an
operation
such as recording
or
●
Promijenite
položaj mikrofona
je the
uređaj
radnji
poput snimanja
ili reprodukcije
playback,
recording
scene
cannotčak
be changed
even by položaj
switching
the microphone position.
ne možetethe
mijenjati
scene
snimanja,
i ako promijenite
mikrofona.
●
(stereo
zoom), a of
dathe
pritom
ne mijenjate
scene
snimanja,
postavite
postavku
*● IfAko
youželite
wishmijenjati
to switchfunkcije
only themikrofona
stereo and
zoom ifunctions
microphone
without
linking
the recording
scenes,
set
izravne
scene
na "OFF".
(→ str.
direct
scene
setting
to “OFF”.
(➜24)
page 24)
●
Kada je
uređaj microphone
spojen vanjski
mikrofon nethe
možete
mijenjati
scene
snimanja,
čak i ako
položaj
*● When
anna
external
is connected,
recording
scene
cannot
be switched
evenpromijenite
by switching
the
mikrofona. position.
microphone
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
½
Factory
setting
*
Tvornička
postavka
23
23
Izravna
scena
Direct scene
Direct
scene
Direct
scene
Izmjena postavke
izravne scene
Direct
scene
Changing
direct
scene
setting
Direct
scene
Changing
direct
scene
snimanja
Changing direct scene setting
setting
Changing direct scene setting
•Changing
Press [STOP g/RETURN]
to stop setting
the unit.
direct
scene
••Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the zaustavili
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj.
• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the unit.
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
Press
[MENU].
Press
[MENU].
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press [MENU].
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
5
5
5
5
5
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press
Press [MENU].
+,
–
to select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
and
+,
–
“MIC
REC
MENU”
and
Press
[MENU].
Pritisnite
+,to
- select
da
biste
odabrali
"MIC REC
Press
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
MENU"
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
Press
+, –
–OK]
to select
select
“MIC RECSCENE”
MENU” and
press [q
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
Press
+,
to
“DIRECT
and
press
to
Press
+,
–
to
select
“DIRECT
SCENE”
and
Press
+,
–
select
“DIRECT
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Pritisnite
+,to
- da
biste
odabraliSCENE”
"DIRECTand
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“DIRECT
SCENE”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+, –
–
to select
select
“DIRECT
SCENE”
and
press [q
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
SCENE"
(Izravna
scena)
i zatim
pritisnite
Press
+,
to
the
press
OK]
to
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
[►
OK][q
za
unos.
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
press
OK]
to enter.
microphone
position
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
microphone
position
Press
+, –+,toor
select
the
microphone
Pritisnite
-position
da
biste
(“STEREO”
“ZOOM”)
microphone
position
(“STEREO”
or
“ZOOM”)
microphone
position
(“STEREO”
or
“ZOOM”)
odabrali
položaj
and
to
(“STEREO”
orOK]
“ZOOM”)
and press
press [q
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
mikrofona
("STEREO"
ili
(“STEREO”
orOK]
“ZOOM”)
and
to
and press
press [q
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
"ZOOM")
zatim
and pressi [q
OK]pritisnite
to enter.
Press
–
select
[►
OK]+,
unos.
Press
+,za
– to
to
select the
the
Press
to
the
recording
and
Press +,
+, –
– scene
to select
select
the
recording
scene
and
Pritisnite
+,
- select
da biste
Press
+,
–
to
the
recording
scene
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
recording
scene
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
odabrali
scenu
snimanja
recording
scene
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
OK] to enter.
ipress
zatim[q
pritisnite
[► OK]
press
[q
OK] to enter.
za unos.
If you wish to change the recording scene for the
If you wish to change the recording scene for the
If
you microphone
wish to change
the recording
the
and
other
position,
perform scene
steps for
If
you
wishpromijeniti
to change
the recording
for
the 5
4
and
other
microphone
position,
perform scene
steps
Ako
želite
scenu
snimanja
za drugi
položaj
4
If
you
wish
to change
the recording
for
the 5
and
other
microphone
position,
perform scene
steps
to
set
the
recording
scene.
4
and 5
other
position,
snimanja,
korake
i 5 dasteps
biste je4postavili.
to set microphone
the izvršite
recording
scene. perform
to set microphone
the recording
scene. perform steps 4 and 5
other
position,
5
to set the recording scene.
Za izlaz
zaslona
za screen,
postavljanje
pritisnite
[F2
To
exit
the
setting
[F2
(CLOSE)].
to setiz
the
recording
scene. press
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
(CLOSE)].
To exit the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
24 To exit the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
24
24
24
24
2424
2424
24
24
24
Postavljanje postavke scene
Setting
direct
scene
setting
to
OFF
snimanja
na OFF
Setting
direct
scene
setting
to
OFF
Setting
direct
scene
setting
to
OFF
Setting
direct
scene
setting
to
OFF
•Setting
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
direct
scene
setting
to
OFF
Pritisnite
[STOP
■
/RETURN]
da
biste
zaustavili
uređaj.
• •Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the unit.
• Press [STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
Press
[MENU].
Press
[MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press
[MENU].
1
Press
[MENU].
1
Press
+,
–
to
“MIC
REC
MENU”
and
2
Pritisnite
+,
- select
da biste
odabrali
"MIC REC
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
and
Press
[MENU].
2
1
Press
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
and
2
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
and
MENU"
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
2 Press
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+, –
–OK]
to select
select
“MIC RECSCENE”
MENU” and
press [q
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
2
Press
+,
to
“DIRECT
and
press
to
3
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
"DIRECT
Press
+,
–
to
select
“DIRECT
SCENE”
and
3 press
Press
+,
–
to
select
“DIRECT
SCENE”
and
[q
OK]
to
enter.
3
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
+,
–
to
select
“DIRECT
SCENE”
and
SCENE"
(Izravna
scena)
i
zatim
pritisnite
3 Press
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“DIRECT
SCENE”
and
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
3
Press
+,
–
to
select
“SETTING”
and
press
press
[q
OK]
to
[►
OK]
za
unos.
4 Press +, – to select “SETTING” and press
4
Press
+,
–
to
select
“SETTING”
and
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
4
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“SETTING”
and
press
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
"SETTING"
4 press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
to
select
“SETTING”
and za
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
4
Press
+,
–
to
select
(Postavka)
i zatim
pritisnite
[► OK]
unos.
[q
OK]+,
to–
enter.
5
Press
+,
–
to
select
5
Press
+,
–
to
select
[q
OK]
to
enter.
5
“OFF”
and
press
+,
–
to
select
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
5 Press
“OFF”
and
press
to
select
“OFF”
and
press
5 Press
[q
OK]+,
to–
enter.
odabrali
"YES"
(Da) i zatim
“OFF”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
“OFF”
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
pritisnite
OK] za unos.
[q
OK]and
to[►
enter.
[q OK] to enter.
Za
izlaz
iz
zaslona
za
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press [F2
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
[F2 (CLOSE)].
(CLOSE)].
postavljanje
pritisnite
[F2 press
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
To exit the setting screen,
press [F2
[F2 (CLOSE)].
(CLOSE)].
(CLOSE)].
To
exit the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
Pokazatelj
izravne
scene
Direct scene
setting
indication
Direct scene setting indication
Direct scene
setting indication
: ON: ON
Direct scene
setting
indication
: ON se ne prikazuje za
Ništa
: ON issetting
Nothing
displayed
for “OFF”
Direct
scene
indication
: ON is displayed
Nothing
for “OFF”
"OFF".
Nothing
displayed for “OFF”
: ON is
Nothing
is displayed for “OFF”
Nothing is displayed for “OFF”
•• During
Tijekomplayback,
reprodukcije,
snimanja
ilirecording
u stanju čekanja
ne
recording,
or
standby,
“ ”” is
•• During
playback,
or
recording
standby,
prikazuje
se “
”,recording,
čak i ako postavku
izravne
scene““
During
playback,
recording,
or
recording
standby,
”” is
is
displayed
even
if
you
set
direct
scene
setting
• not
During
playback,
recording,
or
recording
standby,
is
not
displayed
even if you set direct scene setting to
to“ “ON”.
“ON”.
postavite
na "ON".
displayed
even
ifif you
scene
setting
• not
During
playback,
recording
” is
not
displayed
evenrecording,
you set
setordirect
direct
scenestandby,
setting to
to“ “ON”.
“ON”.
not displayed even if you set direct scene setting to “ON”.
F2
F2
F2
You
can
change
the
the particular
Youodređenu
canpurpose.
change
the sound
sound quality.
quality. This
This allows
allows you
you to
to provide
provide the
the best
best sound
sound quality
quality for
for
the
particular
purpose.
za
namjenu.
the
particular
purpose.
the
particular
purpose.
Press
+,
–
to
• Press••[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
4
Press
+,
–
to
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
4 Press +, – to
Pritisnite [STOP ■/RETURN] da biste
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
4
select
the setting
+,
– setting
to
odabrali
postavku
zaustavili
uređaj
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to
to stop
stop the
the unit.
unit.
4 Press
select
the
[MENU].
1 Press
[MENU].
1 Press
select
the
setting
(PCM
sampling
(frekvencija
PCMselect
the
setting
Press
[MENU].
(PCM
sampling
1
Pritisnite
[MENU].
1 Press
+, – to[MENU].
(PCM
sampling
2 Press
+, – to
uzorkovanja/brzina
frequency/MP3
(PCM
sampling
2 Press
frequency/MP3
–
to
2
select
“MIC +,
REC
Pritisnite
- da
frequency/MP3
Press
+,
–+,
toREC
MP3-prijenosa)
i
2 Press
select
“MIC
bitrate)
and press
frequency/MP3
bitrate)
and press
select
“MIC
REC
biste
MENU”
andodabrali
press
bitrate)
and
press
select
“MIC
zatim
pritisnite
[►
MENU”
and REC
press
[q OK]
toOK]
enter.
bitrate)
and
press
[q
to
enter.
MENU”
and
press
"MIC
REC
MENU"
[q OK]
toOK]
enter.
[q
to
MENU”
and
press
OK]OK]
za
unos.
(The factory
setting
is “MP3is192kbps”.)
[q
to
enter.
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
(The
factory
setting
“MP3 192kbps”.)
[q
OK]
to
i zatim
(The
factory
setting
(Tvornička
"MP3192kbps”.)
192kb/s".)
[q
OK] pritisnite
to enter.
enter.
(The
factorypostavka
setting is
isje“MP3
“MP3
192kbps”.)
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
To exit the setting screen, press
[► OK] za unos.
Za izlaz
iz zaslona
zascreen,
postavljanje
pritisnite
To
exit
the
setting
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
To exit
the setting screen, press
+, – to+,select
“MIC “MIC
REC REC
[F2
(CLOSE)].
3 Press
– to select
3 Press
(CLOSE)].
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Press
+,
–+,
to- [q
select
“MIC
REC "MIC
[F2
(CLOSE)].
3
Pritisnite
da
biste
odabrali
MODE”
and
press
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
3 MODE” and press [q OK] to enter.
MODE”
and
[q
OK]
REC MODE"
i zatim
MODE”
and press
press
[qpritisnite
OK] to
to enter.
enter.
[► OK] za unos.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
MENU
MENU MENU
MENU
MENU
F2
ENGLISH
Selecting
recording
mode
Selecting
recording
mode
Odabir
načina
snimanja
Selecting
recording
mode
You can
change
the
sound
quality.
This
allows
you
provide
the
best
sound
qualityquality
for
You can change
the sound
quality. ThisNa
allows
you
to provide
the
best sound
for
Kvalitetu
zvuka moguće
je promijeniti.
taj to
ćete
način
dobiti
najbolju
kvalitetu
zvuka
VQT4J81
* Depending
on the
recording
modevrijeme
setting,
the sound
quality quality
and
remaining
time time
●*● Kvaliteta
zvuka
i preostalo
razlikovat
će se
ovisno
orecording
postavci
načina
snimanja
Depending
on
the
recording
mode snimanja
setting,
the
sound
and
remaining
recording
*
Depending
on
the
recording
(➜ page
86)
differ.
str.will
86).
(➜
page
86)
* (→
Depending
onwill
thediffer.
recording mode
mode setting,
setting, the
the sound
sound quality
quality and
and remaining
remaining recording
recording time
time
(➜
86)
(➜ page
page
86) will
will differ.
differ.
visoke
HighSnimka
quality
recording
High quality
recording
High
quality
recording
kvalitete
Dugotrajno
Long
recording
High
quality
recording
Longsnimanje
recording
STOP g/RETURN
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
■/RETURNRecording
Long
recording
PCM
MP3
MP3
MP3
MP3
MP3 MP3
recording
PCM
MP3
MP3
MP3
MP3
STOP
g/RETURN
PCM
MP3
MP3
MP3 Long
MP3
Recording
STOP g/RETURN
Format
snimanja
PCM
MP3
MP3
MP3
MP3
44.1
kHz
320
kbps
192
kbps
128
kbps
64
kbps
32
kbps
Recording
format
44,1
kHz
320
kb/s
192
kb/s
128
kb/s
64
kb/s
32
kb/s
44.1
kHz
320
kbps
192
kbps
128
kbps
64MP3
kbps
32MP3
kbps
PCM
MP3
MP3
MP3
MP3
format
Recording
44.1
kHz
320
kbps
192
kbps
128
kbps
64
kbps
32
format
44.1 kHz
320 kbps
192 kbps
128 kbps
64 kbps
32 kbps
kbps25
format
* When
recording
mode
is
set
to
32kbps”,
the recording
becomes
monaural.
●*● the
Kada
se
način
snimanja
snimanje
je monotičko.
When
theodabere
recording
mode
is “MP3
set to"MP3
“MP332kbps",
32kbps”,
the recording
becomes
monaural.
*
25
* When
When the
the recording
recording mode
mode is
is set
set to
to “MP3
“MP3 32kbps”,
32kbps”, the
the recording
recording becomes
becomes monaural.
monaural.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
The selected
recording
modenačin
Prikazuje
se odabrani
The selected
recording
mode
is displayed.
snimanja.
The
selected
is
displayed.
The
selected recording
recording mode
mode
is
displayed.
is displayed.
25
25
25
25
25
25
Switching microphone sensitivity
Switching
microphone
sensitivity
Promjena
osjetljivosti
Switch
the microphone
sensitivity according
Switching
microphone
sensitivity
to
the volume
ofmicrophone
the sound
source.according
When the
Switch
the microphone
sensitivity
Switching
sensitivity
mikrofona
Switch
the
microphone
sensitivity
according
sound
source of
volume
is loud,
set the
sensitivity
to the volume
the sound
source.
When
the
Switch
theosjetljivost
microphone
sensitivity
according
to
the volume
of
sound
When
the
Promijenite
prema
glasnoći
izvora
to
“LOW”.
When
itthe
is mikrofona
low,
setsource.
the
to
sound
source
volume
is loud,
setsensitivity
the
sensitivity
to
the volume
of
the sound
source.
When
the
zvuka.
Kada
je glasnoća
izvora
visoka,
osjetljivost
sound
source
volume
is loud,
setsensitivity
the
sensitivity
“HIGH”.
to
“LOW”.
When
it is low,
setzvuka
the
to
sound
source
volume
is loud,
setglasnoća
the sensitivity
postavite
naWhen
“LOW”
Kada
je
niska,
to
“LOW”.
it(nisko).
is low,
set the
sensitivity
to
“HIGH”.
• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to (visoko).
stop
unit.
osjetljivost
podesite
to
“LOW”.
When
itna
is "HIGH"
low, set
the the
sensitivity
to
“HIGH”.
• Press
[STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
“HIGH”.
Press
[MENU].
•Press
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj.
•1
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the zaustavili
unit.
Press
[MENU].
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
Press
2
[MENU].
1 Pritisnite [MENU].
Press
[MENU].
+, – to
REC MENU”
1
and press
[qselect
OK] to“MIC
enter.
2 Pritisnite
- daselect
biste odabrali
"MIC
REC MENU"
Press
+, +,
– to
“MIC
REC
MENU”
2
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
SENS.”
3
Press
+, – to
select
“MIC
REC MENU”
zatim
pritisnite
[► OK]
za unos.
2 iand
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+, – to
SENS.”
and
press
[qselect
OK]
to“MIC
enter.
3 Pritisnite
and
press
OK]
enter.
-[q
daselect
bisteto
odabrali
"MIC SENS."
Press
+, +,
– to
“MIC
SENS.”
3
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“HIGH”
or “LOW” and
4
Press
+, – to
select
SENS.”
3 (Osjetljivost
mikrofona)
i zatim
pritisnite [► OK]
and
press
[q
OK] to“MIC
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“HIGH”
or “LOW” and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
4 za
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
unos.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“HIGH”
or
“LOW” and
4 (The
factory
setting
is
“HIGH”.)
press +,
[q+,
OK]
to enter.
- daselect
biste
odabrali
ili "LOW"
Press
to
“HIGH”"HIGH"
or “LOW”
and i
4 Pritisnite
press
[q– OK]
toisenter.
(The factory
setting
“HIGH”.)
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za unos.
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
(The
factory
setting
is
“HIGH”.)
To exit
the
setting
screen,
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
(Tvornička
postavka
"HIGH".)
(Thethe
factory
settingscreen,
isje“HIGH”.)
To exit
setting
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
To
exit iz
the
setting
Za izlaz
zaslona
za screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
To exit the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
postavljanje pritisnite [F2
(CLOSE)].
26
2626
2626
2626
26
When the microphone position is
Kada je mikrofon u položaju
“STEREO”
(➜ page 14),
“
” is
When
the microphone
position
"STEREO"
( → str. 14),
za is
½
When the for
microphone
position
displayed
“ “ ” for
“STEREO”
(➜High,
pageand
14),
” is
isLow.
visoku se
osjetljivost
prikazuje
When
the
microphone
position
“STEREO”
page
14),
““.*” for
” isLow.½
½
displayed
for
High,
and
“ the“, microphone
a(➜
za
nisku
“ “ position
When
is ½“ZOOM”, “ ” is
“STEREO”for
(➜High,
pageand
14),“ “ ” for
” isLow.
displayed
½
*When
Kada
je mikrofon
položaju
( → str.
Low.
displayed
for
High,uand
“ ” for"ZOOM"
the
microphone
position
is ½“ZOOM”,
“ ”14),
is za
” for Low.
½ displayed for High, and “
When
microphone
position
is“ “ZOOM”,
“ ” is“ “.
visokuthe
sefor
osjetljivost
“, a za nisku
displayed
High, andprikazuje
“ ” for Low.
When
the for
microphone
is “ZOOM”, “ ” is
displayed
High, andposition
“ ” for Low.
displayed for High, and “ ” for Low.
½
Reducing
low
frequency
Smanjenje low
šumova
niske
Reducing
frequency
Reducing
low
frequency
noise
during
recording
Reducing
low
frequency
frekvencije
tijekom
snimanja
noise
during
recording
Sound of low
frequency range
is reduced during
noise
during
recording
Niskofrekvencijski
zvukovi
smanjuju
se
tijekom
snimanja
microphone
recording.
is effective
when
Sound
of low
frequencyThis
range
is reduced
during
noise
during
recording
s uključenim
mikrofonom.
Ta
je postavka
učinkovita
Sound
of noise
low
frequency
range
is reduced
during
reducing
of air conditioning
equipment,
microphone
recording.
This
is effective
when
kada je of
potrebno
umanjiti This
zvuk
klimatizacije
opreme
i sl.,
Sound
lowrecording.
frequency
range
is reduced
during
microphone
is effective
when
etc.
whilenoise
recording
a meeting,
etc.
(LOW
CUT
reducing
of
airatconditioning
equipment,
tijekom snimanja
sastanaka,
itd.is(LOW
CUT when
FILTER).
microphone
recording.
This
effective
reducing
noise
of
air
conditioning
equipment,
FILTER)
etc. while recording at a meeting, etc. (LOW CUT
reducing
of ■/RETURN]
airatconditioning
equipment,
etc.
whilenoise
recording
a meeting,
(LOWuređaj.
CUT
• Pritisnite
[STOP
da bisteetc.
zaustavili
FILTER)
• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop the
unit.
etc.
while
recording
at a meeting,
etc.
(LOW CUT
FILTER)
• Press
[STOP g/RETURN]
FILTER)
Pritisnite
[MENU]. to stop the unit.
Press
[MENU].
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
Press
[MENU].
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
toodabrali
stop the unit.
Pritisnite
da biste
"MIC REC
+,
–+,
to- select
“MIC
REC MENU”
2 Press
[MENU].
1
MENU"
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za unos.
Press
[MENU].
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
1
press [q OK] to enter.
2 and
Press
+, –+,
to
“MIC
REC MENU”
2
Pritisnite
- select
da
biste
odabrali
"LOW CUT
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“LOW
CUT
FILTER”
3
+, – to
REC MENU”
2 Press
press
[qselect
OK]
to“MIC
enter.
FILTER"
pritisnite
OK]
za unos.
Press
+, –i zatim
to
CUT
FILTER”
and
press
[qselect
OK]
to“LOW
enter.[►
3 and
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“LOW
CUT FILTER”
3
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
"ON"
(Uklj.)
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“ON”
and
press
[q
OK]
4
+, – to
CUT FILTER”
3 Press
press
[qselect
OK][►
to“LOW
enter.
i zatim
OK]
za
unos.
Press
+,pritisnite
– to
select
“ON”
and
press [q OK]
to
enter.
4 and
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
+, –postavka
to select
“ON” and press [q OK]
4 Press
(Tvornička
"OFF".)
(The
factory
setting
isje“OFF”.)
enter.
Press
+, – to select “ON” and press [q OK]
4 to
to
enter.
(The
factory setting is “OFF”.)
Za exit
izlaz
iz zaslona
za
postavljanje
to
enter.
(The
factory
settingscreen,
is “OFF”.)
To
the
setting
press [F2pritisnite
(CLOSE)].
(The
factory
settingscreen,
is “OFF”.)
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
To
the
setting
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
To exit the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
To exit the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
“
” is displayed.
Prikazuje
“
“.
“
” is se
displayed.
“
” is displayed.
“
” is displayed.
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
The
recording
cansetting
be is
adjusted
automatically
or
manually
on this
Whensuch
the
recording
level
adjustment
AUTO,
the
sound
distortion
isvolume
reduced
byunit.
adjusting
the
automatically.
To
the
original
faithfully
MANUAL.
(Thelevel
factory
is record
“AUTO”.)
recording
level
automatically.
To
record
the
original
sound
level
faithfully
as an instrument
playing
and
nature
sound,
set
the sound
recording
levellevel
adjustment
tosuch
originalne
glasnoće
zvuka,
primjerice
zvuka
instrumenta
ilivolume
zvukova
iz prirode,
podesite
recording
level adjustment
is AUTO,
the
sound
isvolume
reduced
by faithfully
adjusting
the
automatically.
To
record
the
original
level
as
an
playing
and
nature
sound,
set
the
recording
level
adjustment
to
REC
as
an instrument
instrument
playing
and
sound,
setdistortion
the sound
recording
level
adjustment
tosuch
REC *
* prilagodbu
MANUAL.
(The
factory
setting
is
“AUTO”.)
razine
snimanja
nanature
postavku
MANUAL.
(Tvornička
postavka
je "AUTO".)
■
Settinglevel
theautomatically.
recordingTo
level
the
level
recording
record the original
volume
level
faithfullyto
such
setAdjusting
the sound
recording
levelrecording
adjustment
set
the recording
levelrecording
adjustment
to
Podešavanje
snimanja
Ručno
podešavanje
razine
adjustment
torazine
MANUAL
manually
Setting the recording
level
Adjusting
the
level
Setting
the
level
Adjusting
Setting
the recording
recording
level
Adjusting the
the recording
recording level
level
na
MANUAL
snimanja
adjustment
to MANUAL
Setting
the
recording
level
Adjusting
the
recording
••manually
Set
the
recording
level
adjustment
Set
the
recording
level
adjustment to
tolevel
adjustment
to
MANUAL
manually
adjustment
to
MANUAL
manually
beforehand.
(When
the
recording
Setting
the
recording
level
the
recording
•MANUAL
Prvo
razinu
snimanja
MANUAL
beforehand.
(When
thena
recording
adjustment
to
MANUAL
manually
•Adjusting
Set
thepostavite
recording
level
adjustment
tolevel
•1
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the unit.
•
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da
biste
Press
[MENU].
level
adjustment
AUTO,
the
unit
does
not
••manually
Set
the
recording
adjustment
to
••adjustment
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
MANUAL.
(Kadais
se
razina
snimanja
level
adjustment
islevel
AUTO,
the
unitrecording
does
not
zaustavili
uređaj
Set
the
recording
level
adjustment
to postavi
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop the
the unit.
unit.
to
MANUAL
MANUAL
beforehand.
(When
the
Press
[MENU].
enter
the
recording
standby.)
MANUAL
beforehand.
(When
the
recording
• Set
adjustment
točekanja.)
•1
Press
[STOP
to stop
theMENU”
unit.
na the
AUTO,
uređajislevel
neće
ućithe
u stanje
Press
+,
– g/RETURN]
to select “MIC
REC
enter
therecording
recording
standby.)
MANUAL
beforehand.
(When
the
recording
2
level
adjustment
AUTO,
unit
does
not
Press
[MENU].
1
Press
[MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
level
adjustment
is
AUTO,
the
unit
does
MANUAL
beforehand.
(When
• Set
the
adjustment
to not
•1Press
g/RETURN]
to stop the unit.
level
adjustment
islevel
AUTO,
the the
unitrecording
does
not
enter
therecording
recording
standby.)
and [STOP
press
[qselect
OK] to“MIC
enter.
Press
andi hold
+,
– to
REC MENU”
[MENU].
1
2 Press
1
Pritisnite
enter
the
recording
standby.)
level
adjustment
is
AUTO,
the
unit
does
not
MANUAL
beforehand.
(When
the
recording
Press
+,
––+,
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"MIC
enter
the*]
recording
standby.)
2
+,
to
REC
MENU”
+, –
to-select
select
“REC
LEVEL
[MENU].
2
3 Press
[REC
forhold
1
1
and press
[q
OK] to“MIC
enter.
držite
[REC
●
]
1
Press
and
1
enter
the
recording
standby.)
level
adjustment
is
AUTO,
the
unit
does
not
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
REC
MENU"
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
2 Press
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
and
hold
and
press
[q
OK][q
to“REC
enter.
1
ADJ.”
and
press
OK]
toLEVEL
enter.
Press
and
hold
sekundu
ilimore.
duže.
Press
+, –– to
to select
select
1
3
[REC
for
1 standby.)
second
or
enter
the*]
recording
Press
+,
“MIC
REC
MENU”
OK]
za
unos.
2
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
and
hold
Press +,
+, –
– to
to select
select “MANUAL”
“REC
1 Press
3
[REC
*]
for
1
“RECtoLEVEL
LEVEL
Uređaj
ulazi
umore.
stanje
Press
and
The
unit
enters
3
[REC
*]
for
1the
ADJ.”
and
press
[q
enter.
The
unit
enters
the
4
or
press
[q
OK]
to OK]
enter.
Press
and
hold
Press
+, –
to
select
Pritisnite
+,
- da
odabrali
"REC
1 second
3 and
[REC
*]
formore.
1
ADJ.”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
čekanja.
recording
standby.
second
or
ADJ.”
and
press
[q “REC
OK]
toLEVEL
enter.
press
[q
OK]
tobiste
enter.
recording
standby.
second
or
more.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“MANUAL”
and
The
unit
enters
the
4
Press
+,
–
to
select
“REC
LEVEL
LEVEL
ADJ."
(Podeš.
razine
snimanja)
3
[REC
*]
for
1
ADJ.”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“MANUAL”
and
The
unit
the
second
or
more.
Treperi
4
Blinks
+, –OK]
to select
“MANUAL” and
The
unit enters
enters
the
recording
standby.
Blinks
4 Press
press
[q
to[►
enter.
i
zatim
pritisnite
OK]
za
unos.
ADJ.”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,setting
–OK]
to select
“MANUAL”
To
the[q
press and
recording
standby.
The
unit enters
the
second
or
more.
4 exit
press
to
enter.
recording
standby.
press
[q
OK]
toscreen,
enter.
Blinks
Aim
the
microphone
at the
sound
2
Uperite
mikrofon
prema
izvoru
Press
+,setting
–OK]
to- select
“MANUAL”
recording
standby.
The
unit enters
the
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
4 exit
press
toscreen,
enter.
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Blinks
To
the[q
press and
Blinks
source
to
record.
Aim
the
microphone
at the sound
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
recording
standby.
zvuka
koji
želite
snimiti.
"MANUAL"
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
2
Blinks
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2 (CLOSE)].
the
microphone
at the
2
Aim
the
microphone
the
sound
Press
u,
i,Blinks
to adjust
thesound
To
the setting screen, press
2 Aim
3
source
to
record.
za
unos.
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Pritisnite
daat
podesili
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
theto
microphone
atbiste
the sound
2 Aim
source
record.
To
exit
the setting screen, press
source
to
record.
recording
level
(➜
page
28).
[F2
(CLOSE)].
razinu
snimanja
(→
str.
28).
Press
u,
i
to
adjust
the
3
Za izlaz iz zaslona za
Aim
theto
microphone
at the
sound
2
record.
Press
i
to
the
3
Adjustment
range
0
to
30.
[F2 (CLOSE)].
Press
u,
i is
to
adjust
the
Rasponu,
prilagodbe
zvuka
kreće
se od 0
Adjustment
range
is
0adjust
to
30.
3 source
recording
level
(➜
page
28).
postavljanje
source
to record.
Press
u,
i to
adjust
the
3
(The
factory
setting
is
“15”.)
recording
level
(➜
page
28).
do
30.
(The
factory
setting
is
“15”.)
recording
level
(➜
page
28).
Adjustment
range
is
0
to
30.
pritisnite
[F2
(CLOSE)].
The
u,range
ijeis
to
adjust
the
The recording
recording level
level is
is
3 Press
Adjustment
to
30.
recording
level
(➜
page
(Tvornička
postavka
15.)
Adjustment
range
0 “15”.)
to
30. 28).
(The factory
setting
is0
displayed.
Pressing
[REC
*] is
starts
recording.
displayed.
(The
factory
setting
is
“15”.)
Adjustment
range
is
0
to
30.
recording
level
(➜
page
28).
The recording level is
(The factory
setting●
is] “15”.)
27
Pritiskom
na range
[REC
započinje
Prikazuje
se razina
The
recording
level
Pressing
[REC
*] is
starts
recording.
displayed.
The
recording
level is
is
(The factory
setting
is0 “15”.)
Adjustment
to 30.
as
an instrument
playing
and nature
sound,
MANUAL.
(The factory
setting
is “AUTO”.)
REC
REC ●
* MANUAL. (The factory setting is “AUTO”.)
as an instrument playing and nature sound,
REC
REC *
* MANUAL. (The factory setting is “AUTO”.)
REC * MANUAL. (The factory setting is “AUTO”.)
Press [STOP
[STOP g/RETURN]
g/RETURN] to
to stop
stop the
the unit.
unit.
REC * •• Press
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
g/RETURN
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
/RETURN
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
g/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
snimanja.
displayed.
The
recording level is
displayed.
displayed.
The recording level is
displayed.
Pressing
[REC
*]
recording.
snimanje.
Pressing
[RECsetting
*] starts
starts
recording.
(The factory
is “15”.)
Pressing [REC *] starts recording.
Pressing [REC *] starts recording.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
MENU
MENU
Setting the recording level manually
The
recording level
can be
adjusted automatically
or manually
on this unit. When the
Setting
the
recording
level
manually
Ručno
podešavanje
razine
snimanja
Setting
the
recording
level
recording
levellevel
adjustment
is
AUTO,
the
sound
distortion
ismanually
reduced
byunit.
adjusting
The
recording
can
be
adjusted
automatically
or
manually
on this
When the
the
Razinu
snimanja
na
ovom
se
uređaju
može
podesiti
ručno
ili
automatski.
Kada
Setting
the
recording
level
manually
The
recording
level
can
be
adjusted
automatically
or
manually
on
this
When
the
recording
level
automatically.
To
record
original
sound
level
faithfully
The
recording
level
can
be
adjusted
automatically
or
manually
on
this
unit.
Whensuch
the
recording
level
adjustment
is
AUTO,
thethe
sound
distortion
isvolume
reduced
byunit.
adjusting
the
je
prilagodba
razine
snimanja
postavljena
na
AUTO,
izobličenje
zvuka
smanjuje
Setting
the
recording
level
manually
The
can be
adjusted
automatically
orrecording
manually
on this
When
the
recording
level
adjustment
is
AUTO,
the
sound
isvolume
reduced
by
adjusting
the
as
anrecording
instrument
playing
and
nature
sound,
setdistortion
the
level
adjustment
tosuch
recording
levellevel
adjustment
is
AUTO,
the
sound
distortion
reduced
byunit.
adjusting
the
automatically.
To
record
the
original
level
faithfully
se
automatskim
podešavanjem
razine
snimanja.
Dasound
bisteisdobili
realističnu
razinu
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 27
2012/05/29 9:35:44
Setting
recording
manually
Ručno
podešavanje
razine
snimanja
Setting the
the
recording level
level
manually
Pokazatelj
OVER
OVER
indication
OVER indication
Mjerač
Level razine
meter
Level meter
Recording
level
Razina snimanja
Recording
level
●● IfAko
mjerač
razine
njiše,
se oznaka
*
these
level
meter
swings
anda“prikazuje
” is displayed,
this
* If the level meter swings and “
” is displayed, this
means
theznači
recording
too high. previsoka.
Adjust the level
“
“, to
da je level
razinais
means
the recording
level
issnimanja
too high. Adjust the level
within
“ ” range
even
if the recording
sound
Razinuthe
podesite
unutar
raspona
od “
“ čak
i ako
within
the
“ ” range
even
if the recording
sound
reaches
the highest
level.najvišu razinu.
zvuk snimanja
dosegne
reaches
the highest
level.
*
input
level (volume
input to this
unit)
forurecording
●● The
Razina
ulaznog
signala (glasnoća
koja
ulazi
uređaj)
*
The
input
level (volume
input to this
unit)
for recording
is
combination
of the recording
and microphone
kombinacija
je razine
snimanja ilevel
osjetljivosti
mikrofona.
is
combination
of the recording
level
and microphone
sensitivity.
sensitivity.
Slika
signala
Therazine
input ulaznog
level image
is asprikazana
below. je u nastavku.
The input level image is as below.
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
RazinaRecording
snimanja
Recording 1
level
MIC SENS.
1
level
(osjetlj.
MIC SENS.
MIC SENS.
mikrofona)
28
28
28
28
LOW
LOW
(niska)
30 1
30 1
HIGH
HIGH
(visoka)
30
30
* No sound is recorded at the recording level 0, and
* No
sound
is recorded at the recording level 0, and
½
½
”snimanja
is displayed.
½MUTE
●● ““Na
razini½
0 ne snima se zvuk, a na zaslonu
MUTE
” is displayed.
* The
recording
level can also be adjusted during
se prikazuje
* The
recording“*MUTE*”.
level can also be adjusted during
or whilemoguće
recording
paused.
●● recording
Razinu snimanja
je is
podesiti
i tijekom
recording
or while recording
is
paused.
* When
[MENU]
pressed
during
recording standby,
snimanja
ili dokis
snimanje
pauzirano.
* When
[MENU]
isjepressed
during
recording standby,
the
microphone
sensitivity
(➜
page
26),
“LOW
CUT
●● the
Kada
se u stanjusensitivity
čekanja pritisne
[MENU],
moguće
microphone
(➜ page
26), “LOW
CUT
FILTER”
(➜funkcije
page 26)
and recording
EQ (➜
29)
je podesiti
osjetljivosti
mikrofona
(→page
str. 26),
FILTER”
(➜ page 26)
and recording
EQ (➜
page
29)
can
be
set.
"LOW
can
beCUT
set. FILTER" (→ str. 26) i ekvalizatora za
snimanje (EQ) (→ str. 29).
Setting
peak
to
Postavljanje
ograničivača
snimanja
Setting the
the recording
recording
peak limiter
limiter
to ON
ON
glasnog
zvuka na
ON
Even
Even ifif the
the recording
recording level
level adjustment
adjustment is
is
MANUAL,
when
the
excessive
volume
is
input,
MANUAL,
when
the
excessive
volume
input,
Čak i ako je razina snimanja postavljena
na is
MANUAL,
the
is
automatically
kadarecording
ulazi višaklevel
zvuka,
snimanjaadjusted
automatskiand
se
the
recording
level
is razina
automatically
adjusted
and
the
sound
reduced.
podešava,
izobličenjeis
smanjuje.
the
sound adistortion
distortion
iszvuka
reduced.
Press [STOP
[STOP g/RETURN]
g/RETURN] to
to stop
stop the
the unit.
•• •Press
Pritisnite [STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste unit.
zaustavili uređaj
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Press
Press [MENU].
[MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press
“MIC
REC
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"MIC REC
Press +,
+, –
–+,to
to- select
select
“MIC
REC MENU”
MENU”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
MENU"
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
and press [q OK] to enter. OK] za unos.
Press
“PEAK
LIMITER”
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"PEAK
Press +,
+, –
–+,to
to- select
select
“PEAK
LIMITER”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
LIMITER"
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
and press [q OK] to enter. OK] za unos.
Press
select
Pritisnite
biste“ON”
Press +,
+, –
–+,to
to- da
select
“ON”
and press
press
[q OK]
OK]
toienter.
enter.
odabrali
"ON"
(Uklj.)
zatim
and
[q
to
(The factory[►
setting
pritisnite
OK] is
za“OFF”.)
unos.
(The factory setting
is
“OFF”.)
(Tvornička postavka je "OFF".)
Za exit
izlazthe
iz zaslonascreen,
za postavljanje
pritisnite
To
To
the setting
setting screen, press
press [F2
[F2 (CLOSE)].
(CLOSE)].
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
* When the recording level adjustment is AUTO, the
*
recording
level adjustment
is AUTO,
the
●● When
Kada the
se razina
snimanja
postavi
funkcija
recording
peak limiter
function
willna
beAUTO,
activated
recording
peaksnimanja
limiter function
be activated
ograničivača
glasnogwill
zvuka
(PEAK
regardless of the above setting.
regardless
of the above
LIMITER) aktivirat
će sesetting.
bez obzira na postavku.
* If the level meter swings, “
” is displayed regardless
*
the se
level
meterrazine
swings,
“ oznaka
” is displayed
regardless
●● IfAko
mjerač
njiše,
“
” prikazuje
of the recording peak limiter setting.
of
limiterograničivača
setting.
sethe
bezrecording
obzira napeak
postavku
snimanja
glasnog zvuka.
[F1]
again
to
previous
screen.
[F1]
again
to return
return to
to the
the
previous
screen.
Press
[F1se(CONFIRM)]
to previous
confirm
the
details.
Press
[F1]
again
to
return
the
screen.
Da
biste
vratili
natoprethodni
zaslon,
ponovno
When
you
select
modes
other
than
“USER”,
When
you to
select
modes
other
than screen.
“USER”, go
go to
to
[F1]
again
return
to
the
previous
When
you
select
modes
other
than
“USER”,
go
to
pritisnite
[F1].
step
.
5
step
.. select modes other than “USER”, go to
When
you
step 5
5
Kada
odaberete
bilo
koji
drugi
način
osim
"USER",
Setting
when selecting
selecting “USER”:
“USER”:
Setting
when
step
5 .korak
5 selecting
idite
na
.
Setting
when
“USER”:
After
step
,, selecting
press
4
1
Setting
when
“USER”:
After
step
press
4
1
Postavka
kada
odaberete
"USER":
After(EDIT)].
step 4 , press
1 [F1
[F1
After(EDIT)].
step
4 , press

koraka
, pritisnite
1 Nakon
[F1
(EDIT)].
150
Hz band
is selected.
150
[F1 (EDIT)].
(EDIT)].
[F1
150 Hz
Hz band
band is
is selected.
selected.
150 Hz band
Bira se frekvencijski
pojasisodselected.
150 Hz.
Press
u,
i
to
select the
frequency
band
to
2
Press
u,
i
to
the
frequency
band

biste
odabrali
2
Press
u,
i
to select
select
the
frequency
band to
to
2 Da
change,
and
press
+,
–
to
adjust
the
recording
change,
and
press
+,
–
to
adjust
the
recording
frekvencijski
pojas
koji
Press(±12
u,
i
to select
frequency
band to
2 level
change,
and
press
+, – tothe
adjust
the recording
dB).
level
(±12
dB).
želite
promijeniti,
pritisnite
,
,
a
da
biste
change,
press +, – to adjust the recording
level
(±12and
dB).
podesili
razinu
level (±12
dB). snimanja (±12 dB) pritisnite +, -.
FLAT BASS
EXTRA
EXTRA
BASS
EXTRA
BASS
EXTRA BASS
BASS
BASS
EXTRA
BASS
BASS
BASS
MIDDLE
MIDDLE
BASS
MIDDLE
MIDDLE
BASS&TREBLE
BASS&TREBLE
MIDDLE
BASS&TREBLE
BASS&TREBLE
TREBLE
TREBLE
BASS&TREBLE
TREBLE
TREBLE
EXTRA
TREBLE
EXTRA
TREBLE
EXTRA TREBLE
TREBLE
USER TREBLE
EXTRA
USER
USER
USER
USER
Emphasise
the
bass
range
strongly.
naglašava
raspon
zvuka.
Emphasise
the
range
strongly.
a
specificodređeni
sound
range.
Emphasise
the bass
bass
rangebasa.
strongly.
Snažno naglašavanje
raspona
Emphasise
the
bass
range strongly.
slightly.
Emphasise
the
slightly.
bass
range
Emphasise
the
bass
range
slightly.
Lagano naglašavanje
raspona
basa.
Emphasise
the
middle
range.
Emphasise the
the middle
middle
range.
bass range
slightly.
Emphasise
range.
Naglašava se
srednji
raspon
zvuka.
Emphasise
the
bass
and
treble
ranges
slightly.
Emphasise
the
bass
and
Emphasise
middle
range.
Lagano naglašavanje
raspona
basaranges
i visokih slightly.
tonova.
Emphasise
thethe
bass
and treble
treble
ranges
slightly.
Emphasise
the
treble
range
slightly.
Emphasise
the
treble
range
slightly.
Emphasise
thethe
bass
and
treble
ranges
slightly.
Lagano naglašavanje
visokih
tonova.
Emphasise
treble
range
slightly.
Emphasise
the
treble
range
strongly.
Emphasise
the
range
strongly.
slightly.
Snažno naglašavanje
visokih
tonova.
Emphasise
the treble
treble
range
strongly.
This
mode
enables
adjustment
of
Ovaj način
rada
podešavanje
This
mode
enables
adjustment
of
Emphasise
theomogućava
treble
range
strongly.
This
mode
enables
adjustment
ofHz,
frequency
bands
150
Hz,
500
frekvencijskih
pojasaof
odadjustment
150 Hz,
1
frequency
bands
of
150
Hz,
500
This
mode
enables
ofHz,
frequency
bands
of
150
Hz,500
500Hz,
Hz,
1
kHz,
4
kHz
and
12
kHz.
1
kHz,
4
kHz
and
12
kHz.
kHz,
4
kHz
i
12
kHz.
frequency
bands
Hz, 500 Hz,
1
kHz, 4 kHz
and of
12150
kHz.
(The
factory
setting
is
“FLAT”.)
(Tvornička
"FLAT".)
kHz,
4 kHz and 12 kHz.
(The
factorypostavka
setting 1
isje
“FLAT”.)
(The
factory
setting
is
“FLAT”.)
●
●
Kada
se
razina
snimanja
postavi na AUTO,
*
When
the
recording
level
adjustment
is
(The
factory
setting
is
“FLAT”.)
*
When
the
recording
level
adjustment
is AUTO,
AUTO, the
the
* recording
When
the EQ
recording
level
adjustment
not
function.
ekvalizator
zadoes
snimanje
neće
raditi. is AUTO, the
recording
EQ
does
not
function.
* recording
When
the EQ
recording
level
adjustment is AUTO, the
does
not
function.
recording EQ does not function.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
your
preferred
settings
recording.
your
preferred
settings
for
recording.
Using
the
EQfor
enables
you
to set
bass, middle
and treble
range
of recording level according to
tonova
za recording
razinu
snimanja
prema
vašim
odabranim
postavkama
zamode
snimanje.
your
preferred
settings
for
recording.
The
recording
EQ
includes
7
types
of
fixed
mode
and
the
“USER”
with
which
you
can
set the
The
recording
EQ
includes
7
types
of
fixed
mode
and
the
“USER”
mode
with
which
you
can
your
preferred
settings
for
recording.
Ekvalizator
za
snimanje
uključuje
7
tipova
fiksnih
načina
rada,
ali
i
način
rada
"USER"
The
recording
EQ
includes
7
types
of
fixed
mode
and
the
“USER”
mode
with
which
you(Korisnik)
can set
set the
the
recording
level
according
band.
recording
levelEQ
according
to
each
frequency
band.and
The recording
includesto
7each
typesfrequency
of fixedsnimanja
mode
“USER” mode
with which
you can set the
recording
level
according
to
each
frequency
band.
pomoću
kojeg
je
moguće
postaviti
razinu
na the
pojedinačni
frekvencijski
pojas.
When
the settings
for the
frequency
band
to
recording
level according
to each
frequency
band.
•• Set
the
recording
level
adjustment
to MANUAL
beforehand.
3
When
the
frequency
band
to
the
recording
level
adjustment
MANUAL
beforehand.
3

što settings
podesitefor
postavke
za promjenu
Prvo
razinu
snimanjato
MANUAL.
(→
When the
the
settings
for
the go
frequency
band
••Set
Set
the postavite
recording
level
adjustment
tona
MANUAL
beforehand.
3 Nakon
.. to
change
are
all
complete,
to
step
(➜
page
27)
(When
the
recording
level
adjustment
is
AUTO,
5
change
are
all
complete,
go
to
step
page
27)
(When
the
recording
level
adjustment
is
AUTO,
5
frekvencijskog
pojasa
prijeđite
na
korak
When
the
settings
for
the
frequency
band
5
str.
27)
(Kada
se
razina
snimanja
postavi
na
AUTO,
• (➜
Set
the
recording
level
adjustment
to
MANUAL
beforehand.
3
change are all complete, go to step 5 . to.
(➜ page
27) (When
thethe
recording
level
adjustment is AUTO,
the
unit
does
not
enter
recording
standby.)
Press
[q
OK]
enter.
5
the
unit
not
the
recording
standby.)
Press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
change
all to
complete,
go to step 5 .
uređaj
neće
ućienter
uthe
stanje
čekanja.)
(➜
page
27) (When
recording
level
adjustment is AUTO,
5 Pritisnite
the
unit does
does
not
enter
the
recording
standby.)
Press
[qare
OK]
to
enter.
5
[► OK]
za unos.
Press
and
hold
*]
for
1
second
or
more.
thePritisnite
unit does
not
enter[REC
the
recording
standby.)
Press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
1
5
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Press
and
hold
[REC
*]
for
1
second
or
more.
i
držite
[REC
●
]
1
sekundu
ili
duže.
1 Press
setting
press
(CLOSE)].
Za exit
izlazthe
iz zaslona
za postavljanje
pritisnite
and
hold
[REC
*] for
1 second or more. To
1
To
exit
the
setting screen,
screen,
press [F2
[F2
(CLOSE)].
The
unit
enters
the
recording
standby.
The
unitulazi
enters
the[REC
recording
standby.
u stanje
čekanja.
The
EQ
mode
name
is
not
displayed
after
exiting
Press
and
hold
*] for
1 second or more. To
1 Uređaj
The
unit
enters
the
recording
standby.
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
The
EQ
mode
name
is
not
displayed
after
exiting
The
EQ
mode
name
is
not
displayed
after
exiting
Press
[MENU].
2
the
setting
screen.
Press
[MENU].
The
unit
enters
the
recording
standby.
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Naziv
načina
EQ
ne
prikazuje
se
nakon
izlaza
iz
2
the
setting
screen.
Thesetting
EQ mode
name is not displayed after exiting
2 Press [MENU].
the
screen.
zaslona
za
postavljanje.
Pressing
[REC
*]
starts
recording.
Press
[MENU].
Pritisnite
+,to
- select
da biste
odabrali
"REC
EQ" i
+,
–
“REC
EQ”
and
press
2
the
setting
screen.
Pressing
[REC
*]
starts
recording.
3
Press
+,
–
to
select
“REC
EQ”
and
press
Pressing
*] starts
recording.
3
Press pritisnite
+, – to select
“REC
and press
Pritiskom[REC
na [REC
●Effect
] započinje
snimanje.
3 zatim
[► OK]
zaEQ”
unos.
OK]
Pressing
[REC
*] starts
recording.
EQ
mode
and
application
Press
+,to
– enter.
to select
“REC
EQ”
and press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
EQ
mode
Effect
and
application
3 [q
[q
OK]
to
enter.
EQ
mode
Effect
and
application
+,to
- select
za odabir
načina ekvalizatora
Press
–
the
recording
EQ
mode.
Način rada EQ This
Efekt
i does
primjena
mode
not
4
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
recording
EQ
[q
OK]+,
This (basic)
(basic)
mode
does
not emphasise
emphasise
FLAT
4 Pritisnite
EQ mode
Effect
anddoes
application
Press
+,to
– enter.
to (EQ).
select to
the
recording
EQ mode.
mode.
This
(basic)
mode
not
emphasise
FLAT
4
a
specific
sound
range.
Press
[F1
(CONFIRM)]
confirm
the
Press
za
snimanje
FLAT
FLAT
Ovim
se (osnovnim)
načinom
radaemphasise
ne
a
specific
sound
range.
Press
[F1
(CONFIRM)]
to
confirm
the details.
details.
Press
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
recording
EQ
mode.
This
(basic)
mode
does
not
a
specific
sound
range.
Press
[F1
(CONFIRM)]
to
confirm
the
details.
Press
4 Da
biste potvrdili detalje, pritisnite [F1 (CONFIRM)].
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Setting
the
recording
EQ
Setting
the
recording
EQ
Podešavanje
ekvalizatora
(EQ)
Using
the
recording
EQ
enables
you
to
set
bass,
middle
and
treble range
of recording
level
according
to
Setting
the
recording
EQ
Using
the
recording
you
to
middle
and
range
recording
level
according
Uporaba
zaenables
snimanje
omogućuje
vam
podešavanje
raspona
basa,
srednjih
i visokih
Using
theekvalizatora
recording EQ
EQ
enables
you
to set
set bass,
bass,
middle
and treble
treble
range of
of
recording
level
according to
to
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
Self
timer
Automatsko
snimanje
Self
timer
Moguće
je odabrati
vremensko
razdoblje
između
trenutka
pritiska until
na [REC
]
You can select
your željeno
preferred
time period
from when
[REC
*] is pressed
when●the
Self
timer
can select
preferred
period
from
when
[REC
*]time
is pressed
until
when
the
iYou
početka
snimanja.
korisna
kada
vam
jeneed
potrebno
vrijeme
za pripremu
recording
starts.your
ThisFunkcija
functionjetime
isvrlo
very
useful
where
you
for
preparation
before
recording
starts.
This
function
is very
useful
where
you
need
for preparation
before
prije
početka
snimanja
primjerice
kod
vježbe
sviranja
instrumenta.
should
start
–- for
example
in
musical
instrument
practice.
You
can
select
your
preferred
time
period
from
when
[REC
*]time
is pressed
until when
the
Self
recording timer
shouldThis
startfunction
– for example
musical
instrument
practice.
recording
starts.
is veryin
useful
where
you need
time for preparation before
• Press [STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
• Pritisnite [STOP ■/RETURN] da biste
30
3030
3030
30
30
When
[REC *]
countdown starts.
●●when
Kada [REC
pritisnete
●], odbrojavanje
recording
should
start
– for
in musical
instrument
practice.
You
can[STOP
select
your
preferred
time
from*
*]is[REC
ispressed,
pressed
until when
the
• Press
g/RETURN]
to example
stop
theperiod
unit.
zaustavili
uređaj
* When
[RECSnimanje
*] isstarts
pressed,
starts.
Then,
recording
after countdown
the nakon
set time.
The
započinje.
započinje
Press starts.
[MENU].
1
recording
This
function
is
very
useful
where
you
need
time
for
preparation
before
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Then,
recording
starts
after
the
set
time.
The
recording
indicator
blinks
during
countdown.
Press should
[MENU].
vremena
koje
sami
odredite.
Pokazateljstarts.
* instrument
When
[REC
*]
is pressed,
countdown
Pritisnite
recording
start –“MIC
for example
in musical
practice.
+, – [MENU].
to select
REC MENU”
2 Press
indicator
blinks
during
countdown.
* recording
Once
the
self
timer
is set,
the
is The
snimanja
treperi
tijekom
odbrojavanja.
Then,
recording
starts
after
thesetting
set
time.
Press
[MENU].
1
Press
+,
–
to
select
“MIC
REC
MENU”
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
"MIC
2
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
*
Once
the
self
timer
is set,
thesetting
setting
preserved
until
the
self
timer
isisset
to
Press [STOP
[STOP g/RETURN]
g/RETURN] to
to stop
stop the
the unit.
unit.
●
●
K
ada
se
postavi
automatsko
snimanje,
recording
indicator
blinks
during
countdown.
•• Press
*
When
[REC
*]
is
pressed,
countdown
starts.
*
When
[REC
*]
is
pressed,
countdown
starts.
REC
MENU"
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“SELF
TIMER”
+, – to select “MIC REC MENU” * Once
preserved
until
the
self
timer
setting
isisset to
3
OFF
orthe
theself
settings
ofset,
this
unit
are
2
postavka
će
se
sačuvati
dok
je
ne initialised.
postavite
timer
is
the
setting
Then,
recording
starts
after
the
set
time.
The
Then,
recording
starts
after
the
set
time.
The
Press
[MENU].
1
za
unos.
+,
–
to
select
“SELF
TIMER”
3 and press
OFF
or the
settings
of
this
unit
are
initialised.
(➜
61)
press [q
[q OK]
OK]to
toenter.
enter.
na page
OFF
(Isklj.)
ili
pokretanja
postavki
preserved
until
thedoblinks
self
timer
setting
is set to
recording
indicator
blinks
during
countdown.
recording
indicator
during
countdown.
(➜
page
61)
and press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
+, ––+,
to
select
“SELF
TIMER”
Pressing
[REC
*]
starts
uređaja.
(→
str.
61)during
-select
da
biste
odabrali
3
orthe
the
settings
ofset,
thiscountdown
unitsetting
are initialised.
Press
+,
to
“MIC
REC
MENU” *
2
4 Pritisnite
* OFF
Once
the
self
timer
is
set,
the
setting
is
*
Once
self
timer
is
the
is
*
[REC
*] during
countdown
starts
recording
immediately.
●● Pressing
Snimanje
se
može
i direktno
pokrenuti
Press
+,
– [q
to
(➜
page 61)
press
[q OK]
OK]
toenter.
enter.
TIMER"
(Automatsko
4 "SELF
select
the
time
preserved
until
the self
self
timer setting
setting
is set
set to
to
and
press
to
preserved
until
the
timer
is
recording
immediately.
*
If
you
press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
during
pritiskom
na
[REC
●
]
tijekom
odbrojavanja.
* OFF
Pressing
[REC
*] during
starts
select
the
i[q
zatim
[► OK]
Press
+,
– time
to
select
“SELF TIMER”
OFF or
or the
the
settings
of this
thiscountdown
unit are
are initialised.
initialised.
4 snimanje)
and press
OK]pritisnite
3
settings
of
unit
*
If
you
press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
during
countdown,
the
self
timer
recording
can
be
●● recording
Ako tijekom
odbrojavanja pritisnete [STOP
immediately.
za
unos.
(➜
and
press
[q OK] to enter.
select
the time
(➜ page
page 61)
61)
to
enter.
countdown,
the
self g/RETURN]
timer recording
can be
stopped.
■you
/RETURN],
automatsko
se snimanje
*
press
[STOP
during
*
Pressing
[REC
*]
starts
* If
Pressing
[REC
*] during
during countdown
countdown
starts
to enter.
Press
+, –+,to
and
press
[q
OK]
- da
4 Pritisnite
stopped.
zaustavlja.immediately.
countdown,
the
self
timer
recording
can be
recording
recording
immediately.
biste
odabrali
select
the
time
to enter.
stopped.
* If
If you
you press
press [STOP
[STOP g/RETURN]
g/RETURN] during
during
*
(The
setting
is “OFF”.)
vrijeme
i zatim
and factory
press
[q OK]
countdown, the
the self
self timer
timer recording
recording can
can be
be
countdown,
(The
factory[►
setting
isza
“OFF”.)
pritisnite
OK]
to
enter.
To exit the setting screen, press
stopped.
stopped.
(The
factory
setting
is
“OFF”.)
unos.
To
the setting screen, press
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
To
the setting screen, press
(The factory
factory setting
setting is
is “OFF”.)
“OFF”.)
(The
[F2
(CLOSE)].
(Tvornička
postavka je "OFF".)
To exit the setting screen, press
Za izlaz
iz zaslona za postavljanje
[F2
(CLOSE)].
pritisnite [F2 (CLOSE)].
MENU
MENU
MENU
F2
F2
REC *
●
REC
F2 REC *
MENU
MENU
MENU
F2
F2
REC *
REC
REC *
*
■
STOP g/RETURN
/RETURN
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
g/RETURN
STOP
When
VAS (Voice
Activated
System) System
is set, if -silence
continues
for approx.
2 seconds
during
Kada podesite
VAS
(Voice
Activated
glasovna
aktivacija),
ako detects
razdoblje
tišine
potraje dulje od
microphone
recording,
the
automatically.
If
unit
sound,
the
When
VAS (Voice
Activated
System) is
set, if silence
continues
for approx.
2 seconds
during
microphone
recording,
the recording
recording
is paused
paused
automatically.
If the
the
unitzaustaviti.
detects
sound,
the recording
recording
2
sekunde
tijekom
snimanja
s
mikrofonom,
snimanje
će
se
automatski
Ako
uređaj
detektira
microphone
recording,
the
recording
is
paused
automatically.
If
the
unit
detects
sound,
the recording
resumes.
resumes.
zvuk, snimanje će se nastaviti.
resumes.
• Set the recording level adjustment to AUTO
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press
[MENU].
Press
[MENU].
Pritisnite
- da biste
odabrali
"MIC REC
Press
+,
–
to
“MIC
MENU”
Press +, – to+,select
select
“MIC REC
REC
MENU”
MENU"
zatim
[►MENU”
OK] za unos.
Press
+, –i to
select
“MIC
REC
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
and
press
[q
OK]pritisnite
to
enter.
and
press
to enter.
Press
+,
to
“VAS”
and
Pritisnite
+,
- select
da biste
odabrali
"VAS" i
Press
+, –
–[q
toOK]
select
“VAS”
and press
press
Press
+,to– enter.
to select
“VAS”
and
press
[q
OK]
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
[q OK] to enter.
Press
to
“ON”
and
OK]
[q
OK]+,
enter.
Press
+,to–
–+,
to- select
select
“ON”
and press
press
[q
OK]
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"ON"[q
(Uklj.)
Press
+, – to select “ON” and press [q OK]
to
enter.
to
enter.
i zatim
pritisnite [► OK] za unos.
to
enter.
(The
factorypostavka
setting is
isje“OFF”.)
“OFF”.)
(The
factory
setting
(Tvornička
"OFF".)
(The factory
factory setting
setting is
is “OFF”.)
“OFF”.)
(The
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
(CLOSE)].
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press [F2
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Za exit
izlazthe
iz zaslona
za postavljanje
pritisnite
To
setting screen,
press [F2
(CLOSE)].
[F2 (CLOSE)].
““
”” is
issedisplayed.
displayed.
Prikazuje
“
”.
is displayed.
displayed.
““
”” is
To
To start
start VAS
VAS recording,
recording, press
press [REC
[REC *].
*].
Dastart
bisteVAS
pokrenuli
snimanje
postavkom
To
recording,
presss[REC
*].
Adjusting
the [REC
VAS operation
operation
level:
Adjusting
the
VAS
level:
VAS, pritisnite
●].
Press
during
VAS
Adjusting
VAS
operation level:
Press u,
u, i
ithe
during
VAS
Podešavanje
razine
Press
u, i
i during
during
VAS rada
recording.
Press
u,
VAS
recording.
recording.
postavke
VAS:is
(The
factory
recording.
(The
factory setting
setting
is “3”.)
“3”.)
(The
factory setting
setting
is
“3”.)
Pritisnite
,
tijekom
(The
factory
is
“3”.)
snimanja s uključenom postavkom
VAS.
*
You
the
detection
(Tvornička
postavka
je "3".)
*
You can
can adjust
adjust
the sound
sound
detection level
level from
from 1
1 to
to 5.
5.
*
You
can
adjust
the
sound
detection
level
from
1nato
to 5.
5.value
If
audio
to
record
is
low,
increase
the
●● You
azinu
otkrivanja
zvuka
možete
podesiti
*
can
adjust
sound
level
from
1
*
IfRthe
the
audio
tothe
record
is detection
low,
increase
the VAS
VAS
value
* If
If
the audio
audiolevel).
to record
record
is sound
low, increase
increase
the
VAS value
value
(sensitivity
If
the
is
loud,
decrease
*
the
to
is
low,
the
VAS
vrijednosti
od
1
do
5.
(sensitivity level). If the sound is loud, decrease the
the
(sensitivity
level).
If the
the snimiti
sound vrlo
is loud,
loud,
decrease the
the
VAS
value.
level).
If
sound
is
decrease
●● (sensitivity
A
ko
je
zvuk
koji
želite
tih,
povećajte
VAS value.
VAS
value.
vrijednost
VAS
value.postavke VAS (razina osjetljivosti). Ako je
zvuk glasan,
smanjite
vrijednost
postavke
VAS.
*
* When
When the
the recording
recording level
level adjustment
adjustment is
is MANUAL
MANUAL (➜
(➜ page
page 27),
27), even
even ifif the
the VAS
VAS setting
setting is
is set
set to
to ON,
ON, the
the setting
setting
* When
When
thechange
recording
level
adjustment
is MANUAL
MANUAL (➜
(➜ page
page 27),
27), even
even ifif the
the VAS
VAS setting
setting is
is set
set to
to ON,
ON, the
the setting
setting
does
to
VAS
recording.
*
the
recording
level
adjustment
is
does not
not
change
to the
the
VAS
recording.
●*
● Kada
se
razina
snimanja
postavi
na MANUAL
(→
str. 27), čak i ako se postavka VAS postavi na ON (Uklj.),
does
not
change
to
the
VAS
recording.
For
important
recording,
set
the
VAS
setting
to
OFF.
does
not
change
to
the
VAS
recording.
* For important recording, set the VAS setting to OFF.
se ne
mijenja
u set
snimanje
postavkom
VAS.
*
For
important
recording,
set
the VAS
VAS
setting
tofrequency
OFF.
If
“LOW
CUT
FILTER”
setting
is
low
sound
*
For
recording,
the
setting
OFF.
*postavka
If the
theimportant
“LOW
CUT
FILTER”
setting
iss“ON”,
“ON”,
lowto
frequency
sound may
may be
be cut
cut out
out and
and VAS
VAS recording
recording may
may not
not activate.
activate.
*
If
the
“LOW
CUT
FILTER”
setting
is “ON”,
“ON”,
low
frequency
sound
may
be 26)
cut out
out and
and VAS
VAS recording
recording may
may not
not activate.
activate.
●*
● PIf
VAS
podesite
OFFCUT
(Isklj.)
kada
želite
snimiti
vrlo važnu
snimku.
In
this
case,
change
the
“LOW
FILTER”
setting
to
(➜
page
the
CUT
FILTER”
setting
is
low
frequency
sound
may
be
cut
Inostavku
this“LOW
case,
change
thena
“LOW
CUT
FILTER”
setting
to “OFF”.
“OFF”.
(➜
page
26)
In
this
case, change
change
the
“LOW
CUT
FILTER”
setting
toblinks.
“OFF”.
(➜frekvencije
page
26)
●*
●*Ako
se
postavka
LOW
CUT
FILTER
postavi
na
ON,
zvukovi
niske
mogli
bi
biti
izrezani,
a
pritom
je
moguće
If
the
recording
is
paused
with
no
sound
state,
“
”
When
[REC
*]
is
pressed
from
this
recording
pause
In
this
case,
the
“LOW
CUT
FILTER”
setting
to
“OFF”.
(➜
page
26)
If the recording is paused with no sound state, “
” blinks. When [REC *] is pressed from this recording pause
*da
If the
the
recording
ispostavkom
paused
with
none
sound
state,
blinks.
When
[REC
*] is
ispostavite
pressed from
from
this(→
recording
pause
se snimanje
sis
VAS
aktivira.
Zato
postavku
LOW
FILTER
na OFF.
str. 26) pause
state,
the
is
changed
to
recording
state
and
““ [REC
”” lights
up.
*
If
recording
with
no
sound
state,
““ pause
”” blinks.
When
*]
pressed
this
recording
state,
the status
status
ispaused
changed
to normal
normal
recording
pause
state
andCUT
lights
up.
the
is
to
recording
pause
state
”” lights
●● Astate,
ko snimanje
pauzirate
u načinu
bez zvuka,
treperit
će oznaka
“ ““ ”. Kada
u up.
stanju takve pauze snimanja
state,
the status
status
is changed
changed
to normal
normal
recording
pause
state and
and
lights
up.
pritisnete [REC ●], status će se prebaciti u uobičajeno stanje pauze snimanja te će zasvijetliti oznaka “
”.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
• Set the recording level adjustment to AUTO
•••Set
the
recording
level
adjustment
AUTO
Prvo
razinu
snimanja
na to
AUTO.
beforehand.
(➜
Set
thepostavite
recording
level27)
adjustment
to
AUTO(→ str. 27)
beforehand.
(➜ page
page
27)
(➜
page
27)
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj
•••beforehand.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
the
unit.
beforehand.
(➜
page
27) to
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the zaustavili
unit.
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press [MENU].
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Preventing
unnecessary
recording
(VAS)
Sprečavanje
nepotrebnog
snimanja
(VAS)
Preventing
unnecessary
recording
When VAS (Voice Activated
System) is set, if silence continues
for approx. 2(VAS)
seconds during
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
Funkcija
prethodnog
snimanja
(PRE-RECORD)
Past
recording
function
(PRE-RECORD)
Past
recording
function
(PRE-RECORD)
Ako
snimanje
pokrene
stanja
čekanja
prethodnog
snimanje can
može
If yousestart
recording
from iz
the
standby
stateuoffunkciji
the past
recordingsnimanja,
function, recording
bebiti
started
If you
youthe
start
recording
from
the
standby
of
recording
pokrenuto
zvukom
približno
3 sekunde
prije
snimanja.
with
audio
approx.
3 seconds
beforestate
the radnje
recording
operation.
If
start
recording
from
the
standby
state
of the
the past
past
recording function,
function, recording
recording can
can be
be started
started
with
the
audio
approx.
3
before
operation.
withset
thethe
audio
approx.
3 seconds
seconds
before the
the recording
recording 1
operation.
Da
biste
funkciju
prethodnog
snimanja
To
past
recording
to ON:
Press
andihold
[REC
*]●for
second or
Pritisnite
držite
[REC
] 11sekundu
ili more.
duže.
To
set
past
recording
ON:
Press
hold
*]
unitand
enters
the[REC
past
postavili
na
ON,
učinite sljedeće:
1 The
Uređaj
ulazi
u stanje
čekanja
To
set the
the
past
recording
to
ON:
Press
and
hold
[REC
*] for
for 1
1 second
second or
or more.
more.
• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to to
stop
the unit.
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
the
unit.
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the zaustavili
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj
Press
[MENU].
1•Press
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Press
[MENU].
Press
Pritisnite
Press [MENU].
+, –[MENU].
to select “MIC REC MENU”
Press
+,
REC
Press
+, –
–+,to
to
select
“MIC
REC MENU”
MENU”
Pritisnite
- select
da
biste
odabrali
"MIC REC
and press
[q
OK]
to“MIC
enter.
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
MENU"
i zatim
pritisnite
[► OK] za unos.
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press +, – to select
Press
Pritisnite
da biste
Press +,
+, –
–+,to
to- select
select
“PRE-RECORD”
and
“PRE-RECORD”
and
odabrali
"PRE-RECORD"
“PRE-RECORD”
and
press [q OK] to enter.
ipress
zatim[q
press
[q OK]
OK] to
to enter.
enter.
pritisnite [► OK] za unos.
select
Pritisnite
biste“ON”
Press +, –+,to- da
Press
+,
–
Press
+, "ON"
– to
to
select
“ON”
odabrali
(Uklj.)
ienter.
zatim
and press
[qselect
OK]
to“ON”
and
press
[q
OK]
enter.
(The
setting
is
“OFF”.)
and factory
press[►
[qOK]
OK]
to
enter.
pritisnite
zato
unos.
(The
setting
(Tvornička
"OFF".)
(The factory
factorypostavka
setting is
isje“OFF”.)
“OFF”.)
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
Za
izlazthe
iz zaslona
za
To exit
setting screen,
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
postavljanje
pritisnite
[F2 (CLOSE)].
To
screen,
press
To exit
exit the
the setting
setting
screen,
press [F2
[F2 (CLOSE)].
(CLOSE)].
32
32
323232
32
32
Snimanje
s funkcijom
prethodnog
To record using
the past
recording
To
snimanja:
To record
record using
using the
the past
past recording
recording
function:
Kada
je
odabranimode
načinissnimanja
function:
When
recording
PCM, thePCM,
past funkcija
recording
function:
prethodnog snimanja neće raditi.
When
mode
is
function
does not
operate.
When recording
recording
mode
is PCM,
PCM, the
the past
past recording
recording
• Način does
snimanja
postavite na MP3. (→ str. 25)
function
not
function
not operate.
operate.
• Set the does
recording
mode to MP3. (➜ page 25)
•
Pritisnite
[STOP
■
/RETURN]
da
biste
zaustavili
uređaj
Set
recording
mode
(➜
page
25)
Set the
the[STOP
recording
mode to
to MP3.
MP3.
(➜the
page
25)
•• Press
g/RETURN]
to stop
unit.
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press [STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
2
2
The
unit
the
past
recording
standby
The
unit enters
enters
themode.
past
prethodnog
snimanja.
recording
standby
Changes
2mode.
sec,
3
recording
standby
mode.
Mijenja
seto
u11sec,
sek.,
2 sek.,
Changes
to
3
sec
andi zaustavlja
stops
at 3 2
Changes
to 1
1 sec,
sec,
2sec.
sec,
3
3 sek.
nasec,
3The
sek.
sec
and
stops
at
3
sec.
The
microphone
audio
approx.
sec
and stops
at 3 data
sec. The
Audiopodaci
mikrofona
microphone
audio
data
approx.
3
seconds
before
recording
are
microphone
audio data
approx.
približno
3 before
sekunde
prije
3
seconds
recording
always
updated
the unitare
is
3
seconds
beforeand
recording
are
snimanja
uvijek
se
ažuriraju
i
always
updated
and
unit
on
standby.
always
updated
and the
the
unit is
is
uređaj
ulazi
u
stanje
čekanja.
on
Press
[REC *].
on standby.
standby.
Press
[REC
*].
The
recording
indicator
Pritisnite
[REC
Press
[REC
*]. ●]. lights, and recording is started
The
recording
indicator
lights,
recording
is
started
continuing
directly
after
the preserved
audio
data.
Pokazatelj
snimanja
svijetli,
a and
snimanje
kreće
The
recording
indicator
lights,
and
recording
is točno
started
continuing
directly
after
continuing
directly
after the
the preserved
preserved audio
audio data.
data.
od sačuvanih
audiopodataka.
To stop: Press [STOP g/RETURN].
To
stop:
g/RETURN].
Zaustavljanje:
Pritisnite
[STOP ■/RETURN].
To
stop: Press
Press [STOP
[STOP
g/RETURN].
* The sound that occurs when the recording button is pressed
* The sound that occurs when the recording button is pressed
●● The
Snima
se that
i zvuk
koji when
nastaje
se pritisne
gumb
za
*
sound
occurs
the
recording
button
pressed
is
also
recorded.
(When
the built-in
microphone
is is
used,
etc.)
*
The
sound
that
occurs
when
the kada
recording
button
is
pressed
(Kada
se level
koristi
ugrađeni
mikrofon,
itd.)
also
(When
the
built-in
microphone
is
used,
* is
When
the recording
(➜ page
isetc.)
set
issnimanje.
also recorded.
recorded.
(When
the adjustment
built-in
microphone
is 27)
used,
etc.)
●● When
Kada
se razina
postavi
narecording
MANUAL
(→is
*
the
recording
adjustment
(➜
page
to
MANUAL,
the snimanja
unitlevel
enters
the past
standby
*
When
the
recording
level
adjustment
(➜
page 27)
27)
is set
set
str.
27),
uređaj
istovremeno
ulazi
utime.
stanje
čekanja
to
MANUAL,
the
unit
past
recording
standby
and
recording
standby
at thethe
same
to
MANUAL,
the
unit enters
enters
the
past
recording
standby
prethodne
snimke
i
stanje
čekanja
snimanja.
recording
standby
at
the
same
time.
* and
When
the
unit
enters
the
standby
state
again
after
the
and recording standby at the same time.
●● When
Kada the
uređaj
ponovno
uđe
u stanje
čekanja
nakon
*
unit
enters
standby
state
again
after
the
microphone
position
switched
(➜
page
14),
the past
*
When
the
unit
entersisthe
the
standby
state
again
after
the
promjenestandby
položaja
mikrofona
(→(➜
str.page
14),
u izborniku
microphone
position
is
14),
the
recording
screen
is cancelled
on the
menu
or
microphone
position
is switched
switched
(➜
page
14),
the past
past
će
se
poništiti
zaslon
za
stanje
čekanja
prethodnog
recording
standby
screen
is
cancelled
on
the
menu
the
stop
operation
is
performed,
audio
data
is
freshlyrecording standby screen is cancelled on the menu or
or
snimanja
ili that
će se
izvršiti
radnja zaustavljanja,
a
the
stop
operation
is
audio
stored
from
point.
the
stop
operation
is performed,
performed,
audio data
data is
is freshlyfreshlyaudiopodaci
će
se
od
te
točke
nanovo
pohraniti.
from
that
point.
* stored
The
past
recording
function
operates
when
recording
stored from that point.
●● The
Funkcija
prethodnog
snimanja
radi odwhen
trenutka
kada
počinje
*
past
recording
function
operates
when
recording
It does
not operate
recording
is
actually
*
The
paststarts.
recording
function
operates
when
recording
samo snimanje.
Ne radi
snimanja.
not
operate
when
is
actually
starts.
paused.
It does
does
nottijekom
operatepauziranja
when recording
recording
is
actually
starts. It
●● If
Ako
preostalo
vrijeme snimanja
kraće
paused.
the je
recording
remaining
time is less
thanod
1010
seconds,
*
paused.
sekundi,
funkcija
prethodnog
snimanja
neće
raditi.
If
the
recording
remaining
time
is
less
than
10
seconds,
*
the
past
recording
function
does
not
operate.
* If the recording remaining time is less than 10 seconds,
the
the past
past recording
recording function
function does
does not
not operate.
operate.
Recording
an microphone
external
microphone
Ova this
se postavkawhen
koristiby
kadaconnecting
se snima
vanjskim mikrofonom
spojenim na
utikač
za vanjski mikrofon/
Use
to
Use this setting
setting when recording
recording by
by connecting
connecting an
an external
external microphone
to the
the external
external microphone/Linemicrophone/Linelinijski
ulazni
utikač.
in
of
this
Use
this
when recording by connecting an external microphone to the external microphone/Linein jack
jack
ofsetting
this unit.
unit.
in
jack of
this unit.
mikrofon.
Connect
the
microphone.
•••Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
the
unit.
2
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj
Connectvanjski
the external
external
microphone.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the zaustavili
unit.
2 Spojite
External
microphone
Vanjski mikrofon
Connect the external microphone.
• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stoptothe
unit.
2
External
microphone
Slide
the
Mic/Line
switch
[MIC].
1
(not
Slide the prekidač
Mic/Line Mic/Line
switch tou[MIC].
(nijesupplied)
isporučen)
položaj [MIC].
External
microphone
1 Povucite
(not
supplied)
1 Slide the Mic/Line switch to [MIC].
(not
supplied)
Insert
Utaknite
Insert
securely.
do kraja.
Insert
securely.
securely.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Snimanje
vanjskog
Recordingpomoću
by connecting
anmikrofona
external microphone
Plug
type:
Vrsta
utikača:
Plug
type:
ø
3.5
mm
stereo
mini
plug
Ø
3,5
mm
stereo
miniutikač
Plug
type:
ø
3.5
mm
stereo
mini
plug
ø 3.5 mm stereo mini plug
Prikazuje
se” is
“
“.
““
” is displayed.
displayed.
“
” is displayed.
Pritisnite
[REC
●] start
da biste
pokrenuli
Press
*]
recording.
Press [REC
[REC
*] to
to
start
recording.
See
page
15
Press
[REC
*]recording
to startoperations.
recording.
snimanje.
See
page
15 for
for
recording
operations.
See page 15
for recording
operations.
Informacije
o postupcima
snimanja
potražite na str. 15.
*
the
instructions
for
device.
●● Read
Pročitajte
upute za uporabu
uređaja
kojiconnected
želite spojiti.
*
Read
the operating
operating
instructions
for the
the
connected
device.
*
the
level
is
low
adjust
microphone
sensitivity.
(➜
26)
●● If
Ako
razina
snimanja
previsoka
ilithe
preniska,
podesite
osjetljivost
mikrofona.
(→ str.
Read
the
operating
connected
device.
*
If
thejerecording
recording
levelinstructions
is too
too
low or
orforhigh,
high,
adjust the
the
microphone
sensitivity.
(➜ page
page
26)26)
*
microphone
of
unit
does
not
work
ifif another
device
is
to
the
microphone/Line-in
●
Ugrađeni
mikrofon
uređaju
neće
raditi
je neki drugi
uređaj
spojen
na
utikač
za vanjski
mikrofon/linijski
If
thebuilt-in
recording
levelnaisovom
too
low
or high,
adjust
theako
microphone
sensitivity.
(➜ page
*● The
The
built-in
microphone
of this
this
unit
does
not
work
another
device
is connected
connected
to26)
the external
external
microphone/Line-in
ulazni
utikač.
* jack.
The
built-in
microphone of this unit does not work if another device is connected to the external microphone/Line-in
jack.
*
If
the
connected
external
microphone
is
for
one
be
●
monotički
vanjski
mikrofon,
moguće jethe
da sound
se zvuk
kanala may
nećeonly
snimiti.
*● jack.
IfAko
thekoristite
connected
external
microphone
is monaural,
monaural,
the
sound
forjednog
one channel
channel
may
only
be recorded.
recorded.
* If the connected external microphone is monaural, the sound for one channel may only be recorded.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
3
3
3
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
Copying
other
devices
Kopiranjetona
druge
uređaje
1
Connect
theslušalice
headphone/earphone
U utikač za
( ) na ovom jack
(W)
of
this
unit
with
the
audio
input (mic)
uređaju spojite priključak
za audioulaz
terminal
of thevanjskog
external uređaja
device with
an
(mikrofonski)
pomoću
audio
cable.
audiokabela.
Audiokabel
s
Audio Cable
Cable
Audio
rezistorom
(nije
with resistor
resistor
with
isporučen)
(not
(not supplied)
supplied)
Utaknite
Insert
Insert
do
kraja.
securely.
securely.
2
3
Start recording
on the
device.
Započnite
snimanje
naexternal
vanjskom
uređaju.
Play the le thatdatoteku
you want
copy onkoju
this
Reproducirajte
natouređaju
unit. kopirati.
želite
Stereo
Stereo
Monaural
Stereo Monotički
Monaural
miniutikač
mini
mini
mini plug
plug miniutikač
mini plug
plug
To audio
audio
To
input
input (mic)
(mic)
U priključak
terminal
terminal
za audioulaz
(mikrofonski)
Vrsta
utikača:
Plug type:
type:
Plug
Ø
3,5 mm
mm stereo
stereo mini
ø 3.5
3.5
mm
stereo
mini
ø
miniutikač
plug
plug
Vanjski uređaj
External
device
External
device
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
*
* Read
Read the
the operating
operating instructions
instructions for
for the
the connected
connected device.
device.
*
the
cable
matches
of
●
Pročitajte
upute za uporabu
uređaja
kojimonaural/stereo
želite spojiti.
*● Use
Use
the connection
connection
cable that
that
matches
monaural/stereo
of the
the connected
connected device.
device.
Wrong
connection
may
cause
recording
trouble
(i.e.
Only
is
copied.).
●● Wrong
Koristiteconnection
kabel za spajanje
kojirecording
je kompatibilan
mono/stereo
ulazom
may cause
troubles(i.e.
Only 1
1 channel
channel
is spojenog
copied.). uređaja.
* The
The
copiedspajanje
sound quality
quality
may differ
differ
from
the sound
sound
quality of
of
thiskopira
unit. se samo 1 kanal).
Pogrešno
može dovesti
do from
poteškoća
u snimanju
(npr.
*
copied
sound
may
the
quality
this
unit.
*● Adjust
Adjust
thekopiranog
volume on
onzvuka
this unit
unit
to copy
copy
with a
a proper
proper
volume.zvuka na ovom uređaju.
●
Kvaliteta
može
se razlikovati
od kvalitete
*
the
volume
this
to
with
volume.
●● Glasnoću na uređaju podesite tako da se kopiranje vrši s odgovarajućom glasnoćom.
34
34
34
Ovom
metodom
snima
u mapu
uređaja
utikač zadevice
vanjskito
mikrofon/linijski
This issethe
method
to record
to"L"
thei to“L”spajanjem
folder byvanjskog
connecting
an uexternal
the external ulazni utikač
na
ovom uređaju.
microphone/Line-in
jack of this unit.
microphone/Line-in jack of this unit.
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
Slide the
the prekidač
Mic/Line Mic/
Povucite
Slide
switch
to [LINE].
Line
u položaj
[LINE].
Press [MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press
+,
–
“LINE
REC”
and
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
REC"
Press +, –+,to
to- select
select
“LINE
REC”"LINE
and press
press
i[q
zatim
OK]pritisnite
to enter. [► OK] za unos.
Press
“LINE
INPUT”
and
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"LINE
Press +,
+, –
–+,to
to- select
select
“LINE
INPUT”
and
press [qi zatim
OK] topritisnite
enter. [► OK] za unos.
INPUT"
Press +,
+, –
–+,to
to- select
select
Pritisnite
da biste
Press
odabrali
postavku
i zatim
the setting
and press
pritisnite
OK] za unos.
[q OK] to[►
enter.
When
connecting
to
terminal
of
Pri
spajanju
na priključak
slušalica vanjskog
uređaja
When
connecting
to the
the headphone
headphone
terminal
of
external
device
or
output
of
ili
linijski izlazni
uređaja,
external
devicepriključak
or the
the line
lineprijenosnog
output terminal
terminal
of portable
portable
device,
select
“HIGH”
or
“LOW”
respectively.
odaberite
postavke
"HIGH"
(visoko)
ili
"LOW"
device, select “HIGH” or “LOW” respectively. (nisko).
(Tvornička
"HIGH".)
(The
setting
(The factory
factorypostavka
setting is
isje“HIGH”.)
“HIGH”.)
Press [F2[F2
(CLOSE)].
Pritisnite
(CLOSE)].
7
Connect
Spojite
uređaj.device
the external
Connectvanjski
bezresistor
rezistora
Audio
Cable
AudioAudiokabel
Cable without
without
resistor
(nijesupplied)
isporučen)
(not
(not
supplied)
Utaknite
Insert
Insert
do
kraja.
securely.
securely.
Plug
Vrsta
utikača:
Plug type:
type:
Ø
3,5 mm
mm stereo
stereo
ø
ø 3.5
3.5
mm
stereo
miniutikač
mini
plug
mini plug
Audiouređaj
Audio
Audio device
device
U izlazni output
To
To audio
audio output
audiopriključak
(headphone)
(headphone)
(za slušalice)
terminal
terminal
U linijski
izlazni
To
LINE
To
LINE OUT
OUT
priključak
(audio
out)
(audio
out)
(audioizlaz)
terminal
terminal
L
L
R
R
Connect
the
device
and
the
Connects with
with
the external
external
device
and slide
slide
the Mic/
Mic/
Spojite
vanjskim
uređajem
i povucite
prekidač
Line
to
Then,
the
line
Mic/Line
u položaj
"LINE".
će se postavka
Line switch
switch
to “LINE”.
“LINE”.
Then,Pojavit
the selected
selected
line input
input
setting
and
the
line
recording
mode
will
appear.
setting and
the aline
recording
will appear.
linijskog
ulaza,
zatim
i načinmode
snimanja.
(➜
37)
(➜ page
page
37)
(→
str. 37)
Line
setting
Postavka
Line input
inputulaza
setting
HIGH
: visoko
:: HIGH
: nisko
:: LOW
LOW
Način Line
linijskog
snimanja
recording
mode
Line
recording
mode
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
•••Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
the
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the zaustavili
unit.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Recording
other
devices
Snimanje sfrom
drugih
uređaja
35
35
35
35
Recording
other
devices
Snimanje
s drugih
Recording from
from
other uređaja
devices
8
8
Press
hold
Press and
andi držite
hold [REC
[REC
*]
Pritisnite
[REC*]
●]
for
1
second
or
more.
for
1
second
or
more.
1 sekundu ili duže.
The
enters
the
The unit
unitulazi
enters
the recording
recording
Uređaj
u stanje
čekanja.
The
unit
enters
the
recording
standby.
standby.
standby.
9
9
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
10
10
11
11
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
Treperi
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Play back
back the
the
external
and
the
Pokrenite
reprodukciju
na vanjskom
Play
external device
device
and adjust
adjustuređaju
the
level.
iinput/output
podesite razinu
input/output
level. ulaznog/izlaznog signala.
If
meter
swings
and
““
”” is

mjerač
razine
njiše
i prikazuje
se oznaka
1
If the
theselevel
level
meter
swings
and
is displayed,
displayed,
If
the
level
meter
swings
and
“
” is
displayed,
1 Ako
of
external
high.
“the
”, glasnoća
uređajais
previsoka.
the volume
volume
of the
thevanjskog
external device
device
isjetoo
too
high.
the
volume
of
the
external
device
is
too
high.
Adjust
volume
the
device
to
Podesite
vanjskog
uređaja
na vrijednost
Adjust the
theglasnoću
volume of
of
the external
external
device
to the
the
Adjust
the
volume
of
the
external
device
to
the
even
if
the
volume
is
turned
““ ”” range,
raspona
“
”
čak
i
ako
je
glasnoća
maksimalno
range, even
even ifif the
the volume
volume is
is turned
turned to
to the
the
to
the
“ ” range,
maximum.
pojačana.
maximum.
maximum.
To
reconfigure
line
settings,
press
Da
ponovnothe
konfigurirali
To biste
reconfigure
the
line input
inputpostavke
settings,linijskog
press ulaza,
To
reconfigure
the
line
input
settings,
press
to
..
[MENU]
follow
steps
pritisnite
[MENU]
i pratite
od
do
.
4
to 6
[MENU] and
and
follow
steps korake
to
.
[MENU]
and
follow
steps
4
6
After
adjusting
input/output

štofinish
podesite
razinuthe
ulaznog/izlaznog
2
After you
you
finish
adjusting
the
input/output level,
level,
After
you
finish
adjusting
the
input/output
level,
2 Nakon
stop
sound
the
device
at
signala,
izvorof
drugog
uređaja
stop the
thezaustavite
sound source
source
ofzvuka
the other
other
device
at the
thena
stop
the
sound
source
of
the
other
device
at
the
position
where
want
to
recording.
onom
mjestu
nayou
kojem
želite
započeti
snimanje.
position
where
you
want
to start
start
recording.
position
where
you
want
to
start
recording.
Press [REC
[REC
*]
start
Pritisnite
[REC
] da
bisterecording.
pokrenuli snimanje.
Press
*]●to
to
start
recording.
device.
Play
the
external
Započnite
reprodukciju
na
vanjskom
Play the external device.
uređaju.
*
* Read
Read the
the operating
operating instructions
instructions for
for the
the connected
connected device.
device.
*
the
operating
instructions
for
the
connected
device.
●
● Read
Pročitajte
uputethe
zaaudio
uporabu
koji
želite spojiti.
*
Disconnecting
corduređaja
during
recording
will
*
the
audio
during
will
*● Disconnecting
Disconnecting
the
audio cord
cord
during recording
recording
will
●
stop
Ako se
tijekom
snimanja
audiokabel
iskopča,
recording.
stop
recording.
stop
recording.
snimanje
će se zaustaviti.
*
Change
the
line
recording
mode
as
necessary.
*
the
mode
as
necessary.
*● Change
Change
the line
line recording
recording
mode
aslinijskog
necessary.
●
Ako je potrebno,
promijenite
način
snimanja.
(➜
page
37)
(➜
page
37)
(➜
37)
(→page
str. 37)
*
The
L
folder
will
be
automatically
selected
for
*
The
L se
folder
willzvuk
be automatically
automatically
selected
for
*
folder
will
be
selected
●● The
KadaL
snima
preko linijskog
ulaza, for
za
recording
when
line
sound
recorded.
recording
when
line input
inputodabire
sound is
is
recorded.
recording
when
line
input
sound
is
recorded.
snimanje se
automatski
mapa
L.
This
has
the
following
synchro
recording
This unit
unit
hasima
the sljedeću
followingfunkciju
synchrosinkroniziranog
recording function.
function.
Ovaj
uređaj
snimanja.
This
unit
has
the
following
synchro
recording
function.
This
function
detects
the
silence
between
tracks,
etc.
This
function
detects
the
silence
between
tracks,
etc.
This
function
detectsotkrivaju
the silence
between
tracks,
etc.
Ovom
se
funkcijom
razdoblja
tišine
između
zapisa,
and
then
records
each
track
into
different files,
such
as
a
and
then
records
each
track
into
files,
as
and
then
records
each
track
intou different
different
files, such
such
as a
a
i
sl.
i
zatim
se
svaki
zapis
snima
različitu
datoteku,
kao
first
track,
second
track,
etc.
If
detecting
sound
from
first
track,
second
track,itd.etc.
etc.
If se
detecting
sound
from the
the
first
track,
detecting
sound
from
the
prvitrack,
zapis,second
drugi zapis,
AkoIf
otkrije zvuk
iz vanjskog
external
device,
recording
starts
automatically.
If
detecting
external
device,
recording
starts pokreće.
automatically.
Ifuoči
detecting
external
recording
starts
automatically.
detecting
uređaja,device,
snimanje
se automatski
Ako seIf
silence
for
approx.
2
seconds
more,
recording
is
silence
for
approx.
2 sekunde
seconds ilior
ordulje,
more,
recording
is
silence
approx.
seconds
or
more,
recording
is
tišina ufor
trajanju
od 2
snimanje
se pauzira.
paused.
Detecting
sound
again
will
resume
recording.
paused.
Detecting
sound
againsnimanje
will resume
resume
recording.
Kada seDetecting
zvuk ponovno
otkrije,
se nastavlja.
paused.
sound
again
will
recording.
Synchro
setting
Synchro recording
recording
settingsnimanja
Postavka
sinkroniziranog
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
the
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the unit.
unit.
• •Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
zaustavili uređaj.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Press
[MENU].
Press
[MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press
+,
“LINE
REC”
and
Press
+, –
–+,to
to- select
select
“LINE
REC”"LINE
and press
press
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
REC"
[q
OK]
to
i zatim
[q
OK] pritisnite
to enter.
enter. [► OK] za unos.
Press
+,
“SYNCHRO
REC”
Press
+, –
–+,to
to- select
select
“SYNCHRO
REC” and
and
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali "SYNCHRO
press
OK]
to
REC" i[q
zatim
press
[q
OK]pritisnite
to enter.
enter. [► OK] za unos.
Press
+,
select
Press
+, –
–+,to
to
select
“ON
Pritisnite
- da
biste“ON
(Auto
Stop)”
or
odabrali
"ON (Auto
Stop)" ili
(Auto
Stop)”
or “ON
“ON
(Manual
Stop)”
and
"ON (Manual
Stop)"
zatim
(Manual
Stop)”
andi press
press
[q
OK]
enter.
pritisnite
OK] za unos.
[q
OK] to
to[►
enter.
Auto:
The
ifif approx.
seconds
or
Auto:
The recording
recording
pauses
approx.
2uoči
seconds
or
Automatski:
Snimanjepauses
se pauzira
ako se2
tišina u
Auto:
The
recording
pauses
if approx.
2
seconds
or
more of
of
silence
is2detected
detected
and
stops
silence
more
silence
and
stops
ififif silence
trajanju
odis
sekunde ili
dulje,
a zaustavlja
more of
silence
is detected
and
stops
silence
continues
approx.
seconds
or
more.ili dulje.
continues
approx.
15
seconds
or
se ako
tišina15
traje
još 15 sekundi
continues
approx.
15
seconds
or more.
more.
Manual:
Even
ifif silence
continues,
recording
Ručno: Čak
se tišina
nastavi,the
snimanje
ostaje
Manual:
Even
continues,
the
recording
Manual:
Eveni ako
if silence
silence
continues,
the
recording
continues
to
be
paused
(standby)
until
u
stanju
pauze
(čekanja)
dok
ne
continues to
to be
be paused
paused (standby)
(standby)pritisnete
until
continues
until
[STOP
[STOP g/RETURN]
■/RETURN].is
[STOP
g/RETURN]
is pressed.
pressed.
[STOP
g/RETURN]
is
pressed.
(The
factory
setting
(Tvornička
"OFF".)
(The
factorypostavka
setting is
isje“OFF”.)
“OFF”.)
(The
factory
setting
is
“OFF”.)
*
stop
is useful when
recording
CDs etc. that
●● Automatic
Automatsko
zaustavljanje
korisno
je za linijsko
* Automatic stop is useful when recording CDs etc. that
have
moreCD-ova,
than approx.
seconds
of silence
between
snimanje
itd. na2when
kojima
razdoblje
tišine
* have
Automatic
useful
recording
CDs
etc. that
morestop
thanisapprox.
2 seconds
of silence
between
tracks
using
linetraje
recording.
između
zapisa
2 sekunde
ili dulje.
have
more
than
2 seconds
of silence between
tracks
using
line approx.
recording.
*
Manual
stop
is
useful
when
recording
onto
cassette
●● Manual
Ručnousing
zaustavljanje
korisno
je kada se
snima
na
tracks
recording.
*
stop line
is useful
when recording
onto
cassette
tapes
etc.vrpce,
that need
switching
from side
Astrane
to side
B
kazetne
itd. koje
se prebacuju
sa
A na
* tapes
Manual
stop
is need
useful
when
recording
onto
cassette
etc.
that
switching
from side
A to
side
B
causing
silence
of
more
than
15
seconds.
stranuetc.
Bsilence
zbog
čega
nastaje
dulja
15side
sekundi.
tapes
that need
switching
from
sideod
A to
B
causing
of more
thantišina
15
seconds.
*
When
[MENU]
is
pressed
during
recording
standby
●● When
Kada se
u stanju
čekanja
pritisne
gumb [MENU]
u in
causing
silence
more than
15 seconds.
*
[MENU]
isofpressed
during
recording
standby
in
on
page
36,
the
synchro
recording
setting
can
step
8[MENU]
koraku
str.
36,the
moguće
je recording
podesiti postavku
* step
When
is 36,
pressed
during
standby
in
page
synchro
setting can
8 on na
be made.
sinkroniziranog
36, the synchro recording setting can
step
be
made.on pagesnimanja.
* If the 8
start of a track is cut from the recording, turn
●● If
Ako
se
početak
zapisa
izreže
snimke,
podesite
be
made.
*
the
start
of a track
is cut
fromsathe
recording,
turn
synchro recording “OFF”.
* synchro
Ifsinkronizirano
the start
of a snimanje
track
is cut
the(Isklj.).
recording, turn
recording
“OFF”.
nafrom
"OFF"
* Synchro recording cannot be used when using timer
synchro
recording
“OFF”.
*
recording
cannotnebemože
usedse
when
using
timer
●● Synchro
Sinkronizirano
snimanje
koristiti
kada
recording
for line
recording.
* recording
Synchro
recording
cannotza
belinijsko
used when
using timer
for linevremena
recording.
koristite mjerač
snimanje.
Synchro
recording recording:
for line recording.
Synchro
recording:
Sinkronizirano
snimanje:
• Make the synchro
recording
setting beforehand.
Synchro
recording:
• Make the synchro
recording setting beforehand.
•Make
PPerform
rvo the
podesite
sinkronizirano
snimanje.
•1
synchro
recording
beforehand.
steps 1 to 11setting
on
pages
35 and 36.
1
1
Selecting
Selecting line
line recording
recording mode
mode
Kvalitetu
zvuka line
moguće
je promijeniti kada
se snima
Selecting
mode
The
sound quality
can recording
be changed when
recording
The
soundlinijskog
quality snimanja.
can be changed
whenorecording
u načinu
Informacije
načinima
with line recording. See page 25 for information about
The
sound
quality can
be
changed
recording
with
line recording.
See
page
information
about
snimanja
potražite
na str.
25. 25 forwhen
recording modes.
with line recording.
recording
modes. See page 25 for information about
•
Pritisnite
[STOP
■
/RETURN]
da
biste
zaustavili
uređaj.
•
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
recording
modes.
• Press [STOP
g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press [MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
Press [MENU].
[MENU].
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
REC"
Press +,
–+,to- select
“LINE
REC”"LINE
and press
Press +, – to select “LINE REC” and press
iPress
zatim
[►“LINE
OK] zaREC”
unos.
[q
OK]+,pritisnite
to– enter.
to
select
and
press
[q OK] to enter.
Press
–+,to- select
“LINE
REC "LINE
MODE”
and
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
REC
[q OK]+,
Press
+,to– enter.
to select “LINE REC MODE” and
MODE"
i –zatim
[►
OK]MODE”
za unos.
press
[q
OK]
topritisnite
enter.
Press
+,
to
select
“LINE
REC
and
press [q OK] to enter.
Press [q
+, –+,to- da
select
the
settingpostavku
(PCM
Pritisnite
odabrali
press
to biste
enter.
Press +, –OK]
to select
the
setting (PCM
(frekvencija
sampling
bitrate)
andMP3press
Press +, –frequency/MP3
toPCM-uzorkovanja/brzina
select the setting
(PCM
sampling
frequency/MP3
bitrate)
and press
prijenosa)
i zatim pritisnitebitrate)
[► OK]and
za unos.
[q OK] to frequency/MP3
enter.
sampling
press
[q OK] topostavka
enter. je
(Tvornička
(The
factory
setting is
[q
OK]
to
enter.
(The factory setting is
"MP3
192kbps".)
“MP3 192kbps”.)
(The
setting is
“MP3factory
192kbps”.)
“MP3 192kbps”.)
Perform steps 1 to 11 on pages 35 and 36.
Izvršite korake
na str.3535and
i 36.
Perform
steps 1odto 11do
on pages
36.
* When connecting to the headphone output terminal
* When connecting to the headphone output terminal
the se
external
synchro
recording may not
●● of
Kada
uređajdevice,
spaja sthe
izlaznim
priključkom
* of
When
connecting
to thethe
headphone
output terminal
the external
device,
synchro recording
may not
function
properly.
za slušalice
na vanjskom uređaju, funkcija
of the external
device, the synchro recording may not
function
properly.
sinkroniziranog
snimanja
možda
neće
ispravno
raditi.
function properly.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Kada spojite uređaj, a prekidač Mic/
Line switch to [LINE] and “
” is
Connect
thetodevice,
slide
Line switch
[LINE]
and[LINE],
“the Mic/
” is
povučete
u položaj
shown on the display.
Line
switch
to display.
[LINE]
and “ oznaka
” is
shown
on the
na zaslonu
će
se prikazati
shown
on the display.
“
”.
●● When
Kada approx.
ne dođe2do
otkrivanja
2 ili više
sekundi
tišine be
ili
*
seconds
or more
of silence
cannot
* When
2 seconds
or more of silence
cannot be
ovisnoapprox.
o kombinaciji
vanjskih
sinkronizirano
detected,
or depending
on the uređaja,
combination
of external
* detected,
When
approx.
2
seconds
or
more
of
silence
cannot
be
or
depending
on
the
combination
of
external
snimanjethe
možda
neće
raditi. may not function.
devices,
synchro
recording
detected,the
or depending
on the combination
of external
devices,
synchro recording
may not function.
devices,
the
synchro
recording
not function.
Odabir načina linijskogmay
snimanja
To
setting screen,
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
Za exit
izlazthe
iz zaslona
za
To
exit
the
setting screen,
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
postavljanje
pritisnite
[F2 press
(CLOSE)].
To
exit the setting
screen,
[F2 (CLOSE)].
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Za
izlazthe
iz zaslona
za postavljanje
pritisnite
To exit
setting screen,
press [F2
(CLOSE)].
To
exit
the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Connect
the
device,
slide
the
Mic/
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Connect the device, slide the Mic/
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 37
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 37
2012/05/29 9:35:45
2012/05/29 9:35:45
Index
function
Funkcija
indeksa
Index
function
By
adding
Index
(position
information
on
to
playback
position
Index
function
Dodavanjem
indeksa
(informacije
o položaju
na datoteci)
položaj
reprodukcije
skačeto
By adding Index
(position
information
on the
the file)
file)
to the
the file,
file,
playback
position jumps
jumps
tona
By
Index
(position
information
the
file)
to
file, playback
position jumps to
the adding
specified
position
by skip
operationon(➜
page
during
playback.
određeni
položaj
postupkom
preskakanja
(→
str. 17)
17)the
tijekom
reprodukcije.
the adding
specified
position
by skip
operationon(➜
page
during
playback.position jumps to
By
Index
(position
information
the
file) 17)
to the
file, playback
the specified
position
by skip
operation (➜
page
17)
during
playback.
Na specified
datoteke
uposition
mapama
MUSIC
(M),
OTHER
FOLDER
( )) during
) i urecycle
mapi
koša
)
Files
within
MUSIC
(M)
folder,
OTHER
FOLDER
and
bin
folder
the
skip
operation
(➜
page ((17)
playback.
Files
within the
the
MUSIC by
(M)
folder,
OTHER
FOLDER
and
recycle
bin ((za ))smeće
folder (cannot
cannot
nijeindexed.
moguće
staviti
indekse.
Indekse
nije FOLDER
moguće dodati
ni tijekom
mjeračem
Files
within Also,
the
MUSIC
(M)cannot
folder,
OTHER
( ) and
recycle snimanja
bin ( ) folder
cannot
be
indexes
be
indexed.
indexes
cannot be
be added
added during
during timer
timer recording
recording or
or playback.
playback.
vremena
nitiAlso,
tijekom
reprodukcije.
Files
within
the
MUSIC
(M)cannot
folder, be
OTHER
FOLDER
( ) and
recycleorbin
( ) folder cannot
be
indexed.
Also,
indexes
added
during timer
recording
playback.
be
indexed.index
Also, indexes cannot be added during
timer recording
or playback.
Adding
Deleting
index
Adding
index
Deleting
index
Dodavanje
indeksa
Adding index
Adding
During
recording
or
playback
1
During index
recording
orreprodukcije
playback or
or
1
Tijekom
snimanja,
During
recording
or
playback
or
1 while
recording
is
paused,
press
while
recording
isor
paused,
press
During
recording
playback
or
pauziranja
snimanja
pritisnite
1 ili
while
recording
is
paused,
press
[F2 (INDEX)] at the position where
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
[F2
(INDEX)]
at the
position
where
[F2
(INDEX)]
na
položaju
napress
kojem
while
recording
is paused,
[F2
(INDEX)]
at the
position
where
you
want
to
an
index.
želite
dodati
indeks.
you(INDEX)]
want
to add
add
an position
index. where
[F2
at
the
you want to add an index.
““you
”” (blinking)
and
Prikazuju
oznake
(blinking)
and
wantseto
add an index.
“ ” (blinking) and
38
38
3838
383838
38
INDEX”
are
““ADDING
“ (treperi)
i
“ADDING
INDEX”
are
““ADDING
” (blinking)
and
INDEX”
displayed.
"ADDING
INDEX".are
displayed. INDEX”
“ADDING
are
displayed.
““displayed.
”” datoteku
(lighting)
is
Za
(lighting) na
is koji
“displayed
” dodani
(lighting)
is
for
the
su
indeksi
displayed
for
the file
file
“displayed
” (lighting)
for is
the file
to
are
pojavljuje
se
oznaka
to which
which indexes
indexes
are
displayed
for
the
file
to
which
indexes
are
“added.
" (svijetli).
added.
to which indexes are
added.
●
Na
jednu
dodati
indeksa.
added.
*
to
indexes
per
be
added.
*● Up
Up
to 36
36 datoteku
indexes moguće
per 1
1 file
fileje can
can
be36
added.
*
Up
to 36
indexes
per
1datoteka
file the
canfile
be isadded.
Indeksi
seare
brišu
kada
se
izbriše
ili podijeli.
*
deleted
when
deleted
* Indexes
Indexes
are
deleted
when
the
file
isadded.
deleted
*
Up
to
36
indexes
per
1
file
can
be
*● Indexes
deleted baterije
when the
file is deleted
●
Kada seare
pokazatelj
prikazuje
kao
or
or divided.
divided.
* or
Indexes
are
deleted
when
the
file is
“ divided.
“ the
(treperi),
indekse
nije
moguće
dodati.
*
battery
indicator
shows
““ deleted
””
* When
When
the
battery
indicator
shows
Dodavanje
indeksa
moždabe
neće
biti
or
divided.
* (blinking),
When
the battery
indicator
shows
“ moguće
”
indexes
cannot
added.
Also,
(blinking),
indexes
cannot
be
added.
Also,
ni kadathe
je battery
pokazatelj
baterije
na granici
“
“
* (blinking),
When
indicator
shows
“ on
” the
indexes
cannot
be
added.
Also,
adding
the
index
may
be
impossible
adding
the
index
may
be
impossible
on
the
i“
”of
(treperi).
(blinking),
cannot
be added. on
Also,
adding
the
index
may
impossible
the
”” and
““ be
”” (blinking).
border
““indexes
and
(blinking).
border
of
●
● border
Tijekomplayback,
reprodukcije,
čak
i ako pritisnete
adding
the
may
impossible
on
thena
” and
“ ifbe
” (blinking).
of
“ index
even
u
at
*
During
playback,
even
if you
you press
press
utočke
at the
the
* During
položaju
približno
2“ sekunde
nakon
and
(blinking).
border
ofwithin
“ ”approx.
playback,
even
if ”you
press
u the
at thes
* During
position
2
seconds
after
position
within
approx.
2
seconds
after
the
indeksom,
reprodukcija
senot
ne
zaustavlja
na
During
playback,
evendoes
if you
press
u
at the
* position
within
approx.
2
seconds
after
the
index
point,
playback
stop
at
the
index
point, playback does not stop at the point.
point.
toj točki.
position
within
approx.does
2 seconds
after
thepoint.
index
point,
playback
not stop
at the
index point, playback does not stop at the point.
Brisanje
Deleting indeksa
index
••Deleting
Select
which
Select a
a file
file index
which has
has Index
Index to
to be
be deleted.
deleted.
Odaberite
indeksom
želite
••Select
a file datoteku
which hass Index
to bekoji
deleted.
(➜
(➜ page
page 17)
17)
•• (➜
Select
a file
which
has Index
to
be the
deleted.
izbrisati.
(→
str. 17)
page
17)
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
• Press [STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
unit.
page
17)
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da the
biste
••(➜
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
unit.
Press
[ERASE/A-B&].
•1
[STOP
g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
zaustavili
uređaj.
Press
[ERASE/A-B&].
1Press
1
2
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
ERASE/A-B&
ERASE/A-B&
ERASE/A-B&
ERASE/A-B
ERASE/A-B&
F1
F1
F1
F2
F1 F2
F2
F2
Press [ERASE/A-B&].
Press
+,
to
[ERASE/A-B&].
Pritisnite
]. and
Press
+, –
–[ERASE/A-B
to select
select “INDEX”
“INDEX”
and
Press
+, –OK]
to select
“INDEX” and
press
[q
to
enter.
press
[q
OK]
tobiste
enter.
Pritisnite
+,
da
odabrali
"INDEX"
Press
+,
–
to
select
“INDEX”
and
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
Press
+,
–
to
Press
+,pritisnite
–OK]
to to enter.
i zatim[q
[► OK] za unos.
press
Press
+,
–
to
select
“YES”
and
select
“YES”
Press
+,
–+,
to- and
Pritisnite
da
select
“YES”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
press
[q
OK]
to
select
“YES”
and
biste odabrali
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
enter.
"YES"
(Da)
i
zatim
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
enter.
pritisnite [► OK]
Indexes
are
Indexes
are deleted.
deleted.
za unos.
Indexes
are deleted.
Indexes
arebrišu.
deleted.from a file does not
Indeksi se
*
* Deleting
Deleting index
index marks
marks from a file does not
* Deleting
marks
from
file does not
delete the
theindex
audio
part of
of
theafile.
file.
delete
audio
part
the
*
Deleting
index
marks
from
afile.
file
does not
the audio
part
of
the
●● delete
Brisanjem
indeksne
oznake
s datoteke
ne
*
When
more
than
1
index
are
* When more than 1 index are added
added in
in 1
1 file,
file,
thezvuk
audio
part
of one
the
* delete
When
more
than
1 index
arefile.
added
in 1 file,
brišecannot
se
datoteke.
they
be
deleted
by
one.
they cannot
be
deleted
one
byadded
one. in 1 file,
*
When
more
than
1
index
are
be deleted
by one.
●● they
Kadacannot
je jednoj
datoteci one
dodano
više od 1
they
cannot
by one.
indeksa,
nijebeihdeleted
mogućeone
brisati
jedan po
jedan.
■
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
g/RETURN
STOP
/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
Status indication
Status
indication
Pokazatelj
Status
indication
statusa
Brzina reprodukcije
During playback,
During
playback,
prikazuje
se tijekom
During
playback,
the
playback
speed
reprodukcije.
Kada
the
playback
thedisplayed.
playback speed
speed
is
se
brzina
podesi,
is
displayed.
is displayed.
The
display will stop
zaslon
prestaje
The
will
stop
The display
display
willthe
stop
blinking
when
treperiti.
blinking
when
the
blinking
speed iswhen
fixed.the
speed
is
fixed.
speed is fixed.
Playback
speed:
Brzina
reprodukcije:
Playback
speed:
Playback
The playbackspeed:
speed can be adjusted in 10% steps for
Brzina
reprodukcije
seadjusted
podesiti in
pomoću
koraka
The
playback
speedmože
can
10%
steps
for
The
playback
can be
be
adjusted
in
10%
for od
speeds
faster speed
than normal
speed
(100%),
andsteps
5% steps
10% za faster
brzinethan
više normal
od uobičajene
(100%) and
i u koracima
speeds
speed
(100%),
5%
speeds
faster
than
normal
speed
(100%),
and
5% steps
steps
for speeds
slower
than
normal
speed.
od 5%
za brzine
od uobičajene.
for
speeds
slowermanje
than normal
normal
speed.
for
speeds
slower
than
speed.
Status
indication
playback:
Status
indication
during
playback:
Pokazatelj
statusaduring
tijekom
reprodukcije:
Statusspeed
indication
Normal
playback,during
playback playback:
faster and playback
Normal
speed
playback,
playback
faster
and playback
Uobičajena
brzina
reprodukcije,
brža
reprodukcija
i sporija
Normal
speed
playback,
playback
faster
playback
slower
are
displayed
”, “ ” and
“ ”and
respectively.
reprodukcija
prikazujuas
se“““ oznakama
“ i “ ”.
slower
as
”,
slower are
are displayed
displayed
as
”, ““ ”” and
and“ ““ “,“”” respectively.
respectively.
* The speed cannot be adjusted for playback using
*
speed
adjusted
playback
using
●● The
Brzinu
nije cannot
mogućebe
podesiti
za for
reprodukciju
s
*
The
cannot
playback
folderspeed
cue (➜
pagebe
49)adjusted
or timerfor
playback
(➜using
page 55).
folder
cue
(➜
page
49)
or
timer
(➜
55).
funkcijama
oznake
str.playback
49)
ili reprodukciju
s
cue
(➜
page mape
49)
or (→
timer
playback
(➜ page
page
55).
* folder
When
the playback
speed
is other
than
100%,
voice
*
the
playback
speed
is
other
than
100%,
voice
mjeračem
vremena
(→
str.
55).
* When
When
the
playback
speed
is
other
than
100%,
voice
emphasis (➜ page 44) does not work.
page
44)
not
●● emphasis
Ako brzina(➜
nije
uobičajena
naglašavanje
emphasis
(➜
page
44) does
does(100%),
not work.
work.
glasa ne radi (→ str. 44).
Playback
repeats
between
the
start
point
Playback
repeats
between
theare
start
point (A)
(A) and
and
završne
točke
(B)if ako
se te
točke
postave.
finish
point
(B)
those
points
set.
finish
point
(B)
ifif those
points
are
set.
finish
point
(B)
those
points
are
set.
Press
[ERASE/A-B&]
Pritisnite
[ERASE/A-B
]
1
Press
[ERASE/A-B&]
1
Press playing.
[ERASE/A-B&]
1 tijekom
reprodukcije.
while
while
playing.
while
playing.
Postavlja
početna
točka
(A),
The start se
point
(A) is set
and
2
2
2
The start
point
(A) is
and
point
is set
set
a“The
na start
zaslonu
se(A)
prikazuje
” (lighting)
and
“ ”and
““
”” (lighting)
and
“ ””
and
”(blinking)
”(lighting)
(svijetli)
i “ “” (treperi).
are
displayed.
(blinking)
(blinking) are
are displayed.
displayed.
Pritisnite
[ERASE/A-B at]
Press [ERASE/A-B&]
Press
[ERASE/A-B&]
at
Press
[ERASE/A-B&]
na
točki
(B). at
thezavršnoj
nish
point
(B).
the

nish
point
(B).
the

nish
point
(B).
Prikaz
na zaslonu
promijenit
će ”
The display
changes
to “
The
changes
to
”
Theu display
display
toi ““započet
se
“
”repeat
(svijetli)
(lighting)
andchanges
play
starts.”
(lighting)
and
play
(lighting)
and repeat
repeat
play starts.
starts.
će
ponavljanje
reprodukcije.
Cancelling
A-B
Repeat:
Cancelling
A-B
Repeat:
Cancelling
A-Bponavljanja
Repeat:
Poništavanje
od točke
A-B:
Press
[ERASE/A-B&],
g/RETURN].
u, i or [STOP
Press
[ERASE/A-B&],
[STOP
Press
[ERASE/A-B&],
or ili
[STOP
g/RETURN].
Pritisnite
[ERASE/A-B u
], ,, i
, or
[STOPg/RETURN].
■/RETURN].
u
i
* You cannot set A-B Repeat when the time between
*
You
cannot
set
A-B
Repeat
when
the
time
between
*
You
cannot
set
A-B
Repeat
when
the
time
between
●● the
Ponavljanje
točke
nije
moguće
start pointod(A)
and A-B
finish
point
(B) is postaviti
approx.
2ako
the
start
(A)
is
2
the
start point
point
(A) and
and finish
finish
point
(B)
is approx.
approx.
2 (B)
je vrijeme
početne
točke point
(A) do(B)
završne
točke
seconds
orod
less.
seconds
or
less.
seconds
less.
manjeonly
ili or
približno
* When
the
startjednako
point (A)2issekunde.
set and playback
*
the
start
point
(A)početna
is set
and
playback
*
When
only
the the
startend
point
setthe
and
playback
●● When
Kada only
je postavljena
samo
točka
(A) i the
continues
until
of (A)
the is
file,
end
becomes
continues
untilse
thenastavlja
end of
the
the
becomes
continues
the
file,
the end
end datoteke,
becomes the
the
reprodukcija
dofile,
završetka
finish
pointuntil
(B) the
andend
A-Bof
Repeat
begins.
finish
point
(B)
and
A-B
Repeat
begins.
point (B)
A-B
Repeat
begins.
završetak
postaje
završna
točka
(B) i započinje
* finish
A-B
Repeat
byand
setting
the
range
using
2 files is not
*
A-B
Repeat
by
setting
the
range
using
2
files
is
not
* A-B
Repeat by
the range using 2 files is not
ponavljanje
odsetting
točke A-B.
possible.
possible.
●● possible.
Ponavljanje od točke A-B na način da se raspon
postavi između dvije datoteke nije moguće.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
The
playback
speed
can
be
adjusted
in
steps
The
playback
speed
can
betimes
adjusted
in 21
21
steps
from
the
slow
speed
of
0.5
normal
speed
from
the
slow
speed
of
0.5
normal
speed
Brzinu
reprodukcije
podešava
setimes
pomoću
21 koraka,
od
from
the
slow
speed
of
0.5
times
normal
speed
(50%)
to
the
fast
speed
of
2
times
normal
speed
male
brzine
kojafast
je upola
manja
uobičajene
(50%)
do
(50%)
to
speed
of
normal
speed
(50%)
to the
the
fast
speed
of 2
2odtimes
times
normal
speed
(200%).
velike brzine koja je dvostruko veća od uobičajene (200%).
(200%).
(200%).
Press
[F1
(SPEED)]
1
[F1 [F1
(SPEED)]
Pritisnite
(SKIP)]
1
Press
(SPEED)]
1 Press
during[F1
playback.
during
playback.
tijekom
reprodukcije.
during[F1
playback.
Press
(SLOW)]
or [F2 (FAST)] to select
2
[F1
(SLOW)]
or
[F2
(FAST)]
select
2
Pritisnite
(SLOW)]
ili
[F2
(FAST)]to
biste
Press
[F1[F1
(SLOW)]
or[q
[F2
(FAST)]
toda
select
2 Press
the speed
and press
OK]
to enter.
the
speed
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
odabrali
brzinu
i
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
the speed and press [q OK] to enter.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Mijenjanje
brzine
Ponavljanje
od
točke A-B
Changing
the
playback
speed
A-B
Repeat
play
Changing
the
playback
speed
A-B
Repeat
play
Reprodukcija
će
se
ponoviti
između
početne
The
playback
speed
can
be
adjusted
in
21
steps
Playback repeats between the start
pointtočke
(A) (A)
andi
reprodukcije
39
39
39
39
39
Playback
from
specied
Reprodukcija
oda
određenog
Playback
from
a
speci
Playback
from
a
specied
ed
position
(TIMESEARCH)
SEARCH)
položaja (TIME
position
(TIME
Playback is possible
from theSEARCH)
time-specified
Reprodukcija je moguća od vremenski određenog položaja.
position.
Playback
Playback is
is possible
possible from
from the
the time-specified
time-specified
Uređajunit
prebacitethe
u stanje zaustavljanja
ili reprodukcije.
position.
•••Put
Put the
the unit into
into the stopped
stopped state
state or
or playback
playback state.
state.
position.
•• Put
the
unit
into
the
stopped state
or playback
state.
the
into
the
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press
[MENU].
•1Put
Put
the unit
unit
into
the stopped
stopped state
state or
or playback
playback state.
state.
(Kada
je
reprodukcija
u
tijeku,
prijeđite
na
korak
.)
(When
playback
is
in
progress,
go
to
step
3
(When playback
is in progress, go to step .)
.)
Press
[MENU].
1
Press
[MENU].
1
+,to- select
da
odabrali
"PLAY
Press
+,
–
“PLAY
MENU”
and
(When playback
playback
is in
inbiste
progress,
go
to step
step
.)
2 Pritisnite
(When
is
progress,
go
to
.)
3
(When playback is in progress, go to step 3 .)
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
MENU"
i zatim
[► OK] zaand
unos.
press
topritisnite
enter.
Press
+,
to
“PLAY
Press [q
+, –
–OK]
to select
select
“PLAY MENU”
MENU” and
Pritisnite
+,to- da
biste
odabrali
"TIME and
Press
+,
–
select
“TIME
SEARCH”
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
press [q OK] to enter.
SEARCH"
itozatim
pritisnite
[► OK] za unos.
press
to enter.
Press
+,
“TIME
Press [q
+, –
–OK]
to select
select
“TIME SEARCH”
SEARCH” and
and
Podesite
položaj
od
kojeg
Set
the[q
playback
start
press
OK]
press
[q
OK] to
to enter.
enter.
će
se
snimka
reproducirati.
position.
Set
playback
start
Set the
the položaj
playback
start se
(Početni
podešava
(Change
the
(Change
the value
value for
for “TIME”
“TIME” to
to
position.
position.
tako da se promijeni vrijednost
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
set
the
set
the start
start
position.)
(Change
the position.)
value for “TIME”
“TIME” to
(Change
the
(Change
the value
value for
for “TIME” to
to
za
"TIME").
set the
the start
start position.)
position.)
set
set the start position.)
5
5
5
Press
“00:00:00”
Press u,
u, i
i
to select
select
“00:00:00”
(hour:minute:
Pritisnite
, to
da biste
odabrali (hour:minute:
"00:00:00" (sat:
second)
and
press
+,
–
change
the
values.
second)
andi
press
+,zatim
– to
to“00:00:00”
change
the
values.
Press u,
u,
i
to te
select
“00:00:00”
(hour:minute:
minuta:
sekunda)
pritisnite
- da biste
Press
to
select
(hour:minute:
Press u, i to select “00:00:00” +,
(hour:minute:
Press
OK].
second)[q
and
press +,
+, – to
to change the
the values.
promijenili
vrijednosti.
second)
press
second) and
and
press +, –
– to change
change the values.
values.
Playback
from
Playback
starts
from the
the specified
specified position.
position.
Press
[qstarts
OK].
Pritisnite
[► OK].
Press
[q
OK].
Playback starts
starts
from the
theod
specified
position.
Playback
from
position.
Reprodukcija
započinje
odabranog
položaja.
Playback starts from the specified
specified
position.
Press [F2 (CLOSE)] to stop the setting
Pritisnite
[F2
(CLOSE)]
za prekidsetting
podešavanja.
process
Press
[F2midway.
(CLOSE)]
to
Press
[F2
(CLOSE)]
to stop
stop the
the setting
process
midway.
●
● Time
Reprodukciju
s pretragom
prema
moguće je
process
midway.
*
search
playback
applies
onlyvremenu
to the currently
* Time search playback applies only to the currently
primijeniti
samo
na trenutačno
odabranu
datoteku.
40 *
selected
file.
selected
file.
Time
search
playback
applies only
to the
currently
*
* Time
Time search
search playback
playback applies
applies only
only to
to the
the currently
currently
40
selected file.
4040
40
selected
selected file.
file.
40
40
40
40
Slight
return playback
Reprodukcija
samount of time
Slight
return
This
function returns
a shortplayback
Slight
return
playback
during playback to enable you to listen again. It is
vraćanjem malo unatrag
This
returns
a
of
time
during
playback
to enable
youamount
to listen
This function
function
returns
a short
short
amount
ofagain.
time It is
a
useful
function
for
language
learning,
or
if you
during
playback
to
enable
you
to
It
Ovom
se
funkcijomto
omogućuje
premotavanje
samo
during
playback
enable
you
to listen
listen again.
again.
It is
is
miss
hearing
something.
a
useful
function
for
language
learning,
or
you
malo
unatrag
radi
ponovnog
preslušavanja.
Ta
je
a useful function for language learning, or ififfunkcija
you
OK]jezika
during
playback.
korisna
kod[q
učenja
ili kada
vam nešto promakne.
1 Press
miss
hearing
something.
miss
hearing
something.
time
button
is
playback
Each
time
the
is pressed,
pressed,
playback rewinds
rewinds by
by
Press
[qthe
OK]
during
playback.
1 Each
Press
[q
OK]
during
playback.
Pritisnite
[►button
OK]
tijekom
reprodukcije.
1
approx.
3
(factory
setting).
approx.
3 seconds
seconds
(factory
setting).
Each time
time
the button
button
is pressed,
pressed,
playback rewinds
rewinds by
by
Each
the
is
playback
Each
the button
is pressed,
playback rewinds
by
Svaki time
put kada
pritisnete
gumb, reprodukcija
se vraća
approx. 3
3 seconds
seconds (factory
(factory setting).
setting).
approx.
approx.
približno33seconds
sekunde(factory
unatragsetting).
(tvornička postavka).
Setting the return time:
vremena
povratka:
••Postavljanje
Put
the
stopped
or
Setting
the
return
time:
Put the
the unit
unit
into
the
stopped
state
or playback
playback state.
state.
Setting
theinto
return
time:state
Put
the unit
unit
into the
the
stopped
state or
or playback
state.
Uređaj
prebacite
u stanje
zaustavljanja
ili reprodukcije.
••• •Put
the
into
stopped
state
state.
the unit
into the
stopped
state or playback
playback
state.
[MENU].
1PutPress
(When
playback
is
in
progress,
go
to
step
3
(When
playback
is in progress, go to step .)
.)
Press
[MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
1
Press
[MENU].
1
+,reprodukcija
– to select
MENU”
(When
playback
is in
in progress,
go
to step
step
.)
2 Press
(Kada je
u “PLAY
tijeku, prijeđite
na and
korak
.)
(When
playback
is
go
3
(When
playback
is in progress,
progress,
go to
to step
.)
3 .)
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
"PLAY
Press
+,
to
“PLAY
MENU”
and
press
[q
to enter.
Press
+, –
–OK]
to- select
select
“PLAY
MENU”
and
Press
+,i –zatim
to select
“SLIGHT
RETURN”
and
MENU"
[► OK]
za unos.
press
[q
OK]
topritisnite
enter.
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
press
[q–
OK]
tobiste
enter.
Pritisnite
da
odabrali
"SLIGHTand
Press
+,
to
“SLIGHT
RETURN”
Press
+,
–+,
to- select
select
“SLIGHT
RETURN”
and
Press
+,
to
select
the
RETURN"
i zatim
pritisnite
[► OK] za unos.
press
[q– OK]
OK]
to enter.
enter.
press
[q
to
number
seconds
(1 to 5)
Pritisnite
- select
da biste
Press
+,
–
to
the
Press
+, of
–+,
to
select
the
odabrali
broj
(1
number
of
seconds
to
5)
and
press
[qsekundi
OK] to(1
number
of
seconds
(1enter.
todo
5)
(The
factory
setting
is
sec”.)
5) i zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
(The
factory
setting
is “3
“3to
sec”.)
and
press
[q
OK]
enter.
and press [q OK] to enter.
(The
factory setting
setting is “3
“3 sec”.)
za unos.
(The
factory
(The
factory setting is
is “3 sec”.)
sec”.)
(Tvornička postavka je "3 sek.".)
To exit the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
To exit
the setting
press
(CLOSE)].
To
setting screen,
screen,
press [F2
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Za exit
izlazthe
iz zaslona
za postavljanje
pritisnite
[F2 (CLOSE)].
1
1
Press
[MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press
[MENU].
2
2
Press
+,
to
“PLAY
MENU”
and
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"PLAY
Press
+, –
–+,
to- select
select
“PLAY
MENU”
and
MENU"
press
[qi zatim
OK] to
topritisnite
enter. [► OK] za unos.
press
[q
OK]
enter.
Press
+,
to
“REPEAT”
press
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali and
"REPEAT"
Press
+, –
–+,
to- select
select
“REPEAT”
and
press i
zatim
[q
OK]pritisnite
to enter.
enter.[► OK] za unos.
[q
OK]
to
Press
+,
to
type
Pritisnite
da biste
Press
+, –
–+,
to- select
select
type
odabrali
of
Repeatvrstu
play ponavljanja
and press
press
of
Repeat
play
and
reprodukcije
i zatim
[q
[q OK]
OK] to
to enter.
enter.
pritisnite
OK]is
unos.
(The
factory
setting
“OFF”.)
(The
factory[►
setting
isza
“OFF”.)
3
3
4
4
(When
playback
is
go
3
(Kada je
reprodukcija
u tijeku, prijeđite
na korak
(When
playback
is in
in progress,
progress,
go to
to step
step
.)
3 .)
.)
(The factory setting is “OFF”.)
(Tvornička postavka je "OFF".)
Za
izlaz iz zaslona
za postavljanje
pritisnite
To
To exit
exit the
the setting
setting screen,
screen, press
press [F2
[F2 (CLOSE)].
(CLOSE)].
[F2 (CLOSE)].
indication
PokazateljRepeat
funkcije
ponavljanja
“
”: “ONE”
Repeat
indication
“
”: “ONE”
““
”:: "ONE"
“FOLDER REPEAT”
”: “FOLDER REPEAT”
““
”:: “FOLDER
“FOLDER RANDOM”
”: “FOLDERREPEAT”
RANDOM”
““
”:: “FOLDER
“ALL REPEAT”
RANDOM”
”: “ALL REPEAT”
““
”:: “ALL
“ALL RANDOM”
”: “ALLREPEAT”
RANDOM”
Nothing: “ALL
is
for
RANDOM”
Nothing
is displayed
displayed
for “OFF”.
“OFF”.
Ništa se ne prikazuje za "OFF".
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Uređaj
prebacite
u stanje
zaustavljanja
ili reprodukcije.
••Put
the unit
into the
stopped
state or playback
state.
• Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state.
OFF: Reprodukcija se uzastopno izvodi od
odabrane datoteke do posljednje datoteke u jednoj
mapi, a zatim se zaustavlja.
ONE: Omogućuje ponavljanje reprodukcije jedne
datoteke.
OFF:
Playback is performed in succession from the
OFF:
Playback
is performed
in succession
from the
FOLDER
REPEAT:
Omogućuje
ponavljanje
selected file to the last file in one folder, and then
selected
file tosvih
the datoteka
last file inuone
folder, and
then
reprodukcije
odabranoj
mapi.
playback stops.
playback
FOLDERstops.
RANDOM: Ponavlja reprodukciju svih
ONE: Plays one file repeatedly.
ONE:
Plays
filenasumičnim
repeatedly.redoslijedom.
datoteka
u one
mapi,
FOLDER
REPEAT:
Plays
files
the
FOLDER
REPEAT:
Plays all
all
files in
in(M)
theilifolder
folder
ALL REPEAT:
Za mape
MUSIC
OTHER
repeatedly.
repeatedly.
FOLDER ( ), ponavlja se reprodukcija svih
FOLDER RANDOM: Plays all files within the folder
FOLDER
within
the folder
datoteka*RANDOM:
u mapi. ZaPlays
drugealljefiles
mape
postupak
isti
repeatedly, in random order.
repeatedly,
in random
order.
kao i za "FOLDER
REPEAT".
ALL REPEAT: For the MUSIC (M) or OTHER
ALL
ForZathe
MUSIC
(M) or
ALLREPEAT:
RANDOM:
mape
MUSIC
(M)OTHER
i OTHER
½
FOLDER (
), all files½
within the folder are played
FOLDER
files within
the folder are
FOLDER( ( ),), all
ponavlja
se reprodukcija
svihplayed
repeatedly. For other folders, the operation is the
repeatedly.
other
the operation
is the
datoteka* uFor
mapi,
alifolders,
nasumičnim
redoslijedom.
same as that for “FOLDER REPEAT”.
same
as that
for “FOLDER
REPEAT”.
Za druge
je mape
postupak
isti kao i za "FOLDER
ALL
RANDOM:
ALL
RANDOM: For
For the
the MUSIC
MUSIC (M)
(M) or
or OTHER
OTHER
RANDOM".
FOLDER
((
), all files½
½ within the folder are played
FOLDER
),broj
all files
within
thejefolder
are played
* Maksimalni
datoteka
koje
moguće
repeatedly, in random order. For other folders,
prepoznati
iznosi 3000.
repeatedly,
in random
order. For other folders,
the operation is the same as that for “FOLDER
the operation is the same as that for “FOLDER
RANDOM”.
●● Kada
se odabere mogućnost “FOLDER RANDOM”
RANDOM”.
½
The maximum
recognised
files is 3,000.
ili½
“ALL
RANDOM”number
kada jeof
ponavljanje
The maximum
number
ofuključeno
recognised
files is 3,000.
reprodukcije, nije moguće preskakanje na prethodnu
* When
“FOLDER
RANDOM”
or
“ALL
RANDOM”
is
datoteku
tijekomRANDOM”
reprodukcije.
* When
“FOLDER
or “ALL RANDOM” is
selected in Repeat play, it is not possible to skip to the
selected in Repeat play, it is not possible to skip to the
previous file during playback.
previous file during playback.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Ponavljanje
reprodukcije
(REPEAT)
Repeat
Repeat play
play (REPEAT)
(REPEAT)
41
41
41
41
41
41
Preskakanje
u pravilnim
intervalima
Skip at regular
intervals
(TIME (TIME
SKIP)SKIP)
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
Skip
Skip at
at regular
regular intervals
intervals (TIME
(TIME SKIP)
SKIP)
Skip at regular intervals (TIME SKIP)
Skip at regular intervals (TIME SKIP)
Ovom
se funkcijom
preskače
postavljeno
pomoću
postupka
This function
skips tijekom
the set reprodukcije
time using skip
operation
(➜ pagevrijeme
17) during
playback.
preskakanja
(→
str.
17).
Namove
taj je using
način
moguće
brzo
prebacivanje
položaj
od kojeg
This
skips
the set
time
skip
operation
(➜ page
17)naduring
playback.
This function
allows you
to quickly
to a position
for
playback,
or repeat
playback
of the
This
skips
the setmove
time
skip
(➜
page
17) during
playback.
želite
pokrenuti
ili nausing
položaj
za operation
ponovljenu
reprodukciju
istog
dijela
datoteke.
This function
allows
you
to
quickly
to
a position
for playback,
or repeat
playback
of the
same
portion
inreprodukciju
a file.
This
function
skips
the
set
time
using
skip
operation
(➜
page
17)
during
playback.
allows
you
to
quickly
move
to
a
position
for
playback,
or
repeat
playback
of the
same portion in a file.
same
portion
in
a
file.
This
allows
you touquickly
move to a position for
or
repeat
playback
of the
Skip
at regular
intervals
Toplayback,
change
the
skip
interval
Preskakanje
pravilnim
Promjena
intervala
preskakanja
This
function
skips
the
set time using skip operation
(➜ pagethe
17) during
playback.
Skip
at regular
intervals
To change
skip interval
same
portion
in a file.
intervalima
Press
[q
OK]
for
approx.
1
second
Skip
at
regular
intervals
To
change
the
skip
interval
•
Put
the
unit
into
the
stopped
state
or
playback
This
allows
you
to
quickly
move
to
a
position
for
playback,
or
repeat
playback
of thestate.
1
• Uređaj prebacite u stanje zaustavljanja
ili
Press
OK]
for
approx. 1 second
•To
Put
the unit into the
stopped
stateinterval
or playback state.
1Skip
at [q
regular
intervals
change
the
skip
same
portion
in a file.
reprodukcije.
or
more
during
playback.
•1Put
PutPress
the unit
unit[MENU].
into the
the stopped
stopped state
state or
or playback
playback state.
state.
Držite
[►
OK]
približno
1
sekundu
[q
OK]
for
approx.
1
second
•
the
into
1 Press
or more
The
mode during
switchesplayback.
to time skip mode and
Press
[MENU].
(When
playback
is inskip
progress,
to stepstate.
3 .)
Press
[q
OK] for
approx.
second
•1
PutPritisnite
the unit
into[MENU].
the
stopped
stateinterval
orgo
playback
ili duže
tijekom
reprodukcije.
1Skip
regular
intervals
change
the
or
during
playback.
mode
switches
to
time skip1mode
and
“Themore
”at
is displayed.
Press
[MENU].
1To(Kada
(When
playback
in progress,
to stepna3 .)
je
u “PLAY
tijeku,go
prijeđite
The
mode
switches
to
Način
rada
mijenja
se
Press
+,reprodukcija
– to is
select
MENU”
The
switchesplayback.
to time
time skip
skip mode
mode and
and
more
during
2
“or
”mode
is displayed.
(When
playback
is
in
progress,
go
to
step
3 .)
The
skip
mode
(When
playback
is
in progress,
to stepstate.
.)
Press
[MENU].
.)– the
[q
OK] fortoapprox.
1 second
•1
the unit
into
state
orgo
playback
Press
+,
to
select
“PLAY
MENU”
1 “Press
””mode
is
u način
za
preskakanje
2Putkorak
“switches
is displayed.
displayed.
The
switches
and
press
[qstopped
OK]
to
enter.
The
skip
mode
each
time thetime skip mode and
(When
playback
is
in
progress,
go
to
step
3 .)
Press
+,
–
to
select
“PLAY
MENU”
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
2
or
more
during
playback.
te
se
prikazuje
oznaka
The”skip
skip
mode
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
“The
is
displayed.
mode
switches
each
time
the
+,
–
to
select
“TIME
SKIP”
Press
[MENU].
button is pressed.
3 "PLAY
1
Press
+,
– to
MENU”
MENU"
i zatim
pritisnite
[►
2
and
press
[qselect
OK]
to“PLAY
enter.
The
mode
switches
to time skip mode and
“
“. is
Način
za
switches
each
time the
the
switches
each
time
The
skip
mode
Press
+,
– to
select
“TIME
button
pressed.
3 OK]
(When
is
in progress,
goSKIP”
to step 3 .)
and
press
[q
OK]
enter.
zaplayback
unos.
and
press
[qselect
OK] to
to“TIME
enter.SKIP”
“switches
preskakanje
mijenja
” isis
button
isdisplayed.
pressed.
Press
+,
–
to
button
pressed.
each
time the
3
and press
[qselect
OK] to“PLAY
enter. MENU”
Press
+, – to
2
4 Pritisnite
se svaki
kada
The
skip
mode
Press
+, +,
– -to
daselect
bisteto“TIME
button
is put
pressed.
3
and
press
[q
OK]
enter.SKIP”
Press
+,
– time
to
4 odabrali
and
press
[q SKIP"
OK] to enter.
select
the
pritisneteeach
gumb.
switches
time the
"TIME
Press
+,
–
to
and press [q OK] to enter.
4
select
the
Press
+,
– time
to
button isu,
pressed.
press
[qselect
OK] “TIME SKIP”
3
zatim
pritisnite
i.
Press
+,
– time
to
2 Press
4 iand
select
the
and
press
[q
OK] to enter.
Presstime
u,
to
enter.
2 Each
thei.
button is pressed, 5 seconds
[►
OK]
za
unos.
select
the
time
and
press
[q
OK]
Pritisnite
,
2 Press
u,
i.
to enter.
Each
time
the
button
is .pressed, 5 seconds
Press
+, –+,to
are
skipped
(factory
setting).
Pritisnite
da
4
Svaki
put
kada
pritisnete
gumb,
snimka
će
and
press
[q
OK]
Each
time
the
button
is
pressed,
5
seconds
to
enter.
Each
time
the
button
is
pressed,
5
seconds
Press
u,
i.
2 When
are skipped
(factory
setting).the mode
You can
set the
skip
interval
to 5 sec,
10 sec,
playback
is stopped,
select
the
time
biste
odabrali
vrijeme
i zatim
pritisnite
preskočiti
pet
sekundi
(tvornička
postavka).
are
skipped
(factory
setting).
to
enter.
are
skipped
(factory
setting).
Each
time
the
button
ismode.
pressed,
5 seconds
Yousec,
can1set
the5 skip
interval
sec,
10 sec,
When
playback
isskip
stopped,
the mode
30
min,
min,
10 min,toor515
min.
returns
to
the
file
[►
OK]
za
unos.
and
press
[q
OK]
You
can
set
the
skip
interval
to
5
sec,
10 sec,
sec,
Kada
se
reprodukcija
zaustavi,
način
se
When
playback
is
stopped,
the
mode
Press
u,
i.
You
can
set
the
skip
interval
to
5
sec,
10
2 returns
When
playback
stopped,
are
skipped
setting).
30 sec,
1 min,setting
5 min,is10“5sec”.)
min, or 15 min.
to the(factory
fileisskip
mode.the mode
(The
factory
Interval
preskakanja
možete
postaviti
nasec,
5
30
sec,
1
min,
5
min,
10
min,
or
15
min.
vraća
u
način
za
preskakanje
datoteke.
to
enter.
returns
to
the
file
skip
mode.
Each
time
the
button
is
pressed,
5
seconds
30
sec,
1
min,
5
min,
10
min,
or
15
min.
You
can
set
the
skip
interval
to
5
sec,
10
returnsplayback
to the fileisskip
mode.the mode
When
stopped,
(The factory setting is “5sec”.)
sek.,
101sek.,
30
sek.,
1 min,
min,press
5 min,
10 min,
(The
factory
is
To exit
the
setting
screen,
are
skipped
(The
factory
setting
is10“5sec”.)
“5sec”.)
30
sec,
min,setting
5 min,
or
15 min.
returns
to the(factory
file skipsetting).
mode.
ili
15can
min.
(Tvornička
postavka
"5 sek.")
To
the
setting
press
You
set
the
skipscreen,
interval
to
5jesec,
10 sec,
When playback is stopped, the mode
(The
factory
setting
is
“5sec”.)
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
30
sec,iz1zaslona
min, 5 min,
min, or 15 min.
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Za izlaz
za10postavljanje
returns to the file skip mode.
To
exit
setting
screen,
* If the beginning of a file or the index point is present
at
thethe
position
closer
than
thepress
set skip
[F2
(CLOSE)].
(The
factory
setting
is
“5sec”.)
pritisnite
[F2
(CLOSE)].
* interval,
If the beginning
of a file
or the
indexapoint
is present
the position closer than the set skip
the playback
skips
to such
position.
[F2at(CLOSE)].
*
If
the
beginning
of
a
file
or
the
index
point
is
present
at
the
position
closer
than
the
set
*● If
these
beginning
of
a file
orilithe
index
point
is present
position
closer
than
thepress
set skip
skip
To at
exit
the
setting
screen,
interval,
the playback
skips
to
such
position.
●
Ako
početak
datoteke
točka
sa
indeksom
nalaze
nathe
bližem
položaju
od
podešenog
intervala
interval,
the playback
playback
skips
to such
such
apoint
position.
interval,
the
skips
to
a
position.
* If
the
beginning
of
a
file
or
the
index
is
present
at
the
position
closer
than
the
set skip
[F2
(CLOSE)].
preskakanja, reprodukcija će preskočiti do tog mjesta.
42
4242 interval, the playback skips to such a position.
4242 * If the beginning of a file or the index point is present at the position closer than the set skip
4242
42
interval, the playback skips to such a position.
4242
MENU
MENU
MENU F2
MENU
MENU
F2
MENU F2
F2
F2
MENU
F2
Shadowing is a learning method to repeat an example immediately after it is heard.
You can use the shadowing function of this unit to alternately repeat the A-B repeat section (example)
and a no-sound or small-volume section (practice). This is convenient for pronunciation or listening
practice
for language
learning.
Shadowing
is
method
to
after
heard.
Paralelno ponavljanje
metoda
je učenja
kojaan
se example
sastoji odimmediately
ponavljanja primjera
nakon slušanja.
Shadowing
is a
a learning
learning
method
to repeat
repeat
an
example
immediately
after ititit is
isneposredno
heard.
Shadowing
is
a
learning
method
to
repeat
an
example
immediately
after
is
heard.
To
exit
the
setting
screen,
press
[F2(example)
(CLOSE)].
You
can
use
the
shadowing
function
of
unit
alternately
repeat
A-B
repeat
section
Funkciju
paralelnog
ponavljanja
na ovom
koristiti
za the
naizmjenično
ponavljanje
dijela
You
can use
the shadowing
function
of this
thisuređaju
unit to
to možete
alternately
repeat
the
A-B
repeat
section
(example)
You
can
use
the
shadowing
function
of
this
unit
to
alternately
repeat
the
A-B
repeat
section
(example)
and
a
no-sound
or
small-volume
section
(practice).
This
is
convenient
for
pronunciation
or
od točke
A-B (primjer)
i dijela bezsection
zvuka ili
tihog dijela
(vježba).
Ovo jefor
prikladno
za vježbe
izgovora
i
and
a no-sound
or small-volume
(practice).
This
is convenient
pronunciation
or listening
listening
and
a
no-sound
or
small-volume
section
(practice).
This
is
convenient
for
pronunciation
or
listening
Practice
Example
practice
for
language
learning.
slušanja
prilikom
učenja
jezika.
practice
language
learning.
“
”is displayed.
practice for
for
language
learning.
To
setting
press
(CLOSE)].
To
exit
the
setting screen,
screen,
press [F2
[F2
(CLOSE)].
Za exit
izlazthe
iz zaslona
za postavljanje
pritisnite
No-sound or small-volume
A-B repeat section
To exit the setting screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
section
[F2 (CLOSE)].
Repeat
Shadowing
Paralelno ponavljanje
Shadowing
Practice
Practice
Vježba
Practice
Practice
No-sound
or
A-B
repeat
section
No-soundsection
or small-volume
small-volume
A-Bshadowing:
repeat
section
točke A-B
Setting
section
Repeat
section
Repeat
section
Ponavljanje
Repeat
Press
[MENU].
Repeat
1
•••Put
the
into
stopped
state
or
playback
Uređaj
prebacite
uisstanje
zaustavljanja
ili reprodukcije.
(When
playback
in progress,
step
.)
3 state.
Put
the unit
unit
into the
the
stopped
statego
orto
playback
state.
•• Put
Put the
the unit
unit into
into the
the stopped
stopped state
state or
or playback
playback state.
state.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“PLAY
MENU”
and
Postavljanje
paralelnog
ponavljanja:
2
Setting
shadowing:
Setting
shadowing:
Setting
shadowing:
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press
[MENU].
1
Press
[MENU].
1
Press
[MENU].
1
(Kada jeplayback
u tijeku,
prijeđite
na korak
.)
Press
+,reprodukcija
– to select
“SHADOWING”
(When
playback
is in
in progress,
progress,
go to
to step
step
.)
3and
3 (When
is
go
3
(When
playback
is
progress,
go
to
.)
3 .)
(When
playback
is
inenter.
progress,
go
to step
step
.)
Pritisnite
+,
- select
da
biste
odabrali
"PLAY
press
[q
OK]
toin
Press
+,
–
to
“PLAY
MENU”
and
2
Press
+,
–
to
select
“PLAY
MENU”
and
2
Press
+,
to
“PLAY
2
MENU"
OK] zaand
unos.
+,i –
–zatim
to select
select
the [►MENU”
press
[q
OK]
topritisnite
enter.
4 Press
press
[q
OK]
to
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
type
of
shadowing
and
Press
+,
–
to
select
“SHADOWING”
and
3
Press +,
“SHADOWING”
and
3
+, –
– to
to select
select
“SHADOWING”
"SHADOWING"
ponavlj.)and
i zatim
3 Press
press
[q OK]
OK] to
to (Paralelno
enter.
press
[q
enter.
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
If
you
select
“ON
(small
volume)”,
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
4
Press
+,
–
to
the
4
Pritisnite
+,
- select
da
biste
Press
+,shadowing
–will
tobe
select
the
4 the
volume
approximately
type
of
and
type
of
shadowing
and
odabrali
vrstu
paralelnog
type
shadowing
and
a
thirdof
of the
current
volume
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
press
[q
to
ponavljanja
i zatim
during
shadowing.
press
[q OK]
OK]
to enter.
enter.
If
you
“ON
(small
volume)”,
Ifpritisnite
you select
select [►
“ON
(small
volume)”,
OK]
unos.
(The
setting
isza
“OFF”.)
If youfactory
select “ON
(small
volume)”,
If you
selectwill
“ON
(small volume)”,
the
be
the
volume
will“ON
be approximately
approximately
Akovolume
odaberete
(small volume)”,
the
volume
will
be
approximately
the
volume
will
be paralelnog
approximately
a
third
current
volume
tijekom
aglasnoća
third of
of the
the
current
volume
a
third
of
the
current
volume
a
third
of
the
current
volume
during
shadowing.
ponavljanja
iznosit će
približno
during
shadowing.
during
shadowing.
during
shadowing.
(The
factory
settingglasnoće.
is “OFF”.)
“OFF”.)
trećinu
trenutačne
(The
factory
setting
is
(The
factory
setting
is
“OFF”.)
(The
factorypostavka
setting isje“OFF”.)
(Tvornička
"OFF".)
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 43
”issedisplayed.
displayed.
Prikazuje
“
".
““
”is
““
”is
”is displayed.
displayed.
Using shadowing function:
A-B
repeat playback (➜ page 39)
Korištenje
funkcije
1 Perform
Shadowing
is ponavljanja:
performed using no-sound or smallparalelnog
volume
after
A-B repeat
playback.
Using
shadowing
function:
Izvršite
ponavljanje
Using
shadowing
function:
Using
shadowingod
function:
reprodukcije
točke
A-B (→(➜
str.page
39) 39)
Perform
A-B
repeat
playback
1
Perform A-B
A-B repeat
repeat playback
playback
(➜
page
39)
1
(➜
page
39)
during shadowing.
1 Perform
U paralelnomBlinks
reprodukcije
Shadowing
is
performed
using
no-sound
smallShadowing
isponavljanju
performednakon
usingponavljanja
no-sound or
or
smallShadowing
performed
using
no-sound
or
Shadowing
isA-B
performed
using
no-sound
or smallsmallod točkeafter
A-Bis
slijedi
dio bez
zvuka
ili tihi dio.
volume
repeat
playback.
volume
after
A-B
repeat
playback.
volume
volume after
after A-B
A-B repeat
repeat playback.
playback.
during
shadowing.
Treperi tijekomBlinks
paralelnog
Blinks
duringponavljanja
shadowing.
Blinks
Blinks during
during shadowing.
shadowing.
Adjusting
theglasnoće
volume for
shadowing:
Podešavanje
tijekom
You can adjust the volume of just the shadowing portion
paralelnog ponavljanja:
separately from the A-B repeat playback portion.
Možete posebno podesiti glasnoću
•dijela
If A-B
repeat
is canceled
or theashadowing
setting is
koji
sethe
paralelno
ponavlja,
posebno dio
Adjusting
volume
for
shadowing:
Adjusting
the
volume
for
shadowing:
changed during
playback,
theshadowing:
volume of the shadowing
Adjusting
the
volume
for
ponavljanja
od
točke
A-B. of
You
can
adjust
the
volume
just
the
shadowing
You
can adjust
the volume
just the
shadowing portion
portion
istijekom
returned
to the of
original
setting.
You
canse
adjust
thereprodukcije
volume
of
just
the
shadowing
portion
• portion
Ako
poništi
ponavljanje
You
can
adjust
the
volume
of
just
the
shadowing
portion
separately
separately from
from the
the A-B
A-B repeat
repeat playback
playback portion.
portion.
from
repeat
playback
portion.
od
točke
A-Bisthe
ilicanceled
seA-B
promijeni
postavka
paralelnog
separately
from
the
A-B
repeat
playback
portion.
•separately
If
A-B
repeat
or
the
shadowing
setting
is
• Ifponavljanja,
A-B repeat isglasnoća
canceleddijela
or the
shadowing
setting
is
koji
se paralelno
ponavlja
•• If
A-B
is
or
the
shadowing
setting
is
If
A-B repeat
repeat
is canceled
canceled
orthe
the
shadowing
setting
is
changed
during
playback,
volume
of
the
shadowing
changed
during
playback,
the
volume
of
the
shadowing
vraća se
na izvornu
postavku.
changed
during
playback,
the
of
changed
during
playback,
the volume
volume
of the
the shadowing
shadowing
portion
is
returned
to
the
original
setting.
portion is returned to the original setting.
portion
portion is
is returned
returned to
to the
the original
original setting.
setting.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81 VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Example
Example
Primjer
Example
Example
• Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state.
No-sound
or small-volume
small-volume
A-B repeat
repeat section
section
Ponavljanje
dijela od
Dio bez zvuka
ili tihi dio
No-sound
or
A-B
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Shadowing
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
2012/05/29 9:35:46
Naglašavanje
glasa
(VOICE
EMPHASIS)
Making
sound
easier
to
(VOICE
EMPHASIS)
Making
easier
to hear
hear
(VOICE
Ovom funkcijom sound
smanjuju se šumovi
tijekom reprodukcije
da bi
se ciljani zvuk EMPHASIS)
bolje čuo te se
This function makes the target sound easier to hear by reducing noise during playback and partially
This function
makes the
targetispred
sounduređaja
easier ili
toshear
byilireducing
noise during playback and partially
djelomično
naglašava
stereo
lijeve
desne strane.
emphasising the stereo sound at the front, left, or right.
emphasising the stereo sound at the front, left, or right.
Uređaj
prebacite
u stanje
zaustavljanja
ili reprodukcije.
••Put
the unit
into the
stopped
state or playback
state.
• Put the unit into the stopped state or playback state.
1
1
2
2
Press [MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press [MENU].
(Whenjeplayback
is in progress,
go to step
3 .)
(Kada
reprodukcija
u tijeku, prijeđite
na korak
(When playback
is in progress,
go to step
3 .)
.)
Press +, –+,to- select
“PLAY
MENU”
and
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"PLAY
Press +, – to select
“PLAY
MENU”
and
MENU"
i zatim
press [q
OK] topritisnite
enter. [► OK] za unos.
press [q OK] to enter.
Press +, –
select
Pritisnite
+,to
- da
biste“VOICE
odabraliEMPHASIS”
"VOICE
Press +, –
to
select
“VOICE
EMPHASIS”
EMPHASIS"
i zatim
pritisnite
and press [q
OK] to
enter. [► OK] za unos.
and press [q OK] to enter.
Press +, –+,to- select
the
Pritisnite
da
Press +, – to select
the
biste
odabrali
vrstu
type of
voice emphasis
type of voice emphasis
naglašavanja
glasatoi enter.
zatim
and press [q OK]
and press[►
[qOK]
OK]za
to enter.
pritisnite
(The factory setting
is unos.
3
3
4
4
(The factorypostavka
setting isje
(Tvornička
“NORMAL”.)
“NORMAL”.)
"NORMAL".)
Za izlaz iz zaslona za
To
exit the setting
screen,
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
postavljanje
pritisnite
[F2 (CLOSE)].
To
exit the setting
screen,
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
“
44
44
4444
44
44
“: “NOISE CXL L”,
”: “NOISE CXL L”,
”: “NOISE CXL H”
L”,
“NOISE CXL H”
“NOISE CXL
H”
“ “ “:”: “FOCUS
“FOCUS FRONT”,
FRONT”,
“ ”: “FOCUS LEFT”,
FRONT”,
“FOCUS LEFT”,
“FOCUS RIGHT”
LEFT”,
“FOCUS RIGHT”
“FOCUS
RIGHT”
NištaNothing
se ne
prikazuje
za for
is displayed
Nothing is displayed for
NORMAL.
“NORMAL”.
Pokazatelj
vrste
naglašavanja
The
setpostavljenog
voice emphasis
indication
“NORMAL”.
The set voice emphasis indication
“
“
glasa prikazuje
samo tijekom
reprodukcije.
is onlysedisplayed
during
playback.
is only displayed during playback.
NORMAL: Plays
Zvuk se
reproducira
onako
kako je snimljen.
NORMAL:
sound
as it was
recorded.
NORMAL:
Plays
sound as
itmalo
was smanjuju.
recorded.
NOISECXL
CXL
L:Performs
Šumovi
se
NOISE
L:
a small
amount of noise
NOISE
CXL
L:
Performs
a
small
amount
of noise
NOISE CXL H: Šumovi se znatno smanjuju.
reduction.
reduction.
FOCUSCXL
FRONT:
Naglašava
se zvuk
ispred
uređaja.
NOISE
H: Performs
a large
amount
of noise
NOISE
H: Performs
a large
amount
of noise
FOCUSCXL
LEFT:
Naglašava
se zvuk
koji dolazi
s
reduction.
reduction.
lijeve strane
uređaja.
FOCUS
FRONT:
Emphasises the sound at the front.
FOCUS
Emphasises
sound at
the front.
FOCUSFRONT:
RIGHT:
Naglašavathe
sethe
zvuk
FOCUS
LEFT:
Emphasises
soundkoji
at dolazi
the left.s
FOCUS
LEFT:uređaja.
Emphasises the sound at the left.
desne strane
FOCUS
RIGHT: Emphasises the sound at the right.
FOCUS RIGHT: Emphasises the sound at the right.
●● Ovisno o izvoru zvuka, moguće je da rezultat neće biti
* The result may not be sufficient depending on the
* The
result may not be sufficient depending on the
zadovoljavajući.)
sound source.
source.
●● sound
Funkcija
naglašavanja glasa neće raditi u sljedećim
* Voice emphasis will not work in the following cases.
* Voice
emphasis will not work in the following cases.
slučajevima.
• During fast/slow playback (➜ page 39)
••During
fast/slow
playback (➜reprodukcije
page 39) (→ str. 39)
Tijekom
ubrzane/usporene
• During WMA file playback
••During
WMA
file playback
Tijekom
reprodukcije
WMA-datoteke
• During playback of a file with a sampling frequency
Tijekom
reprodukcije
datoteke
s frekvencijom
••During
playback
of a file
with a sampling
frequency
of less than 16 kHz
ofuzorkovanja
less than 16nižom
kHz od 16 kHz
• When “FOCUS FRONT”, “FOCUS LEFT”, or
Kada“FOCUS
se za reprodukciju
datotekeLEFT”,
snimljene
••When
FRONT”, “FOCUS
or
“FOCUS RIGHT” is selected for playback of a file
s položajem
mikrofona
ZOOM
monotičke
“FOCUS
RIGHT”
is selected
for ili
playback
of a file
recorded with the microphone position set to ZOOM
audiodatoteke
mogućnosti
recorded
with theodaberu
microphone
position“FOCUS
set to ZOOM
or a monaural audio file
“FOCUS
ili “FOCUS RIGHT”.
orFRONT”,
a monaural
audio LEFT”,
file
The
EQ includes
6 razinu
types
mode
andpojedinačnom
the “USER”
with
which pojasu.
you
set the volume
Using
themoguće
sound
EQ
enables
youof
tofixed
set bass,
middle
treblemode
range
of volume
levelcan
according
to your
kojegsound
je
postaviti
glasnoće
prema
frekvencijskom
The
sound
EQ includes
6 types
of
fixed
mode
and theand
“USER”
mode
with
which you
can
set the volume
level
according
to each
frequency band.
preferred
settings
for playback.
level
according
to
each
frequency
band.
Ekvalizator
zvuka
učinkovit
jeofsamo
kada
se
slušalice.
The
sound
includes
6 types
fixed mode
andkoriste
the
mode with which you can set the volume
The
soundEQ
EQ
is effective
only
when
listening
with“USER”
the
earphones.
The according
sound EQtoiseach
effective
only band.
when listening with the earphones.
level
frequency

Nakon
što settings
podesitefor
postavke
za promjenu
Whe
n
the
band
•••Put
the
unit
into
the
stopped
state
or
playback
state.
n the
the
settings
for
the frequency
frequency
band to
to
Uređaj
prebacite
u stanje
zaustavljanja
ili reprodukcije.
3
Put
the
into
stopped
state
or
state.
•The
Put
the unit
unit
into
the
stopped
state
or playback
playback
state.
3 change
Whe
n
the
settings
for
the
frequency
band
to
sound
EQ the
is effective
only
when listening
with the
earphones.
frekvencijskog
pojasa
prijeđite
na korak
are
go
5 ... 5 .
change
are all
all complete,
complete,
go to
to step
step
change
are
all
complete,
go
to
step
Press
[MENU].
5
1
Pritisnite
[MENU].
Press
[MENU].
Press
OK]
to enter.
n the
settings
for unos.
the frequency band to
3 Whe[q
•1Put
the unit
into
theisstopped
statego
orto
playback
5
[►
OK]
za
(When
playback
in progress,
step 3 state.
.)
Press
[q
OK]
to enter.
(When
playback
is
go
5 Pritisnite
(Kada je
reprodukcija
u tijeku, prijeđite
na korak
.)
(When
playback
is in
in progress,
progress,
go to
to step
step
.)
3 .)
change
all complete,
go to step 5 .pritisnite
Za
izlazthe
izare
zaslona
za postavljanje
To
exit
setting
screen,
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
Press
+,
–
to
select
“PLAY
MENU”
and
[MENU].
2
1
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"PLAY
To
exit
theOK]
setting
screen, press [F2 (CLOSE)].
+, –+,to- select
“PLAY
MENU”
and
2 Press
Press
[q
to enter.
5
[F2
(CLOSE)].
(When
playback
is
in
progress,
go
to
step
.)
3
press
[qi zatim
OK] topritisnite
enter. [► OK] za unos.
The
selected
sound
EQ
The
selected
sound
EQ
MENU"
press [q OK] to enter.
selected
EQ
Prikazuje
sesound
odabrani
mode
is displayed.
To exit theThe
setting
screen,
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
“PLAY
MENU”
andpress
mode
Press +, –+,to- select
“SOUND
EQ”
and
2
mode is
is displayed.
displayed.
da biste
odabrali
"SOUND
3
Press +, – to select
“SOUND
EQ”
and press
način ekvalizatora zvuka.
3 Pritisnite
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
The
selected
sound
EQ
[q
OK]
to enter.
EQ"
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
[q OK] to enter.
mode is displayed.
“SOUND
EQ”
and
press
Pritisnite
za odabir
načina
ekvalizatora
Press
+, –+,to- select
the sound
EQ
mode.
3
4
+, – to select the sound EQ mode.
4 Press
Način rada EQ
Efekt i primjena
Press
[F1
(CONFIRM)]
to
confirm
the
details.
Press
zvuka
(EQ).
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press [F1
[F1 (CONFIRM)]
(CONFIRM)] to
to confirm
confirm the
the details.
details. Press
Press
EQ mode
mode
Effect and
and application
application
Press
EQ
Effect
Da
biste
detalje,
pritisnite
[F1
(CONFIRM)].
EQ
mode
andekvalizatora
application
again
to
return
to
previous
screen.
FLAT
Ne
koristiEffect
se funkcija
zvuka. Čut ćete
[F1]
again
to to
return
to the
the
previous
screen.
Press
+,potvrdili
–
select
the
sound
EQ
mode.
4 [F1]
The
sound
equalizer
function
is
not
[F1]
again
to
return
to
the
previous
screen.
The samo
sound
equalizer
function
is promjena.
not used.
used. You
You
Da
biste
se
vratili
na
prethodni
zaslon,
ponovno
FLAT
The
sound
equalizer
function
is
not
used.
You
originalni
zvuk,
bez
ikakvih
When
you
select
modes
other
than
“USER”,
go
to
step
.
5 ..
FLAT
When
you
modes
other
than
“USER”,
go
to
step
Press
[F1select
(CONFIRM)]
to confirm
the details.
Press
When
you
select
modes
other
than
“USER”,
go
to
step
hear
the
original
sound
without
any
FLAT
EQ mode hear
Effectsound
and application
5
hear the
the original
original
sound
without any
any change.
change.
pritisnite [F1].
without
change.
Setting
selecting
“USER”:
[F1]
againwhen
to return
to the previous
screen.
BASS
Snažno
naglašavanje
raspona
basa.
Kada
odaberete
koji drugi
način osim "USER",
The
sound equalizer
function
is not used. You
Setting
when bilo
selecting
“USER”:
BASS
Emphasise
the
bass range
strongly.
BASS
Emphasise
the
strongly.
FLAT
BASS
Emphasisenaglašavanje
the bass
bass range
range
strongly.
When
you
select5modes
other than “USER”, go to step 5 .
step
,, press
1 After
idite
na
korak
.
CLEAR
visokih
tonova.
After
step
hearSnažno
the original
sound
without
any change.
After
step 4
, press
press
CLEAR
Emphasise
the
treble
range
strongly.
4
1
CLEAR
Emphasise
the
treble
range
strongly.
CLEAR
Emphasise
the
treble
range
strongly.
Setting
when
“USER”:
[F1
(EDIT)].
Postavka
kadaselecting
odaberete
"USER":
[F1
[F1 (EDIT)].
(EDIT)].
HEAVY
Lagano naglašavanje
raspona
basaranges
i visokihslightly.
tonova.
BASS
Emphasise
the bass
bass and
range
strongly.
HEAVY
Emphasise
the
treble
HEAVY
Emphasise
the
bass
and
treble
ranges

koraka
,ispritisnite
150
Hz
selected.
HEAVY Emphasise the bass and treble ranges slightly.
slightly.
After step
press
4 ,band
150
1 Nakon
150 Hz
Hz band
band is
is selected.
selected.
CLEAR
Emphasise
range zvuka.
strongly.
SOFT
Naglašavathe
se treble
srednji raspon
[F1
[F1 (EDIT)].
(EDIT)].
Bira se frekvencijski
pojas
150 Hz.
150 Hz band
isod
selected.
 Da biste odabrali
pojas select
koji želite frequency band to
Press
i
2 frekvencijski
Press u,
u, pritisnite
i to
to select
select, the
the, frequency
frequency band
band to
to
Press
u,
i
to
the
2 promijeniti,
change,
and
press
+,
change,
and
pressglasnoću
+, –
– to
to adjust
adjust the
the volume
volume level
level
achange,
da bisteand
podesili
press
+,
–
to
adjust
the
volume
level
(±6
dB).
(±6
dB).
Press
u,
i to+,select
the frequency band to
2 (±6
dB)
pritisnite
-.
(±6
dB).
change, and press +, – to adjust the volume level
(±6 dB).
SOFT
SOFT
SOFT
HEAVY
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
SOFT
USER
USER
USER
USER
VOICE
Emphasise
the middle
range.
Emphasise
Emphasise the
the middle
middle range.
range.
Emphasise
the
bass
and
ranges
Smanjenje
buke
da bi
se treble
ljudski
glas
boljeslightly.
čuo.
Reduce
noise
make
human
voice
easily
heard.
Reduce
noise to
to
make
human
voice
easily
heard.
Reduce
noise
to
make
human
voice
easily
heard.
Emphasise
the
middle
range.
rada adjustment
omogućava
podešavanje
This Ovaj
modenačin
enables
adjustment
of frequency
frequency bands
bands
This
mode
enables
of
This frekvencijskih
mode enables
adjustment
of
frequency
bands
pojasa
od44150
Hz,
50012
Hz,
1 heard.
kHz,
Reduce
noise
to
make
human
voice
easily
of
150 Hz,
500
Hz,
11 kHz,
kHz
and
kHz.
of
Hz,
500
Hz,
kHz,
kHz
and
12
kHz.
of 150
150
Hz,
500
Hz,
1
kHz,
4
kHz
and
12
kHz.
kHz i enables
12 kHz. adjustment of frequency bands
This 4mode
(The
factory
setting
is “FLAT”.)
(The
factory
setting
(The
factorypostavka
setting is
isje“FLAT”.)
“FLAT”.)
USER
(Tvornička
"FLAT".)
of 150 Hz,
500 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz and 12 kHz.
(The factory setting is “FLAT”.)
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Setting
thezvuka
playback
(SOUND
Uporaba ekvalizatora
omogućuje vam EQ
podešavanje
raspona basa,EQ)
srednjih i visokih tonova za
Using
the
sound
EQ
enables
you
to
set
bass,
middle
and
treble
range of volume level according to your
razinu
glasnoće
vašim
odabranim
postavkama
za reprodukciju.
Using
the
sound prema
EQ enables
you
to set bass,
middle (SOUND
and
treble range ofEQ)
volume level according to your
Setting
the
playback
EQ
preferred
settings
playback.
Ekvalizator
zvuka for
uključuje
6 tipova fiksnih načina rada, ali i način rada "USER" (Korisnik) pomoću
preferred
settings
for
playback.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Podešavanje
ekvalizatora
(SOUND EQ)
Setting the playback
EQreprodukcije
(SOUND EQ)
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
Using
an
SD
Uporaba
Using
an SD-kartice
SD Card
Card
You can use a microSD/microSDHC card in addition to the internal memory.
Osim
unutarnje
memorije mogu se koristiti
i microSDHC-kartice.
Na ovom uređaju
You can
use a microSD/microSDHC
card ini microSD-kartice
addition to the internal
memory.
Use this unitnovu
to format
a new(→
SD card
(➜prije
page
60) before use.
formatirajte
SD-karticu
60)
uporabe.
Use this unit to format
a new SDstr.
card
(➜ page
60) before use.
Inserting
the
Inserting SD-kartice
the SD
SD card
card
Umetanje
Turn
off
the
power
1
off the
power
Isključite
uređaj
i
1 Turn
and open the battery/
and
openpoklopac
the battery/
otvorite
SD card slot cover.
SD
card slot cover.
baterije/utora
za SDkarticu.
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
2
2
46
46
46
46
Insert the SD card and
Insert
the SD-karticu
SD card and
Umetnite
close the battery/SD
i zatvorite
poklopac
close
the battery/SD
card
slot
cover.
baterije/utora
za SDcard
slot cover.
Align the SD card in the
Align
the SD card in the
karticu.
correct direction ( ) and
correct
direction
( ) and
Poravnajte
SD-karticu
u
insert it fully until a “click”
insert
it fullysmjeru
until a(“click”
ispravnom
)i
sound is heard.
sound
is heard.
umetnite
je do kraja, dok
se ne začuje
klika.
To remove
the zvuk
SD card:
To remove the SD card:
off the power and
1 Turn
Turn off SD-kartice:
the power and
1
Vađenje
open the battery/SD card
open the uređaj
battery/SD
card
 Isključite
i otvorite
slot cover.
slot
cover.baterije/utora
poklopac
push the SD card.
2 Gently
Gently
push the SD card.
2
za SD-karticu.
the SD card
3 When
When the
SD card
3
 Lagano
gurnite
SD-karticu.
protrudes
slightly,
slowly
protrudes
slightly, slowly
 Kada
SD-kartica
pull the
card out. bude
pull the card out.
malo virila, lagano je
izvucite vani.
Strana
s priključkom
Terminal
side
Terminal
prema
downdolje side
down Strana s
Terminal
Terminal
priključkom
side
side
*
can switch
between the
internal
memory
and SD
●● You
Moguće
je naizmjenično
birati
unutarnju
memoriju
*
You
can switch
between the
internal
memory
and SD
card
by pressing
[F2 (FOLDER)]
for more dulje
than od 1
icard
SD-karticu
pritiskom
na
[F2
(FOLDER)]
by pressing [F2 (FOLDER)] for more than
1sekunde
second whense
the stopped
screen
displayed.
zaslon
sais
1 second kada
when theprikaže
stopped
screen
iszaustavljanjem.
displayed.
*
is compatible
with 2sGB
microSD cards, and
●● This
Ovajunit
je uređaj
kompatibilan
microSD-karticama
od
*
This
unit
is compatible
with 2 GB
microSD cards, and
42 GB
to
32
GB
microSDHC
cards.
(As
May
2012)
GB to
i microSDHC-karticama
od 4(As
GBof
32 GB.
(Od
4 GB
32 GB microSDHC cards.
ofdoMay
2012)
* This
unit
may
not
operate
correctly
depending
on
the
svibnja
* This
unit2012.)
may not operate correctly depending on the
manufacturer
or
type
of
SD
card.
●● manufacturer
Ovaj uređaj možda
ispravno
or typeneće
of SD
card. raditi, ovisno o
* For
details oniliSD
cards
that are confirmed to operate
proizvođaču
vrsti
SD-kartice.
* For
details on SD
cards
that are confirmed to operate
correctly
according
to
our
manufacturing
standards,
●● correctly
Detalje oaccording
SD-karticama
koje je potvrđeno
da
to ourzamanufacturing
standards,
see
the support
site
below.
ispravno
rade
u
skladu
s
našim
standardima
see the support site below.
http://panasonic.net/support/
proizvodnje potražite na web-mjestu za podršku u
http://panasonic.net/support/
* Ifnastavku.
an SD card is inserted but “microSD” is not displayed
* If an SD card is inserted but “microSD” is not displayed
on
the SELECT FOLDER screen, etc., this unit does
http://panasonic.net/support/
on
the SELECT FOLDER screen, etc., this unit does
theSD-kartica,
SD card. Turn
off the power
●● not
Akorecognise
se umetne
a "microSD"
se neand
prikaže
not
recognise
the SD card. Turn
off the power
and
reinsert
the SD
card.
na zaslonu
za SELECT
FOLDER, itd., to znači da
reinsert
the SD
card.
* Keep
the
Memory
Card
out
of
reach
of
children
to i
uređajthe
neMemory
prepoznaje
Isključite
uređaj
* Keep
CardSD-karticu.
out of reach
of children
to
prevent
swallowing.
ponovno
umetnite SD-karticu.
prevent
swallowing.
●● Memorijsku karticu čuvajte izvan dohvata djece da je
ne bi progutala.
3
3
3
SRCH
displayed
in
a list.
CALENDAR
Recorded
files
are
refined
by
date
CALENDAR
Recorded
files
are
refined
by
date
and
DAY
ofand
the
CALENDAR
Recorded
files are
areprecizirat
refined by
by
date
DAYOF
OFWEEK
Snimljene
datoteke
ćeday
se po
DAY
OF
WEEK
Recorded
files
day
ofand
the
SRCH
displayed
in
a
list.
SRCH
displayed
in
aprikazati
list. refined
week
and in
displayed
in ua obliku
list. popisa.
SRCH
displayed
a
list.
WEEK
danu
u
tjednu
i
week and displayed in a list.
DAY
OF
WEEK
Recorded
files
are
refined
by
day
of
the
DAY
OF
WEEK
Recorded
files
are
refined
by
day
of
RECENT
R.
displayed
in
DAY
OF WEEK
Recorded
files
refined
by
day
of the
the
RECENT
datoteke
sein
prema
RECENT
R. Snimljene
Recorded
files are
areprikazuju
displayed
week
and
displayed
in
a
list.
week
and
displayed
in
a
list.
FILE
recording
date
order,
starting
from the
week
and
displayed
in
a
list.
R.
FILE
datumu
snimanja,
počevši
od
najnovijih.
FILE
recording date
order,
startingin
from the
RECENT
R.
Recorded
files
are
displayed
most
recent.
(20are
files)
RECENT R.
R. (20Recorded
Recorded
files
are
displayed in
in
datoteka)
RECENT
files
displayed
most
recent.
(20 files)
FILE
recording
FILE
recording date
date order,
order, starting
starting from
from the
the
FILE
recording
date
order,
starting
from
the
recent.
(20
files)
most
recent.
(20
files)
Pretraživanje
datoteka
File searchmost
most recent. (20 files)
File search
••Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to da
stop
thezaustavili
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
biste
uređaj.
search
•File
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the unit.
File
search
File search
Press
[LIST
] for approx.
1thesecond
or
••1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
unit.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
the
unit. ilior
Press
[LIST
for approx.
1the
second
Držite
[LIST
]] približno
1 sekundu
duže.
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
unit.
more.
Idite
na
korak
ako
ste
umetnuli
SD-karticu
(→ str.
more.
Press
[LIST
]
for
approx.
1
second
or
1
Press
[LIST
]
for
approx.
1
second
or
Go
to
step
if
an
SD
card
is
inserted
(➜
page
2
1 46)
Press
[LIST
] for
1 second
or 46),
1
ili na
korak
ako
niste.
Go to
step
SDapprox.
card is inserted
(➜ page
46),
2 if an
more.
and
step 3 if not.
more.
and
step 3 if not.
Go
to
step
if
an
SD
card
is
inserted
(➜
page
2
Go to
to step
step
an SD
card
is inserted
inserted (➜
(➜ page
page 46),
46),
Press
+, –+,
toifif- select
“INT.
2
Go
an
card
is
46),
za SD
odabir
Press
+,3
–2ififtonot.
select
“INT.
2 Pritisnite
and
step
and
step
not.
3
MEMORY”
(internal
and step 3 if not.
2
2
2
"INT.
MEMORY"
MEMORY”
(internal
Press
+,
– to
select
“INT.
Press
+,
to
select
Press
+, –
–) or
to
select “INT.
“INT.
memory
“microSD
(unutarnja
memorija)
memory
) or
“microSDili
MEMORY”
(internal
MEMORY”
(internal
MEMORY”
(internal
CARD”
and
press
[F1
"microSD
CARD"
i
zatim
CARD” and
press
[F1
memory
)) or
“microSD
memory
or
memory
)[F1
or “microSD
“microSD
(SEARCH)].
pritisnite
(SEARCH)].
(SEARCH)].
CARD”
CARD” and
and press
press [F1
[F1
CARD”
and
press
[F1
(SEARCH)].
(SEARCH)].
(SEARCH)].
4
4
4
4
4
type
of+,
–
le to
search
and
Press
select
the
Press
+,
–
to
the
[►
OK][q
unos.
Press
+,za
–OK]
to select
select
the
press
to enter.
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
type
of

le
search
and
type
of 
le
le search
search
and
Za
unutarnje
type
of
and
“ pretraživanje
” (internal
memory)
or “ ”
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
“ ” (internal
memory)
or “”, ”
press
[q
to
enter.
memorije
”as
press
[qprikazuje
OK]
to se
enter.
(SD card)
isOK]
displayed
the
is displayed
as
the
a(SD
“ za
pretraživanje
““ “ ”” card)
(internal
memory)
or
search
target.
(internal
memory) SDor “““ ”””
“ ” (internal
memory)
or
search
target.
kartice.
(SD
card)
is
displayed
as
the
(SD
card)
is
displayed
as
(SD card) is displayed as the
the
When
“CALENDAR
SRCH” is selected:
search
target.
search
target.
When
SRCH” is selected:
search “CALENDAR
target.
Pressodaberete
+, –, u, i
to select
Kad
funkciju
Press +,“CALENDAR
–, u, i to select
When
SRCH”
is selected:
the
recorded
date
and press
When
“CALENDAR
SRCH”
"CALENDAR
SRCH":
When
“CALENDAR
SRCH” is
is selected:
selected:
the
recorded
date
and
press
Press
+,
–,
u,
i
to
select
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–,
u,
i
to
select
Pritisnite
+,
-,
,
da
biste
Press
+,to–,enter.
u, i to select
[q
OK]
the
recorded
date
and
press
The
cursor
only
moves
to
dates
the
recorded
date
and
press
odabrali
datum
snimanja
i
the recorded
date
and press
The
cursor
only
moves
to dates
[q
OK]
to
enter.
on
which
were
recorded.
[q
OK]
to
enter.
zatim
[► OK]
za unos.
[q
OK]pritisnite
tofiles
enter.
on
which
files
were
recorded.
The
cursor
only
moves
to
The cursor
cursor se
only
movessamo
to dates
dates
Pokazatelj
pomiče
na
The
only
moves
to
dates
on
files
were
recorded.
datume
koje
su datoteke
on which
whichna
files
were
recorded.
on
which
files
were
recorded.
When
“DAY
OF
WEEK”
is selected:
snimljene.
When “DAY OF WEEK” is selected:
Press +, – to select the day of
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
day
of
When
“DAY
OF
is
the
week
and press
[q OK] to
When
“DAY
OF WEEK”
WEEK”
is selected:
selected:
When
“DAY
OF
WEEK”
is
selected:
Kada
odaberete
funkciju
the week
and press
[q OK] to
Press
enter. +,
Press
+, –
– to
to select
select the
the day
day of
of
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
day
of
enter.
"DAY
OF
WEEK":
the
week
and
press
[q
OK]
to
Onlyweek
one and
day of
the week
can
the
week
and
press
[q OK]
OK]
to
the
press
[q
to
Only
one +,
day
of
the
can
Pritisnite
- da
bisteweek
odabrali
enter.
be
selected.
enter.
enter.
be
selected.
dan
u
tjednu
i
zatim
pritisnite
Only one
one day
day of
of the
the week can
can
Only
Only
onezaday
of the week
week can
[►
OK]
unos.
be
selected.
be
be selected.
selected.
Možete
odabrati
samo
jedan
Press +, – to select the le and press
Press
+, – to select the le and press
dan
u tjednu.
[q OK] to enter.
[q
OK]+,to–
enter.
Press
to select
the

le and
press
Press
the

press
Press +,
+, –
–+,to
to- select
select
theodabrali
le
le and
anddatoteku
press
Pritisnite
da biste
[q
OK]
to
[q
OK] pritisnite
to enter.
enter. [► OK] za unos.
OK]
to
enter.
i[q
zatim
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Using
the
file
search
enables
you
to
Using
the
file
search
function
enables
you
to
Datoteke
MUSIC
OTHER
FOLDER
You
cannot
search
forfunction
files(M)
ini the
MUSIC
Using
theu mapama
file
search
enables
you(M)
to
You
cannot
search
forfunction
filesoninthis
the
MUSIC
(M)
search
files
recorded
unit.
(search
) nije
moguće
pretraživati.
search
the
files
recorded
on
this
unit.
folder
orthe
OTHER
FOLDER
(
).
the
files recorded
on( this
unit.
folder
or
OTHER
FOLDER
).
You
cannot
search
for
files
in
the
MUSIC
(M)
You
cannot
search
for
files in
in the
the MUSIC
MUSIC (M)
(M)
■■Tipovi
You
cannot
for
files
pretrage
datoteka
g
Types
ofsearch
le search
folder
or
FOLDER
g
Types
of le search
folder
or OTHER
OTHER
FOLDER ((( ).
).
folder
or
OTHER
FOLDER
).
CALENDAR
Recorded
files areprecizirat
refined by
date
and
CALENDAR
Snimljene
datoteke
će
se po
CALENDAR
files are refined by date
and
g
Types
le
search
g
Types of
of 
datumu
leRecorded
search
SRCH
displayed
in a list.
g
Types
of

le
search
SRCH
i prikazati
u obliku popisa.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Using

function
Uporaba
pretrage
datoteka
Using the
thefunkcije
le
le search
search
function
Using
the
file search
function
enables
you to function
Press +, –+,to- da
select
the
Funkcija
pretrage
datoteke
omogućuje
vam
3
Pritisnite
biste
odabrali vrstu
Using
the

le
search
Using
the file search
function
enables you to function
+, – to select
the
3 Press
Using
the
le
search
search
the files
recorded
on this
unit.
pretraživanje
datoteka
snimljenih
ovim
uređajem.
type of le search
and i zatim pritisnite
pretraživanja
datoteka
search
the files
recorded
on this
unit.
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
Slušanje glazbe
na ovom
(WMA/MP3-glazbene
datoteke)
Listening
to music
onuređaju
this unit
(WMA/MP3 music
les)
••Transfer
files to
this unitsfrom
the na
Prijenosmusic
glazbenih
datoteka
računala
computer.
(➜ (→
page
ovaj uređaj.
str.71)
71)
Selecting
a le from
folder
“M”:
Odabir
datoteke
iz mape
"M":
See page 12
selecting
a potražite
folder andna
pages
13
Informacije
o for
odabiru
mape
str. 12,
and
17 for selecting
file.
a
o odabiru
datotekeana
str. 13 i 17.
1
Select thedatoteku
le and press
[q OK].
Odaberite
i pritisnite
[► OK].
1
2
3
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
Playback
elapsed
time
Proteklo
vrijeme
reprodukcije
Total
playback
time
Ukupno
vrijeme
reprodukcije
(Length
of the (Duljina
selected
odabrane
file
(durationdatoteke
of time))
trajanje))
If(vremensko
the file contains
track information (ID3 tag,
Ako datoteka sadrži informacije o zapisu (oznaku ID3,
etc.), 1 track name, 2 artist name and 3
itd.), prikazuju se  naziv zapisa,  ime izvođača i 
album
name are displayed. (If there is no track
naziv albuma. (Ako ne postoji naziv zapisa, prikazuje
name,
the file name is displayed. If there is
se naziv datoteke. (Ako ne postoji ime izvođača
no
artist name or album name, “UNKNOWN
ili naziv albuma, prikazuju se natpisi "UNKNOWN
ARTIST”
or “UNKNOWN ALBUM” is
ARTIST" ili "UNKNOWN ALBUM".) Ako nazivi ne
displayed.)
If they are not fitted in the screen,
stanu na zaslon, pojavit će se zaslon s klizačem.
48
48
the scroll display will appear.
Informacije
o for
postupcima
See page 17
playback reprodukcije
operations. potražite
na str. 17.
*● Only
files and
PCM
(WAV) files
●
MoguWMA/MP3
se reproducirati
samo
WMA/MP3recorded on this unit can be played.
datoteke i datoteke formata PCM (WAV)
snimljene ovim uređajem.
*
folder, up
to 199jefiles
per one
●● In
U MUSIC
mapi "MUSIC"
moguće
prepoznati
folder
can be recognised
playeduback.
i reproducirati
najviše 199and
datoteka
Ifjednoj
subfolders
number
of files
mapi. are
Akocreated,
se stvaraju
podmape,
F1
playable
is reduced
the equivalent
number
broj datoteka
koje jebymoguće
reproducirati
F2
of
subfolders
created.
(➜odgovara
“Folder structure
smanjuje
se za
broj koji
broju on
this
unit”, page
69) (→ "Struktura mapa na
stvorenih
podmapa.
* Copyright-protected
uređaju:", str. 69) WMA/MP3 music files
be played.
●● cannot
WMA/MP3-glazbene
datoteke zaštićene
* WMA/MP3
music files
bit rate
autorskim pravima
ne with
moguvariable
se reproducirati.
be played,
but the playback
elapsed time
●● may
Moguće
je reproducirati
WMA/MP3display
or bit
rate display
may differ brzinom
from the
glazbene
datoteke
s promjenjivom
actuality,
the
positions
during
A-B
prijenosa,orali
bi repeat
se prikaz
proteklog
vremena
repeat
may differ
from prijenosa
the set positions.
reprodukcije
ili brzine
mogao
½
* Ifrazlikovati
the ID3 tag
of the fileilicontains
data that
od stvarnog
bi se položaji
this
unit cannot
read,ponavljanja
the track name,
artist
ponavljanja
tijekom
od točke
A-B
name,
etc. may not
displayed properly.
mogli razlikovati
odbe
postavljenih
položaja.
*
fileoznaka
of 2 GBID3*
or more
in size
cannot
be
●● AAko
datoteke
sadrži
podatke
played
back.ne može čitati, naziv zapisa,
koje uređaj
* Ifime
playback
of aitd.
filemožda
of 100 se
hours
or ispravno
more
izvođača,
neće
playback
prikazati.time has exceeded 100 hours, the
●● “hour”
Nije moguće
reproducirati
datoteku
veličine 2
indication
in “hour: minute:
second”
GB ili veću.
blinks.
●● Ako reprodukcija datoteke od 100 sati ili dulje
½
ID3
tag: track
and other
informationza
premaši
100 name
sati, treperit
će pokazatelj
STOP■
g/RETURN
stored
in MP3sekunda".
files.
“sat” u "sat:
minuta:
STOP
/RETURN
* O
znaka ID3: naziv zapisa i ostale informacije
pohranjene na MP3-datotekama.
1
2
2
which changes to the folder cue
which
to the
folder
Press
during
when
“ cue
”se
isplayback.
displayed.
Pritisnite
kada
prikaže
“ ”.
Presschanges
u,
display
“[F2
”. ( i,CUE)]
display
“u,
”. se
Press
i
when
“iz sljedeće
”oris
displayed.
“FOLDER
SKIP”
isthe
displayed,
• The
first
track
inprvi
previous
following
folder is
•
Označava
zapis
ili prethodne
•which
The
first
track in
or following folder is
changes
to the
theprevious
folder cue
cued.
mape.
Press
” is displayed.
cued.
“u,
”. i
folder
cue when
isoznaka
being“
displayed,
playback
•
Dok se
prikazuje
mape,
nijethe
moguće
•display
While
Press
u,
i
when
“
”
is displayed.
• The
first
track
inbethe
previous
or following
folder
is
While
folder
cue
ischanged.
being
displayed,
the
playback
promijeniti
brzinu
reprodukcije.
Ni
funkcije
speed
Fast
forward/Fast
• The
firstcannot
track
in the
previousAlso,
or following
folder is
cued.
speed
cannot
be changed.
Also,
Fast forward/Fast
brzog
prebacivanja
unaprijed/unatrag
neće
biti
backward
operations
are
not
available.
Also,
the
cued. u, i when “ ” is displayed.
2 Press
• backward
While
folder
cue is
being
displayed,
theizbornikom
playback
operations
arecannot
not available.
Also,
the
dostupne.
Neće
biti
moguće
upravljati
MENU
or LIST
button
be operated.
While
folder
is
being
displayed,
the folder
playback
•• The
first
trackcue
inbethe
previous
or following
is
speed
changed.
Also,
Fast
forward/Fast
MENU
or
button
operated.
MENUcannot
nitiLIST
gumbom
LISTcannot
. be
speed
cannot
be changed.
Also,
Fast forward/Fast
cued.
backwardfolder
operations
are not available. Also, the
Cancelling
cue:
backward
operations
are displayed,
not available.
Also, the
•setting
While
folder
isbutton
being
the
Cancelling
cue:
MENUcan
or folder
LIST
cannot
The
becue
cancelled
using
anybeofoperated.
the playback
following
Poništavanje
oznake
mape:
MENU
or LIST
buttonusing
cannot
be
operated.
speed
cannot
be
changed.
Also,
Fast
forward/Fast
The
setting
can
be
cancelled
any
of
the
following
methods.
When
this
is
cancelled,
files
can
be
skipped
Postavku se može poništiti samo pomoću sljedećih
Cancelling
folder
cue:
backward
operations
are notfiles
available.
Also,
the
methods.
When
this
is cancelled,
can bese
skipped
using
u,
i.se
metoda.
Kada
postavka
poništi, datoteke
mogu
Cancelling
folder
cue:
The setting
can
be cancelled
anybeofoperated.
the following
MENU
or LIST
buttonusing
cannot
using
u, pomoću
i.
,
. using any of the following
•preskakati
Press
[F2 can
( be
CUE)]
again.
The
setting
cancelled
methods.
When
this is cancelled,
files can be skipped
Press
[F2
(pritisnite
CUE)]
again.
• Press
Ponovno
( CUE)].
••methods.
[q
OK].
When
this is[F2
cancelled,
files can be skipped
Cancelling
folder
cue:
u,
i.
••using
Press
[q
OK].
•
P
ritisnite
[►
OK].
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN].
(Playback
is completed.)
using
u,
i.
The setting can be cancelled using any of
the following
[F2 [STOP
( g/RETURN].
CUE)]
again. (Playback
•• Press
[STOP
is completed.)
Pritisnite
(Reprodukcija
je
methods.
When
this■is/RETURN].
cancelled,
files can be skipped
• Press
[F2
( CUE)]
again.
• Press
[q OK].
završena.)
u,
•using
Press
[q i.
OK].
• Press [STOP g/RETURN]. (Playback is completed.)
•• Press
Press [STOP
[F2 ( g/RETURN].
CUE)] again. (Playback is completed.)
• Press [q OK].
• Press [STOP g/RETURN]. (Playback is completed.)
2
2
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 49
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 49
a playlist
You
can register tracks
in
the MUSICtracks
(M) folder
to
your
favourite
Select the MUSIC
(M)
folder
on tracks
thena
list to
1Registering
Registering
your
favourite
to
omiljenih
zapisa
aRegistracija
and
play
them(M)
in the
desired
order.
Select
the
MUSIC
folder
on
the
list
1aplaylist
screen
page 13).
a playlist
playlist
popis
za(➜
izvođenje
screen
(➜
page
13).
You
can the
also MUSIC
select
OTHER
FOLDER
(the ).list to
Registering
your
favourite
Select
(M)
folder
on tracks
1
You
can the
alsomapu
select OTHER
FOLDER
(the ).list s
Odaberite
MUSIC
(M) na
Select
MUSIC
(M) folder
on zaslonu
1
a
playlist
Press +,(➜
–(→
to
select
le
screen
page
13).
2 popisom
str.
13).the
screen
(➜
page
13).
Press
+,
–
to
select
the

le
2 Možete
canfolder
also MUSIC
select
OTHER
FOLDER
or the
and
press
odabrati
i mapu
OTHER
FOLDER
Select
the
(M)
folder
on ((the ).
1 You
You
canfolder
also select
FOLDER
).(list )).
or the
andOTHER
press
[F1
(PLAYLIST)]
to
enter.
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
datoteku
ili mapu
Press
+,
–
to
select
the

le
screen
(➜
page
13).
2
[F1
(PLAYLIST)]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
the

le
selecting
folders
or(PLAYLIST)] za unos.
2 iWhen
zatim
pritisnite
[F1
or
the
folder
and
press
You
can
also
select
OTHER
FOLDER
(
).
When
selecting
folders
or
selecting
files byand
switching
or theodabirete
folder
press
Kada
mape
datoteke
selecting
files u
switching
[F1 (PLAYLIST)]
toiliyou
enter.
folders,
press
and
Press
– tobyselect
thecan
le
da +,
mijenjate
mape,
2 tako
[F1 (PLAYLIST)]
to you
enter.
folders,
press
u
and
can
When
selecting
folders
or
move within hierarchies.
(For
pritisnite
i na
taj se
način
When
selecting
folders
or
or thewithin
folder
and
press
move
hierarchies.
(For
selecting
files
by
switching
details of
filehijerarhije.
and
folder (Detalje
selection
krećite
kroz
selecting
files
by switching
[F1
(PLAYLIST)]
todatoteka
enter.
details
ofpress
file
folder
selection
folders,
u
and
you
can i
methods,
seeand
page
13.)
o
metodama
odabira
folders,
press
u
and
you
can
When within
selecting
folders
or(For
methods,
seehierarchies.
page
13.)13.)
move
mapa
potražite
na
str.
move
within
(For the playlist
Press
i
to
select
selecting
files
by switching
details
ofu,
filehierarchies.
and
folder
selection
Pritisnite
, folder
da
biste
Press
i
to
select
playlistfrom
details
ofu,
file
selection
folders,
press
u
and
you
canthe(Select
methods,
seeand
page
13.)to
and
press
[q
OK]
enter.
methods,
see
page
odabrali
popis
za13.)
izvođenje
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
(Select
from
move
within
hierarchies.
(For
PLAYLIST
1i
to 5.)
Press
u,
to
the
playlist
3
zatim
pritisnite
[►select
OK]
za
unos.
(Odaberite
details
file
selection
1i
tofolder
5.)
Press
to
select
the
playlist
The
fileofu,
or
alland
files
within
the folder
are registered
to
3 iPLAYLIST
and
press
[q
OK]
tothe
enter.
(Select
from to
methods,
page
13.)
The
file
orsee
all
files
folder
are registered
opciju
od
1playlist.
do
5within
u PLAYLIST.)
the selected
and
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
(Select
from
the selected
playlist.
PLAYLIST
1
to
5.)
Datoteka
ili
sve
datoteke
u
mapi
registriraju
se
na
Press
u, 1i
to select the playlist
3 odabrani
PLAYLIST
to
5.)
The file orpopis
all files
the folder are registered to
za within
izvođenje.
* Playlist
filesorare
displayed
as
tofrom to
Theselected
file
allplaylist.
filesOK]
within
the
folder
are registered
and
press
[q
to“PLAYLIST1.M3U
enter.
(Select
the
*
Playlist
files
are
displayed
as
“PLAYLIST1.M3U
tokao folder.
●● PLAYLIST5.M3U”
Datoteke
popisa
za
izvođenje
prikazuju
in
“PLAYLIST”
folder
within se
“MUSIC”
the selected playlist.
PLAYLIST
1
to
5.)
"PLAYLIST1.M3U
to PLAYLIST5.M3U"
u“MUSIC”
mapi folder.
in “PLAYLIST”
folderon
within
* PLAYLIST5.M3U”
Do
not edit PLAYLIST
1 to 5.M3U
a computer.
The
file
or
all
files
within
the
folder
are
registered
to
koja
nalazi
u mapi
"MUSIC".
*
Do
not files
edit are
PLAYLIST
1can
to“PLAYLIST1.M3U
5.M3U
on
a computer.
displayed
as
* Playlist
A"PLAYLIST"
maximum
of
99 se
files
be
registered
toto1 playlist.
the
selected
*
filesuređivati
are
displayed
as “PLAYLIST1.M3U
to1 računalu.
●● Playlist
"PLAYLIST
1registered
to 5.M3U"
*
ANemojte
maximum
ofplaylist.
99
can
befolder
tona
playlist.
PLAYLIST5.M3U”
in files
“PLAYLIST”
within “MUSIC”
folder.
in “PLAYLIST”
folder
within
“MUSIC” folder.
●● PLAYLIST5.M3U”
Na not
jedan
za
izvođenje
moguće
registrirati
*
Do
editpopis
PLAYLIST
1 to 5.M3U
on
ajecomputer.
*
Do
not files
edit
PLAYLIST
to“PLAYLIST1.M3U
5.M3U
on a computer.
99 are
datoteka.
as
* Playlist
Anajviše
maximum
ofdisplayed
99 files 1can
be registered
toto1 playlist.
* PLAYLIST5.M3U”
A maximum of 99
can befolder
registered
to 1 playlist.
in files
“PLAYLIST”
within “MUSIC”
folder.
* Do not edit PLAYLIST 1 to 5.M3U on a computer.
* A maximum of 99 files can be registered to 1 playlist.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
This
function
enables lakše
you to
switch subfolders
Ova funkcija
omogućuje
prebacivanje
podmapa u
This
function
enables
to easily
switch
subfolders
within
the MUSIC
(M) you
folder
while
playing
Folder
cue
function
mapi
MUSIC
(M) tijekom
reprodukcije
datoteka
u mapi
Folder
cue
function
within
the
MUSIC
(M)
folder
easily
while
playing
back
files in the MUSIC folder.
MUSIC.
This
function
enables
you
to
switch
subfolders
back
files
incannot
the
MUSIC
folder.
Oznaku
mape
nije
moguće
izvesti
tijekom
reprodukcije
Folder
cue
be performed
while
playing a
This
function
enables
you
to switch
subfolders
within
the
MUSIC
(M)
folder easily
while
playing
Folder
cue
function
Folder
cue
cannot
be performed
while
playing
a
popisa
za
izvođenje
PLAYLIST.
PLAYLIST.
within
the
MUSIC
(M)
folder easily
while
playing
back files in the MUSIC folder.
PLAYLIST.
back
files
in
the
MUSIC
folder.
This
function
enables
you
to
switch
subfolders
1
Pritisnite
[F2
(
CUE)]
tijekom
Press
( CUE)]
during while
playback.
Folder
cue[F2
cannot
be performed
playing a
1 reprodukcije.
Folder
cueMUSIC
cannot
bedisplayed,
performed
while
playing
a
within
the
folder
easily
while
playing
Press
[F2
( (M)
CUE)]
during
playback.
“FOLDER
SKIP”
is
PLAYLIST.
PLAYLIST.
“FOLDER
SKIP”
displayed,
back
fileschanges
in se
the
MUSIC
folder.
Prikazuje
"FOLDER
SKIP",
which
toisthe
folder
cue
1
Press
during
playback.
which
changes
toCUE)]
theuperformed
folder
cue while
Folder
cue
cannot
be
playing a
se
zatim
prikaz
display
“[F2
”. ((mijenja
1 što
Press
[F2
CUE)]
during
playback.
“FOLDER
SKIP”
display
“mapa
”. “ is“.displayed,
PLAYLIST.
oznaka
“FOLDER SKIP” is displayed,
Using
the
Using
the playlist
playlist function
function
You can register tracks in the MUSIC (M) folder to
Korištenje
funkcije
You
can
register
tracks
in
the
MUSIC
(M)
folder to
a
playlist andthe
play them
in the desired
order.
Using
playlist
function
Using
playlist
function
a
playlist andthe
play them
in the desired
order.
popisa
izvođenje
You
can registerza
tracks
in
the MUSICtracks
(M) folder
Registering
your
favourite
toto
You
can register tracks
in
the MUSIC (M) folder
a
playlistjeand
playyour
them
inuthe
desired
order.
Registering
favourite
tracks
toto
Moguće
registrirati
zapise
mapi
MUSIC
(M) na popis
Using
the
playlist
function
aaplaylist
and play them in the desired order.
playlist
za izvođenje i reproducirati ih željenim redoslijedom.
3
3
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Folder cue
function
Funkcija
oznake
mape
Folder cue function
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
2012/05/29499:35:47
2012/05/29 9:35:47
1
2
Select the playlist (from P1 to P5) on the list
screen (➜ page 13).
Press +, – to select the le
that you want to change
and press [F1 (EDIT)].
Korištenje funkcije popisa
+, – to select “CHANGE ORDER” and
za
izvođenje
3 Press
press [qthe
OK] to
enter.
Using
playlist
function
Reproduciranje
zapisa
registriranih
“ ” is added
to the
left
side of the
selected
file name.
Using
the
playlist
function
na
popisu
za
izvođenje
Playing
tracks
registered
to
the
playlist
Press
+,
–
to
move
4Playing tracks
registered to
the playlist
Using
theleplaylist
function
the
selected
to
the
the
playlist
(from
P1 to P5)
(➜P1
page
Odaberite
popis
za
izvođenje
(od
do 12).
1 Select
Using
the
playlist
function
Select
playlist
(from P1 toto
P5)the
(➜ page
12).
1Playing
tracks
playlist
desired
position
and
P5) (→the
str.
12).registered
2
3
Press +, – to select the le
that you want
change
“ERASE
FILE”toand
press
andOK]
press
[F1 (EDIT)].
[q
to enter.
3
Press cancelling
+, – to select
When
all“CHANGE
registeredORDER”
tracks: and
press
to enter.
Press[q
+, OK]
– to select
“ERASE ALL” and press
1
4
4
to enter.
“ [q
” isOK]
added
to the left side of the selected file name.
Press
“YES” and press
Pritisnite
da biste
Press +,
+, –
–+,to
to- select
move
pomaknuli
odabranu
[q
to enter.
theOK]
selected
le to the
datoteku na željeni položaj
desired position and
Cancelling
tracks
to the
i zatim pritisnite
[► registered
OK]
press
[q OK]
to enter.
Cancelling
tracks
registered to the
za
unos.
playlist
When c
1 Press
4
[q OK
Press +
[q OK]
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81 VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
The track
is changed.
Mijenja
seorder
redoslijed
zapisa.
playlist
Cancelling
tracks
registered
Select
the
playlist
(from
P1 to P5) onto
thethe
list
1
u, i to select the le to play and
2 Press
Poništavanje
zapisa
registriranih
nafile is not deleted fro
Select
the
playlist
(from
P1
to P5) on
the
list
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
1
playlist
*
Even
if
files
are
erased
from
the
playlist,
the
original
Playing
tracks
registered
to
the
playlist
Cancelling
tracks
registered
to
the
Press
u,
i
to
select
the

le
to
play
and
Pritisnite
,
da
biste
odabrali
2
screen
(➜
page
13).
Select [q
theOK].
playlist (from P1 to P5) (➜ page 12).
1 press
The
track
order
is želite
changed.
(➜–file
page
13). the
*
If screen
theizvođenja
original
is
deleted,
thele
playback
elapsed
time
listi
datoteku
koju
reproducirati
i page
zatim12).
playlist
press
[q
OK].
Press
+,
to
select
that
you
want
to and file total play
Select
the
playlist
(from
P1
to
P5)
(➜
2
Select
the
playlist
(from
P1
to
P5)
on
the
list
1
1
u,[►
i
to za
select
the le to play and
isPress
played,+,
playback
skips to
thenext
file after
2 Press
– to
select
the
le that
you approx.
want to2 seconds.
pritisnite
OK]
unos.
2
erase
and
press
[F1
(EDIT)].
Changing
the
order
ofthe
playlist
tracks
Odaberite
popis
za
izvođenje
(od
screen
(➜
page
13).
50is not
Select
the
playlist
(from
P1
toalso
P5)
onP1
thedo
listP5)
1Ifdeleted
*
you have
deleted
an
original
file,
cancel
the
track registered to the
Press
u,
i
to select
le to
and
press
[q
OK].
*
Even
if files
are
erased
from the
playlist,
theplay
original
file
from
the
unit.
erase
and
press
[F1
(EDIT)].
2Changing
the
order
ofzapisa
playlist
tracks
Press
+,
to
select
Promjena
redoslijeda
na
listi
na
zaslonu
popisom
13).
Press
+,
–page
tostime
select
the(→
lestr.
that
youIfwant
to
screen
(➜–
13).
2
*
If
the
original
file
is
deleted,
the
playback
elapsed
time
and
file
total
playback
are
displayed
as
“-:--”.
this
file
50 3
Select
the
playlist
(from
P1
to
P5)
on
the
list
press
[q
OK].
Press
+,
–
to
select
1 Select the playlist (from P1 to P5) on the list
3 Pritisnite
“ERASE
FILE”
and
press
+,to
- da
biste
odabrali
datoteku
koju
izvođenja
erase
and
press
[F1
(EDIT)].
isscreen
played, (➜
playback
skips
to
the
next
file
after
approx.
2
seconds.
1Changing
Press
+,
–
select
the

le
that
you
want
to
2
the
order
of
playlist
tracks
page 13).
“ERASE
FILE” and press
[q
OK]
50 *Changing
želite
obrisati
i zatim
pritisnite [F1 (EDIT)].
If screen
you have(➜
deleted
an
original file, also cancel the track registered
to the
Press
+,toplaylist.
– enter.
to
select
page
13).
erase
and
press
[F1 (EDIT)].
3
the
order
of
playlist
tracks
Press
+,
–
to
select
the

le
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Odaberite
popis za
izvođenje
(od
2 Select
the playlist
(from
P1 to P5)
onP1
thedo
list
50 1 Press +, – to select the le
+,to
- da
bistepress
“ERASE
and
2 that
Press
+, –FILE”
select
3 Pritisnite
you
want
P5) na
zaslonu
schange
popisom
When cancelling
all registered tracks:
the
playlist
(from
P1 to(→
P5)str.
on13).
the list
screen
(➜
pageto13).
odabrali
"ERASE
FILE"
1 Select
that
you
want
to
change
“ERASE
FILE”
and
press
[q
OK]cancelling
to
enter.
When
all
registered
tracks:
Press
+,
–
to
select
“ERASE
ALL” and
press
and
press
[F1
(EDIT)].
1
Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
Press +,
– page
to select
the le
2 screen
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd
50
(➜
13).
(Obriši
datoteku)
i
Press
+,
–enter.
to selectzatim
“ERASE
ALL” and press
and
press
[F1
(EDIT)].
1
[q
OK]
to
enter.
[q
OK]
to
odabrali
datoteku
koju
Press
+,
–
to
select
the

le
that
you
want
to
change
When
cancelling
all
registered
tracks:
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
[q OK]
enter.
2
+, – to select
“CHANGE ORDER” and
+,+,to
– to
select
“YES” ALL”
andand
press
3 Press
želite
promijeniti
i zatim
4 Press
to select
selectall
“ERASE
press
and
press
[F1select
(EDIT)].
1 Presscancelling
Press
+, want
–OK]
to
“CHANGE ORDER” and
you
to
change
Press
+,to––enter.
to
“YES”
and press
3 that
When
registered
tracks:
Poništavanje
svih registriranih
zapisa:
4
press
[q
to
enter.
[q
OK]
pritisnite
[F1
(EDIT)].
[q
OK]
to
enter.
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd
50
2012/05/29 9:35:47
Press
+,
–
to
select
“ERASE
ALL”
and
press
and
press
[F1
(EDIT)].
1
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“ERASE
ALL”
and
press

Pritisnite
+,
da
biste
odabrali
"ERASE
ALL"
(Obriši
[q OK] to enter.
” is added
the left side
of the selected
file name.
+, –+,
toto
“CHANGE
ORDER”
and
Pritisnite
da left
biste
odabrali
"CHANGE
Press
+, to
– to
select
“YES”
3 ““Press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
4 sve
” is added
to- select
the
side
of the selected
file name.
[q
OK]
enter.
datoteke)
i zatim
pritisnite
[►and
OK] press
za unos.
Press
+,
to
ORDER"
redoslijed)ORDER”
i zatim and
select
“CHANGE
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
4
[q
OK]+,to–+,
enter.
Press
+, –
–(Promijeni
to move
da biste
odabrali
"YES" (Da) i
Press
to- select
“YES”
and press
3
4 Pritisnite
+, –[►
toto
move
4 Press
pritisnite
OK]
unos.
“press
” selected
is added
the
left
side
of the selected file name.
the
le enter.
tozathe
[q OK]
to
zatim
pritisnite
[q
OK]
to
enter.[► OK] za unos.
the
selected

le
to
the
“”
se
dodaje
s
lijeve
strane
odabranog
naziva
datoteke.
“Press
is added
added
to move
the left
left
side of
of the
the selected
selected file
file name.
name.
and
”” is
the
side
+,position
– toto
4 “desired
desired
position
and
press
[q
to
●4
● Čak
se–OK]
datoteke
izbrišu
thei ako
selected

le enter.
to
the s popisa za izvođenje, izvorna datoteka neće se izbrisati s uređaja.
Press
+,
to
move
press
[qorder
OK]
enter.
Thesetrack
isto
changed.
●● Ako
izbriše
izvorna
datoteka, proteklo vrijeme reprodukcije i ukupno vrijeme reprodukcije datoteke prikazat će se
50
50
50
5050
50
desired position and
the
selected
lechanged.
to
the
desired
position
and
The“-:--”.
track
order
kao
Ako
se is
datoteka reproducira, reprodukcija će preskočiti na sljedeću datoteku nakon približno 2 sekunde.
press [q
OK]
to enter.
desired
position
and
●
Ako izbrišete
izvornu
datoteku,
i zapis
registriran
na popisu
izvođenje.
*● Even
filesorder
are
erased
from theponištite
playlist, the
original
file is not
deletedza
from
the unit.
The ififtrack
isto
changed.
press
[qare
OK]
enter.
*
files
fromthe
theplayback
playlist, the
original
fileand
is not
from the
unit.
* Even
If the original
fileerased
is deleted,
elapsed
time
filedeleted
total playback
time
are displayed as “-:--”. If this file
The
track order
order
is deleted,
changed.the playback elapsed time and file total playback time are displayed as “-:--”. If this file
track
is
changed.
* If
the
original
file is
isThe
played,
playback
skips
to the next file after approx. 2 seconds.
* is
Even
if files
are erased from
thenext
playlist,
the original
file
is not deleted from the unit.
played,
to the
file cancel
after
approx.
2 seconds.
* If you
haveplayback
deleted skips
an original
file, also
the track
registered to the playlist.
*
If
the original
fileerased
is deleted,
playback
elapsed
filedeleted
totaltoplayback
time
are displayed as “-:--”. If this file
*
you
an original
file,
also cancel
thetime
track
registered
the
playlist.
Even
ififhave
files
are
from
the
playlist,
the
original
file
is
not
from
the
unit.
* If
Even
filesdeleted
are
erased
fromthe
the
playlist,
the
original
fileand
is
not
deleted
from
the
unit.
is
played,
playback
skips
to
the
next
file
after
approx.
2
seconds.
*
If
the
original
file
is
deleted,
the
playback
elapsed
time
and
* If the original file is deleted, the playback elapsed time and file
file total
total playback
playback time
time are
are displayed
displayed as
as “-:--”.
“-:--”. If
If this
this file
file
•• Press
[F1
(TAB)]
to
to
setting
screens.
Press
[F1 [F1
(TAB)]
to switch
switch
to other
other
setting
Pritisnite
(TAB)]
zaFor
prelazak
na
ostale
zaslone
according
to the
item.
details,
see
the screens.
••• Press
[F1 (TAB)]
toand
switch
to other
setting
screens.
The
setting
details
change
methods
differ
za
postavljanje.
•• The
setting
details
and
change
methods
differ
corresponding
page.
The
setting
details
and
change
methods
differ
according
to the
thei metode
item. For
For
details, razlikuju
see the
the se ovisno
to
item.
details,
Detalji[F1
postavki
promjene
•• according
Press
(TAB)]
to switch
to othersee
setting
according
to the
item.
For details,
see
the screens.
corresponding
page.
o stavki.
Detalje
potražite
napress
odgovarajućoj
stranici.
page.
To exit
the
setting
screen,
[F2 (CLOSE)].
• corresponding
The
setting
details
and change
methods
differ
corresponding
page.
according
to
the
item.
For
details,
see
the
Za
izlaz
iz
zaslona
za
postavljanje
pritisnite
To exit
exit the
the setting
setting screen,
screen, press
press [F2 (CLOSE)].
(CLOSE)].
To
corresponding
To
the settingpage.
screen, press [F2
[F2 (CLOSE)].
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
Dividing les
To
exit
setting
press
(CLOSE)].
Dividing
les
Podjela
datoteka
You
canthe
divide
1 filescreen,
into 2 files
at a[F2
specified
Dividing
Dividing 
les
les
position.
You
can
divide
1
file
into
2
files
at
a
specified
Jednu
datoteku1moguće
je files
podijeliti
na dvije na
You
can
into
a
You
can divide
divide
1 file
filepress
into 2
2[STOP
files at
at g/RETURN]
a specified
specified at
While
playing,
les
1Dividing
position.
određenom
položaju.
position.
position.
the
point
wherepress
you wish
to divide
the
Tijekom
reprodukcije
pritisnite
■/le.
playing,
at
1 While
You
can divide
1 filepress
into 2[STOP
files at g/RETURN]
a [STOP
specified
playing,
[STOP
g/RETURN]
at
1
While
playing,
press
[STOP
at
1 While
RETURN]
na mjestu
kojem
želite podijeliti
the
point
where
youna
wish
to g/RETURN]
divide
the 
le.
le.
position.
the
point
where
you
wish
to
divide
the
the
point
where
you
wish
to
divide
the

le.
datoteku.
While playing, press [STOP g/RETURN] at
1
the point where you wish to divide the le.
necessary
for
dividing
file.
*
You
cannotnije
divide
a file
fileapodijeliti
at
the beginning
beginning
of the
the file.
●● You
Dfile
atoteku
na
cannot
divide
a
the
*
A
length
ofmoguće
2at
seconds
orpočetku.
more
isthe file.
that
you
make
aapprox.
backup
the
file
inof
*
You
cannot
a file
atcopy
the of
beginning
ofadvance.
file.
*
Divided
filesdivide
cannot
be
recovered.
It is
is vratiti.
recommended
●
●
P
odijeljene
datoteke
više
se
ne mogu
*
Divided
files
cannot
be
recovered.
It
recommended
dividing
arecovered.
file.
* necessary
After thefiles
fileforis
divided,
the
number
ofisfiles
in the folder
*
Divided
cannot
be
It
recommended
that
you make
make a
a da
backup
copy of
of
the file
file in
insigurnosnu
advance.
Preporučujemo
prethodno
napravite
that
you
backup
copy
the
advance.
* that
You
cannot
a file
atcopy
the
beginning
the file.
increases
bydivide
one.
(➜
page
67)of
you
make
adivided,
backup
theof
file inofadvance.
*
the
file
the
number
in
datoteke.
* After
After
the
file is
is
divided,
the
number
ofisfiles
files
in the
the folder
folder
*
Divided
files
cannot
be recovered.
Itof
recommended
Ifkopiju
a file
containing
index
marks
is divided,
the
*
After
the
file
is
divided,
the
number
files
in the folder
by
one.
(➜
page
67)
●● increases
N
akon
podjele
datoteke,
broj
datoteka
u
mapi
increases
by will
one.
(➜ page
67)of the file is
that
you
make
a
backup
copy
in
advance.
index
marks
disappear
after
divided.
increases
by one. (➜
page
67) is divided, the
*
If
a
file
containing
index
marks
seisza
jedan.
(→
str. 67)
* After
Ifpovećava
a file
containing
indexthe
marks
is divided,
*
the
file
divided,
number
of filesthe
in the folder
38)
* (➜
If a page
file
containing
index marks
isthe
divided,
the
index
marks
willdatoteka
disappear
after
file
is
●● increases
Athere
ko se
podijeli
koja
sadrži
indeks,
indeksne
index
marks
after
the
file
is divided.
divided.
by will
one.disappear
(➜space
page
67)
*
If
is
no
empty
in
the
internal
index
marks
will
disappear
after
the
file ismemory
divided.or
(➜
page
38)
oznake
nestat
će index
nakon
podjele
datoteke.
(→
38)
(➜
38)if there
* If
a page
file containing
marks
divided,
SD
card
or
is already
a is
total
of 199the
filesstr.
in the
(➜
page
38)
*
IfAthere
there
isunutarnjoj
no empty
emptymemoriji
space in
inilithe
the
internal nema
memory or
or
●● If
ko na
SD-kartici
*
is
no
space
internal
marks
will
disappear
after
the
filedivide
ismemory
divided.
folder,
you
cannot
use
this in
function
to
a file.or
* index
If
there
is
no
empty
space
the
internal
memory
SD
card or
or ififmjesta
there ili
is je
already
a već
total199
of 199
199
files in
innije
the
slobodnog
u mapia
datoteka,
SD
card
is
already
total
of
files
the
(➜
page
38)if there
SD
card
or
there
is already
a total
ofdivide
199 files
in the
folder,
you
cannot
use
thispodjele
function
to
a file.
file.
funkciju
datoteke.
cannot
use
this
function
to
divide
a
* folder,
Ifmoguće
thereyou
iskoristiti
no
empty
space
the internal
memory
folder,
you
cannot
use
this in
function
to divide
a file.or
SD card or if there is already a total of 199 files in the
folder, you cannot use this function to divide a file.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Select
“DIVIDE”
in
the
editing
setting
Odaberite
(Podijeli)
zaslonu za
Prikaz
zaslona
s postavkama
uređivanja
2
•Displaying
Pressthe
[STOP
g/RETURN]
toyou
stopcan
the edit
unit.
the
editing
setting
screen
Select
“DIVIDE”
in of
the
editing na
setting
Using
editing
settings,
files
recorded on
unit+,
in–a"DIVIDE"
variety
methods.
Press
to
select
“YES”
2
Displaying
the
editing
setting
screen
3 this
screen
(➜
left).
podešavanje
izmjena (→ lijevo).
screen
(➜
left).
screen
(➜
left).
••1
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press
[MENU].
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
•Press
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
biste
uređaj.
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to da
stop
thezaustavili
unit.
Press
+,
–+,to
“YES”
3
Select
“DIVIDE”
the
editing setting
Pritisnite
- select
da in
biste
Press
+,
select
“YES”
2
•Displaying
Press [STOP g/RETURN]
to stopsetting
the unit. screen
the
editing
3
Press
+, –
– to
to
select
“YES”
3 odabrali
[MENU].
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
+,
–[MENU].
to select “EDIT MENU” and
1 Press
screen
(➜
left).
2
"YES"
(Da)
i
zatim
Press
[MENU].
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
1
Pritisnite
Press
[MENU].
and press [q OK] to enter.
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop the unit.
press
[q
to enter.
Press +, –[►
to OK]
select
za“YES”
unos.
Press
+, –
–OK]
to- select
select
“EDIT MENU”
MENU” and
and
3 pritisnite
2
Press
+,
to
“EDIT
Pritisnite
+,
da biste
2
While the file is being divided, the status indicator
“EDIT
MENU”
and
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
2
[MENU].
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
3 press
1
[q
OK]
to
enter.
odabrali
“EDIT
i
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
flashes.
press
[q
OK]
toMENU”
enter.
While
item
topritisnite
edit
and
press
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
While the
the file
file is
is being
being divided,
divided, the
the status
status indicator
indicator
3
“EDIT
MENU”
and
zatim
[►
OK]
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
2
While
the
file
is
being
divided,
the status indicator
3 Press
flashes.
+,edit
– toand
select
the
3
[q
OK].
flashes.
item
to
press
*
Files
in
the
MUSIC
(M)
folder,
OTHER
FOLDER
Pokazatelj
statusa
svijetli
dok
se
datoteka
dijeli.( )
za
unos.
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
flashes.
item
to
edit
and
press
item
to edit and press
orWhile
recycle
folderdivided,
cannot the
be divided.
thebin
file( is )being
status
indicator
OK].
Pritisnite
da biste
Press
+, –+,to- select
the
*
Files
in
the
MUSIC
(M)
folder,
OTHER
FOLDER
( )
3 [q
[q
OK].
●● A
Datoteke
u MUSIC
mapama
MUSIC
(M),
OTHER
FOLDER
*
Files
the
(M)
OTHER
FOLDER
(( ))
[q
OK]. stavku koju
*
file in
length
of approx.
seconds
or more
is
flashes.
* or
Files
in
thebin
MUSIC
(M)2folder,
folder,
OTHER
FOLDER
odabrali
((koša
)) folder
cannot
divided.
item
to edit and press
( recycle
) i u mapi
za asmeće
( be
mogu se dijeliti.
or
recycle
bin
folder
cannot
be) ne
divided.
necessary
for
dividing
file.
or
recycle
binof( approx.
) folder
cannot
beordivided.
želite
urediti
i
zatim
*
A
file
length
2
seconds
more
is
OK].[F1 (TAB)] to switch to other setting screens.
●● A
Dfile
a biin
jethe
se MUSIC
moglo
datoteka
mora
biti duljine
*
length
of approx.
or more
Files
(M)
OTHER
FOLDER
( )
•[q
Press
*
divide
apodijeliti,
file2
atseconds
the
beginning
ofis
* You
A
filecannot
length
ofdividing
approx.
2folder,
seconds
or more
isthe file.
necessary
for
file.
[►details
OK] and
za unos.
približno
2bin
sekunde
ili a
necessary
for
aviše.
file.
recycle
(dividing
) folder
cannot beItdivided.
•pritisnite
The setting
change methods differ
* or
Divided
files
cannot
be
recovered.
is recommended
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Editing: Dividing les
Editing:
Dividing

les
Using
the editing settings,
you can edit
recorded on this unit in a variety of methods.
Uređivanje:
Podjela
datoteka
Editing:
Dividing
files
les
Using
the
editing
settings,
you
can
edit
files
recorded
on
this
unit
in
a variety
of
methods.
Pomoću
postavke
uređivanja
možete
uređivati
datoteke
na
uređaj
razne
načine.
Select
in na
the
editing
setting
Using
the
settings,
you
edit
files
recorded
this
unit
in
of
methods.
2 snimljene
Displaying
editing
setting
screen
Using
the editing
editingthe
settings,
you can
can
edit
files
recorded on
on
this
unit“DIVIDE”
in a
a variety
variety
of
methods.
Editing:
Dividing

les
(➜ left). in the editing setting
Select “DIVIDE”
Displaying the editing setting screen 2 screen
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 51
2012/05/29 9:35:47
Editing: Combining les
2 files recorded on this unit can be combined into 1 file.
Uređivanje:
Kombiniranje
datoteka
Editing:
Combining

les
Editing:
Combining
into
les
Select “COMBINE”
in the editing setting
– to select “NEXT” and press
1files
6 Press u+,jednu
Dvije
datoteke
snimljene
ovim
uređajem
moguće
je
kombinirati
datoteku.
2
recorded
on
this
unit
can
be
combined
1
file.
Editing:
into
les1 file. [q OK] to enter.
screen
(➜ “Displaying
the be
editing
setting
2 files
recorded
onCombining
this unit can
combined
Select
“COMBINE”
in the
setting
“NEXT”
andpress
press(Da)
+, –+,to- select
“YES”
and
screen”,
page
Odaberite
"COMBINE"
na editing
zaslonu
za into 1 file.
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"YES"
7
21files
recorded
on 51).
this unit
can
be combined
6 Press
Select
“COMBINE”
in
the
editingFILE”
setting
to select
and press
1
6 Press
izmjena
(→
Press
– to
select
“PREVIOUS
ands
[q
OK]+,pritisnite
to– enter.
i zatim
[►“NEXT”
OK] za unos.
screen+,(➜
“Displaying
the"Prikaz
editingzaslona
setting
2 podešavanje
Select
“COMBINE”
in the editing
Press
+,
–
to
select
“NEXT”
and
press
screen
(➜
“Displaying
editing
setting
[q
OK]
enter.
1 postavkama
6
the
files
being
combined,
the
status
uređivanja",
51).setting
Pokazatelj
svijetli
dok seand
datoteke
Press
+,to
–statusa
toare
select
“YES”
press
screen”,
page
51).
press
[q
OK]
to
enter. the str.
7 While
screen
(➜
“Displaying
the
editing
setting
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“YES”
and
press
screen”,
page
51).
kombiniraju.
indicator
flashes.
7
da biste
"PREVIOUS
Press +, –+,to- select
theodabrali
le
“PREVIOUS
FILE” and
[q OK] to enter.
3
2 Pritisnite
pritisnete
[F2
(CLOSE)]
prije
nego
se is
+,
– enter.
to[F2
select
“YES”
andcombining
press
•• IfAko
you
press
(CLOSE)]
before
screen”,
51).
Press
+, –page
to select
“PREVIOUS
FILE” and
[q
OK]
to
7 Press
While
the
files
are
being
combined,
the
status
2 FILE"
(Prethodna
datoteka)
While
the
files
are
being
combined,
the
status
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
to
be combined
and
press i zatim
kombiniranje
završi,
proces
complete,
the
combine
process se
is the
cancelled.
While
theflashes.
files
are
beingponištava
combined,
status
Press
+, –OK]
to OK]
select
“PREVIOUS
FILE” and
[q
OK]
to
enter.
indicator
flashes.
press
[q
to
enter.
2
pritisnite
[►
za
unos.
indicator
OK]+,to– enter.
Press
to select the le
3 [q
indicator
flashes.
While
files[F2
are(CLOSE)]
being combined,
the status is
Ifkombiniranja.
youthe
press
[F2
(CLOSE)]
before combining
combining
is
press
[q
to and
enter.
Press
+, –OK]
the
le
•• If
you
press
before
+,to- select
da
biste
3 Pritisnite
When
the
file
in
another
to be selecting
combined
press
* Combined
files
cannot
be returned
their original
•
If you press
[F2
(CLOSE)]
beforeto
combining
is
indicator
flashes.
complete,
the
combine
process
is
cancelled.
complete,
the
combine
process
isvratiti
cancelled.
Press
+, –
tomove
select
the
le
to be you
combined
and
press
●● state.
Kombinirane
datoteke
nije
moguće
u izvorno
datoteku
koju
želite
3 odabrali
folder,
can
within
folder
It
is
recommended
that
you
make
backup
copies
the
combine
process
cancelled. is
[q OK] to enter.
• complete,
If you press
[F2
(CLOSE)]
beforeiscombining
stanje.
Preporučujemo
da
prethodno
napravite
to
be
combined
and
press
hierarchies
by
pressing
u.
(For
kombinirati
i
zatim
pritisnite
of
the
files
in
advance.
[q
OK]
to
enter.
When selecting
selecting the
the file
file in
in another
another
When
*
files
cannot
be
their
original
complete,
the
combine
process to
is cancelled.
* Combined
Combined
files
cannot
be returned
returned
to
their is
original
sigurnosne
kopije
datoteka.
*
indexed
files
are
combined,
the indexing
erased.
details
of to
file
and
folder
selection
When
selecting
the
file
in
another
[►
OK]
za
unos.
[q OK]
enter.
folder,
you
can
move
within
folder
* If
Combined
files
cannot
bethat
returned
to their
original
state.
you
backup
copies
folder,
you
can
move
within
folder
state. It
It is
is recommended
recommended
that
you make
make
backup
copies
4
4
5
4
4
5
5
5
methods,
folder
Pri
odabiru
datoteke
izwithin
druge
mape,
folder,
yousee
can
move
When
selecting
the 13.)
file
in
another
hierarchies
by page
pressing
u.
(For
hierarchies
by
pressing
u.
(For
možete
sefile
kretati
unutar
hijerarhija
hierarchies
byand
pressing
u.
(For
folder,
can
move
within
folder
details
of
folder
selection
details you
of
file
and
folder
selection
mape
pritiskom
na
.u.
(Detalje
o
details
of
and
folder
selection
hierarchies
pressing
(ForFILE”
Press
+,file
–byto
select
and press
methods,
see
page
13.)
methods,
see
page
13.)“NEXT
metodama
odabira
datoteka
i mapa
methods,
see
page
13.) selection
details
of to
file
and
folder
[q OK]
enter.
potražite
str.page
13.) 13.)
methods,na
see
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
Press +, – to select “NEXT
the le FILE”
to
and press
to- select
“NEXT
and press
Pritisnite
da
biste
odabrali
"NEXT
Press
[q
OK]+,to–+,
enter.
be combined
at the
back
ofFILE”
FILE"
(Sljedeća
datoteka)
zatim and
pritisnite
Press
+,to– enter.
to select
“NEXTi FILE”
press
[q
OK]
the
previous
le andthe
press
Press
+, – to select
le to
[►
OK]+,to
za
unos.
[q
OK]
enter.
Press
–
to
select
the

le
to
be
combined
at
the
back
of
[q OK] to enter.
Pritisnite
da
biste
Press
+, –+,to- select
the
le
be combined
at the
back
ofto
the previous
le and
press
odabrali
datoteku
koju
be
back
of
thecombined
previous
at
lethe
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
želite
kombinirati
na kraju
the
previous
le and
press
[q OK]
to enter.
prethodne
datoteke i zatim
[q OK] to enter.
mbined into 1 file. pritisnite
[► OK] za unos.
52
Pritisnite
da biste
g setting
+, –+,to- select
“NEXT” and press
6 Press
52
odabrali
ng setting 52
[q
OK] to"NEXT"
enter. i zatim
52
pritisnite
za“YES”
unos. and press
+, –[►
to OK]
select
525252 7 Press
FILE” and5252
[q OK] to enter.
ng les
52
While the files are being combined, the status
indicator flashes.
• If you press [F2 (CLOSE)] before combining is
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 52
●● state.
Akocombined
se is
kombiniraju
sthe
indeksima,
*
file
is datoteke
saved
in you
same
folder
ascopies
the
recommended
make
backup
of
in
* The
Combined
files
cannot
bethat
returned
to their
original
of the
the Itfiles
files
in advance.
advance.
files.
previous
indeksiranje
ćeare
se combined,
izbrisati.
of
the
files
in
advance.
*
If
indexed
files
the
indexing
is
erased.
state.
It
is
recommended
that
you
make
backup
copies
* If indexed files are combined, the indexing is erased.
Files
cannot
beadvance.
combined
in following
●● If
Kindexed
ombinirana
datoteka
sprema
seindexing
u istucases.
mapu
s
*
are
combined,
is erased.
The
combined
file
saved
as
the
filesfiles
in
* of
The
combined
file is
is
saved in
in the
the same
same folder
folder
as the
the
prethodnim
datotekama.
* Files
in thefiles.
MUSIC
folder,inOTHER
FOLDER
(as the
) or
The
combined
file (M)
is
saved
the same
folder
previous
*
If
indexed
files
are
combined,
indexing
is erased.
files.
previous
(be
)combined
folder.
recycle
bin
Datoteke
nije
moguće
kombinirati
u sljedećim
files.
previous
*
The
combined
file
is
saved
in
the
same
folder
as
Files
cannot
in
following
cases.
Files cannot be combined in following cases. the
*
When
battery
indicator
displays
“ FOLDER
” (blinking)
slučajevima.
Files
cannot
be combined
in OTHER
following
cases.(( or)) or
previous
*
inthe
the
MUSIC
(M)
* “Files
Files
thefiles.
MUSIC
(M) folder,
folder,
OTHER
FOLDER
or
”.in
●● recycle
Datoteke
mapama
(M), OTHER
FOLDER
*
Files
in bin
the u((MUSIC
(M) MUSIC
folder,
FOLDER
( ) or
Files
cannot
be
in OTHER
following
cases.
))combined
folder.
folder.
recycle
bin
* recycle
Combining
files
from
the
internal
memory
with( files
(
)
i
u
mapi
koša
za
smeće
(
).
(
)
folder.
bin
*
When
the
battery
indicator
displays
“
”
(blinking)
or
Files
in
the
MUSIC
(M)
folder,
OTHER
FOLDER
)
* When
theSD
battery
indicator displays “
” (blinking) or or
from
the
●● ““recycle
Kada
pokazatelj
baterije displays
prikazuje
“ (treperi)orili
*
When
the
indicator
“ “ ” (blinking)
”.
( card.
) folder.
binbattery
”.
* “When
If“ the”.total
file
size
after
combining
GB.
“.the battery
Combining
files
from
the
internal
with 2files
*
indicator
displays memory
“ will” exceed
(blinking)
or
Combining
files
from
the
internal
memory
files
*
IfKthere
isSD
less
free
memory
spacememory
than
thewith
size
of the
*
files
from
theizinternal
with
●● “Combining
ombiniranje
datoteka
unutarnje
memorije
sfiles
from
card.
”.the
from
the
SD
card.
“NEXT
FILE”.
from
card.
ssize
SD-kartice.
If
the
total
file
after
will
exceed
GB.
* Combining
files
from
thecombining
internal memory
with 2
Ifdatotekama
the the
totalSD
file
size
after
will
2files
GB.
If
the
recording
mode
of combining
the space
two files
is exceed
different.
*
*
If
total
filecard.
size
combining
will
exceed
GB.
there
is
less
free
memory
than
the
size
●● from
ko the
ukupna
veličina
nakon
kombiniranja
prelazi
2 the
GB.
*
IfAthe
there
isSD
less
free after
memory
space
than
the
size2 of
of
the
there
is
less
free
memory
space
than
the
size
of
the
“NEXT
FILE”.
*
If
the
total
file
size
after
combining
will
exceed
2
●● “NEXT
Ako ima
manje slobodne memorije od veličine GB.
FILE”.
“NEXT
FILE”.
the
recording
mode
of
the
two
files
is
different.
* If
there
is
less
free
memory
space
than
the
size
of
the
datoteke
("NEXT
Ifsljedeće
the recording
mode
of theFILE").
two files is different.
recording
mode ofdvije
the two
files israzličit.
different.
*
“NEXT
FILE”.
●● If
Athe
ko je
način snimanja
datoteke
* If the recording mode of the two files is different.
2012/05/29 9:35:47
Recorded
files
can
be
copied
or
moved
between
the
internal
card.
recording
files
or
folders
A, B, Cmemory
and
D. and
Datoteke snimljene
uzcopied
mikrofon
moguće
je kopirati
u mape
A,SD
B, C
i D. Microphone
Recorded
files can
can be
be
copied
or moved
moved among
between
thei premještati
internal
memory
and
SD
card.
Microphone
recording
files
can
A,
B,
D.
recording
filesdatoteke
can be
be copied
copied or
or moved
moved among
among folders
folders 4
A, Pritisnite
B, C
C and
and
D.
+,
da
biste
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
copy
Kopiranje
Copying le
mapu
i
Press
to
select
the
copy
4 odabrali
destination
press
Copying 
Press +,
+, –
–odredišnu
tofolder
selectand
the
copy
4
le
le
Select
“COPY”
in the
screen
Odaberite
"COPY"
naediting
zaslonusetting
za
zatim
pritisnite
[►and
OK]press
za
1Copying
destination
folder
[q
OK]
to
enter.
destination folder and press
“COPY”
in
editing
setting
screen
podešavanje
izmjena
(→ "Prikaz
zaslona
s
1
(➜
“Displaying
thethe
editing
setting
screen”,
unos.
Select
“COPY”
in
the
editing
setting
screen
1 Select
[q
[q OK]
OK] to
to enter.
enter.
(➜
“Displaying
the
editing
setting
screen”,
postavkama
uređivanja",
str.
51).
page
51).
(➜ “Displaying the editing setting screen”,
Press +, –+,to- select
“YES”
and press
5
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"YES" (Da) i
page
51).
+, –+,to- select
theodabrali
le to be
copied
Pritisnite
da biste
datoteku
2 Press
page
51).
Press
+,
to
select
“YES”
and
press
5
[q
OK]pritisnite
to–
enter.
zatim
[► OK]
za unos.
Press
+,
–
to
select
“YES”
and
press
5
Press
+, –
– to
to
select
the
le
le
to be
be copied
copied
2
press
[q
OK] to
enter.
koju
želite
kopirati
zatim
pritisnite
[► OK]
Press
+,
select
the

to
While
theto
file
is being
copied,
status indicator
[q
enter.
Pokazatelj
statusa
svijetli
dok the
se datoteka
kopira.
2 and
[q OK]
OK]
to
enter.
•and
selecting
the file
another folder, you can
and
press
[q
to
enter.
zaWhen
unos.
flashes.
While
press
[q OK]
OK]
to in
enter.
While the
the file
file is
is being
being copied,
copied, the
the status
status indicator
indicator
Press
+,
select
the
Pritisnite
da
biste
destination
Press
+, –
–+to
to-(“INTERNAL
select
the copy
copy
destination
(“INTERNAL
odabrali
odredište
kopiranja
MEMORY”
or
“microSD
destination (“INTERNAL
MEMORY”
or
“microSD
("INTERNAL
MEMORY"
ili
CARD”)
and
[q OK]
MEMORY”
orpress
“microSD
CARD”)
and
press
OK]
"microSD
CARD")
zatim
to
enter.
CARD”) and press i[q
[q
OK]
pritisnite
to
to enter.
enter. [► OK] za unos.
flashes.
Premještanje
datoteka
flashes.
Moving

les
Odaberite "MOVE" u koraku
s lijeve strane da biste
Moving

Moving
les
les
Select
“MOVE”
in stepRadnja
theista
leftkao
to move
files. The
premjestili
datoteke.
za kopiranje
1 on je
operation
is thein
for file
Select
“MOVE”
step
on
left
to
datoteka.
1
Select
“MOVE”
insame
step as
on the
the
left copy.
to move
move files.
files. The
The
1 that
operation
operation is
is the
the same
same as
as that
that for
for file
file copy.
copy.
* If you press [F2 (CLOSE)] before copying or moving is complete, the process is cancelled.
Files
inpress
the MUSIC
(M) folder,
OTHER
( ili
)is
recycle bin
) folder
be copied or moved.
*
you
[F2
(CLOSE)]
before
copying
moving
complete,
the
process
is
cancelled.
*
IfAko
youpritisnete
press
[F2[F2
(CLOSE)]
before
copying
or
moving
isor
complete,
the(završi,
process
iscannot
cancelled.
●● If
(CLOSE)]
prije
negoFOLDER
se or
kopiranje
premještanje
proces
se poništava.
“ FOLDER
” (blinking)
”, files
cannot
copied
or moved.
*
indicator
displays
Files
in
the
MUSIC
(M)
OTHER
FOLDER
recycle
bin
))be
folder
be
or
●● When
Datoteke
izbattery
mapa MUSIC
(M),
OTHER
( (( or)))“ilior
koša
( cannot
) nije
moguće
kopirati
ili premjestiti.
*
Files
inthe
the
MUSIC
(M) folder,
folder,
OTHER
FOLDER
ormape
recycle
binza(( smeće
folder
cannot
be copied
copied
or moved.
moved.
IfKada
the size
of
the file
to be copied
or moved
of
free space
in moguće
the
file cannot be
““ kao
”” (blinking)
or
““ amount
”,
be
or
moved.
*
the
battery
indicator
displays
●● When
se
baterije
prikazuje
“ exceeds
” (treperi)
ili
”, datoteke
nije
kopirati the
ili premjestiti.
(blinking)
orthe
”, “files
files cannot
cannot
be copied
copied
ordestination,
moved.
*
When
thepokazatelj
battery
indicator
displays
copied
or
moved.
*
If
the
size
of
the
file
to
be
copied
or
moved
exceeds
the
amount
of
free
space
in
the
destination,
the
file
be
●
datoteke
želite kopirati
ili premjestiti
premašuje
slobodnog
mjesta na odredištu,
datoteku
*● IfAko
theveličina
size of the
file to koju
be copied
or moved
exceeds the
amount ofkoličinu
free space
in the destination,
the file cannot
cannot
be
copied
or
nije moguće
kopirati ili premjestiti.
copied
or moved.
moved.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
3
3
3
move
withindatoteke
folder
hierarchies
by folder,
pressing
••• When
selecting
the
another
you
can
Pri odabiru
iz in
druge
mape,
možete
se
When
selecting
the file
file
in
another
folder,
youu.
can
(For
details
offolder
file and
folder
selection
methods,
move
within
hierarchies
by
kretati
unutar
hijerarhija
mapa
pritiskom
na u.
move
within
folder
hierarchies
by pressing
pressing
u. .
(Detalje
o13.)
metodama
datotekamethods,
i mapa
see
page
(For
details
of file
file and
and odabira
folder selection
selection
methods,
(For
details
of
folder
potražite
na
13.)in the LINE (LINE_SD) folder,
• see
When
copying
see
page
13.)str.files
page
13.)
Kada
kopirate
datoteke
iz mape(LINE_SD)
LINE (LINE_SD),
go
to step
••
copying
5 . files
• When
When
copying
files in
in the
the LINE
LINE (LINE_SD) folder,
folder,
prijeđite
korak 5 .
go
5
Press
+, –nato
go to
to step
step
5 .. select the copy
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Editing:
Copying
or moving
les
Uređivanje:
Kopiranje
ili premještanje
datoteka
Editing:
Copying
or
moving
memory
les
Recorded
can be
copiedjeorkopirati
movedilibetween
the sinternal
and SD
card. Microphone
Snimljene files
datoteke
moguće
premještati
unutarnje
memorije
na SD-karticu
i obratno.
53
53
53
53
53
53
Recycle
bin
function
Funkcija
koša
za smeće
Recycle
bin
function
Recycle
bin
function
When
When
deleting
deleting
files
files
with
with
the
the
recycle
recycle
bin
bin
function
set
set to
to ON,
ON, deleted
deleted
files
files are
are
moved
moved
to
to the
the recycle
recycle
bin
bin se
Kada brišete datoteke s funkcijom
koša
zafunction
smeće podešenom
na
ON (Uklj.),
obrisane
datoteke
premještaju
When
deleting
files with
the recycle
bin
function
set
to
deleted
files
are
moved
to
the
recycle bin
When
deleting
with
recycle
bin
function
set
to ON,
ON,
deleted
files
are
moved
to recycle
the
bin
( mapu
) folder
(excluding
MUSIC
(M)
folder
or OTHER
OTHER
FOLDER
))).). Files
Files
moved
to the
the
recycle
bin can
can
(u
(excluding
MUSIC
(M)
folder
FOLDER
(((( )(M)
moved
to
bin
koša
zafiles
smeće
( the
) (ne
vrijedi
za or
datoteke
iz mapa
MUSIC
i OTHER
FOLDER
( recycle
)). Datoteke
(( ))) folder
folder
(excluding
MUSIC
(M)
folder
or
OTHER
FOLDER
)). Files
moved
to
the
recycle
bin
folder
(excluding
MUSIC
(M)
folder
or
OTHER
FOLDER
(
)
).
Files
moved
to
the
recycle
bin can
can
be
returned
to
the
original
folders,
so
you
do
not
have
to
worry
about
deleting
files
by
mistake.
be
returned
to
the
folders,
so
you
not
have
to
worry
deleting
files
by
mistake.
koje
se premjeste
uoriginal
koš za smeće
moguće
jedo
vratiti
uhave
izvorne
mapeabout
tako da
se ne morate
brinuti
o slučajnom
be
returned
to
the
original
folders,
so
you
do
not
to
worry
about
deleting
files
by
mistake.
be
returned
to theAko
original
folders,
so
you
dojenot
have
to worry
about
deleting
files
by
mistake.
Ifbrisanju
If
files
files
are
are
deleted
deleted
with
with
the
the
recycle
recycle
bin
bin
function
function
set
set
to
to
OFF,
OFF,
deleted
deleted
files
files
are
are
completely
completely
erased
erased
without
without
datoteka.
se
datoteke
izbrišu
dok
funkcija
koša
za
smeće
postavljena
na
OFF
(Isklj.),
izbrisane
If files
files are
are deleted
deleted with
with the
the recycle
recycle bin
bin function
function set
set to
to OFF,
OFF, deleted
deleted files
files are
are completely
completely erased
erased without
without
If
being
being
moved
moved
to
the
recycle
recycle
bin
(The
(The
factory
factory setting
setting
is
is
“ON”.).
“ON”.).
datoteke
brišuto
sethe
u potpunosti
i ne
premještaju
u koš za
being
moved
recycle bin
bin
(The
setting
issmeće)
“ON”.).(Tvornička postavka je "ON".)
being
moved to
tothe
the
(The factory
factory
Returning
lesrecycle
in thebinrecycle
binsetting
to is “ON”.).
Returning
Returning

les
in
the
recycle
recycle
bin
bin
to
Returning
les
les in
in the
the
recycle
bin to
to
Vraćanje
datoteka
iz koša
za smeće
Returning

les
in
the
recycle
bin
to
the
original
folder
original
folder
the
original
folder
uthe
izvornu
mapu
the original folder
Press [STOP
[STOP g/RETURN]
g/RETURN] to
to stop
stop the
the unit.
unit.
•••• Press
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to da
stop
thezaustavili
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
biste
uređaj.
••Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the unit.
11
1
1
22
2
2
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
33
3
3
54
54
54
54
54545454
54
54
44
4
4
55
5
5
Press
Press
[F2
[F2 (FOLDER)].
(FOLDER)].
Press
(FOLDER)].
Pritisnite
(FOLDER)].
Press [F2
[F2 [F2
(FOLDER)].
Press
Press
+,
+,
–,
–,
u,
u,
i
to select
select
“““ ”””odabrali
and
and
press
press
Pritisnite
+,
-, i
, to
da biste
Press
+,
–,
u,
i
select
and
+,to
u,
i to
to [►
select
and press
press
[q
OK]
to–,enter.
enter.
“Press
“ i zatim
pritisnite
OK]“za”unos.
[q
OK]
[q
OK]
to
enter.
[q
to bin
enter.
TheOK]
recycle
folders exist in the internal memory
Mape
koša za
u unutarnjoj
memoriji
The
The
recycle
bin
bin
folders
folders
exist
exist
in
the
internal
internal
memory
The recycle
recycle
binsmeće
folderspostoje
exist in
inithe
the
internal memory
memory
recycle
folders exist in the internal memory
and
SD
card
respectively.
iThe
na SD
SD-kartici.
and
and
SD
card
cardbin
respectively.
respectively.
and
SD
card
respectively.
and
card
respectively.
Koristite
,to
da biste
Use
UseSD
u,
u,
i
i
to select
select
the
the
Use
u,
i
to
select
the
Use
u,want
i to
to
select
1
datoteku
koju the 1
odabrali

le
le
you
you
want
to
return,
return,
1

le
you
want
to
return,
1

le
you
want
to
return,
2
2
and
press
[ERASE/
želite
vratiti
i
zatim
pritisnite
and
press
[ERASE/
2
and
press
[ERASE/
2
and
press
[ERASE/
[ERASE/
A-B
] za unos.
A-B&]
A-B&]
to
to
enter.
enter.
A-B&]
to
enter.

Pohranjena
mapa
prije
brisanja
A-B&]
to
enter.
Stored folder
folder
before
deletion
Stored
Stored
before
deletion
1
1
Stored folder
folder before
before deletion
deletion
1
Stored
folderbefore
before
deletion

Broj
datoteke
prije brisanja
File number
number
before
deletion
1File
File
number
before
deletion
deletion
2
2
2
File
number
before
deletion
File number
deletion
2
Pritisnite
-before
da biste
odabrali "RESTORE
Press
Press
+,
+,
––+,
to
to
select
select
“RESTORE
“RESTORE
FILE”
FILE”
and
and
Press
+,
to
select
“RESTORE
FILE”
Press
+, –
–OK]
todatoteku)
select
“RESTORE
FILE” and
and
FILE"
(Vrati
i zatim pritisnite
[►
press
press
[q
[q
OK]
to
to
enter.
enter.
press
[q
OK]
to
OK]
za+,
unos.
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
enter.
Press
Press
+,
–
–
to
to
select
select
“YES”
“YES”
and
and
press
press
Press
+,
–
to
“YES”
and
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"YES" (Da)
Press
+,to
–+,
to- select
select
“YES”
and press
press
[q
[q
OK]
OK]
to
enter.
enter.
[q
OK]
to
enter.
iThe
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
[q
OK]
to
enter.
The status
status indicator
indicator flashes,
flashes, and
and the
the
selected file
file is
is
The
status
indicator
flashes,
and
the
selected
selected
file
is
The status statusa
indicatortreperi
flashes,
and the selected
file is
Pokazatelj
ioriginal
odabrana
datotekafile
The
status
indicator
flashes,
and the
selected
is
returned
to the
the end
end of
of
the original
original
folder.
returned
returned
to
to
the
end
of
the
folder.
folder.
returned
to
the
end
of the
themape.
original
folder. [► OK] za
vraća
se
na
kraj
izvorne
Pritisnite
returned
the
of the
original
folder.
Press [q
[q to
OK]
toend
return
to the
the
screen
in step
step 33 ...
Press
Press
[q
OK]
OK]
to
to
return
return
to
to
the
screen
screen
in
in
step
Press [q OK]zaslon
to return
to the screen
in step
povratak
prikazan
korakuin
. 3 ..
Press [q na
OK] to return
to theuscreen
step
3
* IfIf
If “✽
“✽ FOLDER
FOLDER FULL.
FULL.CAN’T
CAN’T RESTORE”
RESTORE” is
is displayed,
displayed,
*
*
“✽
FOLDER
FULL.
RESTORE”
is
* If
“✽
FOLDER
FULL. CAN’T
CAN’T
RESTORE”
is displayed,
displayed,
✽Afolder
folder
has reached
reached
the maximum
maximum
recordable
number
*
“✽
FOLDER
FULL.
CAN’T
RESTORE”
is displayed,
●●✽If
ko
se has
prikaže
“ FOLDER
FULL.recordable
CAN'T
✽
folder
has
reached
the
the
maximum
recordable
number
number
✽RESTORE",
folder
has reached
reached
the
maximum
recordable
number
(199).
Delete
files
in
the
folder,
and
then
try
the

mapa
je
dosegla
maksimalni
broj
✽
folder
has
the
maximum
recordable
number
(199).
(199).
Delete
Delete
files
files
in
in
the
the
folder,
folder,
and
and
then
then
try
try
the
the
(199).
Delete
files
in
the
folder,
and
then
try
the i
mogućih
snimki
(199).
Izbrišite
datoteke
iz
mape
procedure
again
from
the
beginning.
(199).
Delete
files
in
the
folder,
and
then
try
the
procedure
procedure again
again from
from the
the beginning.
beginning.
procedure
again
from
the
beginning.
ponovite postupak
ispočetka.
procedure
again from
the beginning.
Emptying
Emptying
the
the
recycle
recycle
bin
folder
folder
Emptying
recycle
bin
folder
Pražnjenje
mape
košabin
za smeće
Emptying the
the
recycle
bin
folder
When the
the recycle
recycle bin
bin folder
folder is
is emptied,
emptied, all
all of
of the
the files
files
When
When
the
recycle
bin
folder
is
all
of
the
files
When
themapa
recycle
binza
folder
is emptied,
emptied,
all
of se
thedatoteke
files
Kada
se
koša
smeće
isprazni,
sve
in
the
recycle
bin
are
completely
deleted.
Be
sure
to
When
the recycle
bincompletely
folder
is emptied,
all
of sure
the files
in
in
the
recycle
recycle
bin
bin are
are
completely
deleted.
deleted.
Be
Be
sure
to
to
sure
to
izthe
koša
za
smeće
brišu.
Obavezno
spremite
sve
podatke
in
the
recycle
bin data
are
completely
deleted.
Be
save
all
required
onto
a
computer
or
other
external
in
the
recycle
bin
are
completely
deleted.
Be
sure
to
save
save
all
all
required
required
data
data
onto
onto
aa
computer
computer
or
or
other
other
external
external
koji
su
vam
potrebni
na
računalo
ili
vanjski
uređaj
prije
save
all
required
data
onto
a
computer
or
other
external
device
before
emptying
the
recycle
bin
folder.
save
all
required
data
onto
a
computer
or
other
external
device
device
before
before
emptying
emptying
the
the
recycle
bin
folder.
pražnjenja
koša
za smeće.
device
before
emptying
the recycle
recycle bin
bin folder.
folder.
device
before
emptying
the
recycle
bin
folder.
Press [STOP
[STOP g/RETURN]
g/RETURN] to
to stop
stop the
the unit.
unit.
•••• Press
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
the
unit.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
stop
thezaustavili
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
uređaj.
• •Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the unit.
11
1
1
22
2
2
33
3
3
Press
Press
[ERASE/A-B&].
[ERASE/A-B&].
Pritisnite
[ERASE/A-B ].
Press
[ERASE/A-B&].
Press
[ERASE/A-B&].
Press
+, ––+,
to-select
select
“EMPTY
RECYCLE
Press
+,
to
“EMPTY
RECYCLE
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"EMPTY
Press
+,
–
to
“EMPTY
RECYCLE
Press
+, –press
to select
select
“EMPTY
RECYCLE
BIN”
and
press
[q OK]
OK]
to enter.
enter.
BIN”
and
[q
to
RECYCLE
BIN"
i zatim
pritisnite
[► OK] za unos.
BIN”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
When
the
recycle
bin
folder
is
selected,
select
BIN”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
When
When
the
the
recycle
recycle
bin
folder
is
is
selected,
selected,
select
Kada se
mapa
koša
smeće,select
odaberite
When
theodabere
recycle bin
bin folder
folder
isza
selected,
select
When
thein
recycle
binand
folder
is selected,
select
press
[q
OK].
“EMPTY”
in
step
"EMPTY"
(Isprazni)
uand
koraku
i pritisnite
[► OK].
and
press
press
[q
[q
OK].
OK].
“EMPTY”
“EMPTY”
in
step
step
and
press
[q
OK].
“EMPTY”
in
step 22
2
and
press
[q
OK].
“EMPTY”
in
step
2 biste
Pritisnite
+,
-select
da
odabrali
"YES" (Da) i
Press
Press
+,
+,
––
to
to
select
“YES”
“YES”
and
and
press
press
Press
+,
–
to
select
“YES”
and
press
Press
+,to
–enter.
to select
“YES”
press
zatim
pritisnite
[► OK]
za and
unos.
[q
[q
OK]
OK]
to
enter.
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Pokazatelj
statusa
i mapa
koša
za smeće
[q
OK]
toindicator
enter.treperi
The
status
indicator
flashes,
and the
the
recycle
bin se
The
The
status
status
indicator
flashes,
flashes,
and
and
the
recycle
recycle
bin
bin
The
status
indicator flashes, and the recycle bin
prazni.
folder
is emptied.
emptied.
The
status
indicator flashes, and the recycle bin
folder
folder
is
folder is
is emptied.
emptied.
●● Kfolder
ada se
is funkcija
emptied.koša za smeće podesi na "ON",
moguće
vrijemebin
snimanja
(slobodni
prostor)
ne
* When
When
the recycle
recycle
bin
function is
is“ON”,
“ON”, possible
possible
remaining
*
*
the
the
recycle
bin
function
function
is
possible
remaining
remaining
* When
When
the time
recycle
binni
function
is “ON”,
“ON”,
possibleeven
remaining
povećava
se(free
čak
ako does
obrišete
datoteke.
Daifififbiste
recording
(free
space)
does
not increase
increase
files
* recording
When
thetime
recycle
bin
function
is “ON”,
possible
remaining
recording
time
(free
space)
space)
does
not
not
even
even
files
recording
time
(free
space)
does
not increase
increase
even
if files
files
povećali
preostalo
vrijeme
snimanja,
ispraznite
koš
za
are
deleted.
To
increase
the
remaining
recording
time,
empty
recording
time
(free
space)
does
not
increase
even
if files
are
are deleted.
deleted.To
To increase
increase the
the remaining
remaining recording
recording time,
time,
empty
empty
are
deleted.
To
increase
the
remaining
recording
time,
empty
smeće
(
)
i
izbrišite
datoteke
u
potpunosti.
the
recycle
bin
(
)
folder
and
erase
the
files
completely.
are
deleted.
To
increase
the
remaining
recording
time,
empty
the
the recycle
recycle bin
bin (( )) folder
folder and
and erase
erase the
the files
files completely.
completely.
the
recycle
bin
(
)
folder
and
erase
the
files
completely.
the recycle bin ( ) folder and erase the files completely.
■
STOP
STOP g/RETURN
/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
STOP g/RETURN
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Za
izlaz
iz zaslona
Audio
can
be
recorded
at to
the
set
date
andthe
time.
The
timer
canbeforehand.
alsozabepostavljanje
used
an 11)
•• Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
stop
the
unit.
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da
biste
alarm
by
playing
back
files
or
sounds.
Set
clock
correctly
(➜as
page
*
Be
sure
to perform
thebe
“OK”
operation
Audio
can
be
recorded
at the
set
date
and time.
The
timer
can also
used
as
anin
alarm
by[STOP
playing
back filestoor
sounds.
Set the*
clock
correctly
beforehand.
(➜
pagein11)
pritisnite
[F2
(CLOSE)].
• Press
g/RETURN]
stop
the unit.
zaustavili
uređaj.
step
.
If
this
operation
is
not
performed,
Be
sure
to
perform
the
“OK”
operation
5
Press
[MENU].
alarm
by
playing
back
files
or
sounds.
Set
the
clock
correctly
beforehand.
(➜
page
11)
1
• Press [STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
*
Be
sure
perform
the “OK”
operation
timer
not
operate
correctly.
If a in
button
step
Ifwill
this
operation
is
not
performed,
5 . to
Press
[MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
●● the
Obavezno
izvršite
radnju
"OK"
u koraku
•1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
*
Be
sure
to
perform
the “OK”
operation
in 5 .
Press
+,
–
to
select
“COMMON
•2
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
step
.
If
this
operation
is
not
performed,
5
such
as
[F2
(CLOSE)]
is
pressed
while
the
timer
will
not
operate
correctly.
If
a
button
Press [MENU].
* Be
to izvršite,
perform mjerač
the “OK”
operation
in
1 Pritisnite
Akosure
je
ne
vremena
neće
step
. Ifwill
thisnot
operation
is
not performed,
5 the
da biste
odabrali
+,and
–+,to-press
select
“COMMON
[MENU].
2 Press
MENU”
[q
OK]
to enter.
the
timer
operate
correctly.
If poput
a button
1
setting
timer,
“REGISTER
SETTING?”
such
as
(CLOSE)]
is is
pressed
while
step
Ifraditi.
this
operation
notgumb
performed,
5 . [F2
ispravno
Ako
pritisnete
Press
[MENU].
1
the
timer
will
not
operate
correctly.
If
a
button
Press
+,
–
to
select
“COMMON
"COMMON
MENU"
i
zatim
pritisnite
2
MENU”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
such
asthe
[F2
(CLOSE)]
is pressed
may
be
displayed.
Select
“YES”
orwhile
“NO”
and
setting
timer,
“REGISTER
SETTING?”
Press +,
+, –
– to
to select
select “COMMON
“TIMER &
the
will
not
operate
correctly.
If a button
3
[F2timer
(CLOSE)]
dok
postavljate
mjerač
Press
2
such
asthe
[F2timer,
(CLOSE)]
is pressed
while
OK]+,and
za
unos.
MENU”
press
[q
OK]
toto
enter.
Press
–and
to
select
“COMMON
setting
“REGISTER
SETTING?”
press
[qdisplayed.
OK]
to enter.
may
be
Select
“YES”
orwhile
“NO” and
“TIMER
&
2
such
as
[F2
(CLOSE)]
is
pressed
3 [►
ALARM”
press
[q
OK]
enter.
vremena,
mogla
bi
se
prikazati
poruka
MENU” and press [q OK] to enter.
setting
the
timer,
“REGISTER
SETTING?”
may
be
displayed.
Select
or “NO” and
Press
+,and
–+,
to-press
select
“TIMER
&enter.
* setting
The
sound
volume
at the “YES”
timer
playback
is
press
[q
OK]
to enter.
Pritisnite
da
biste
odabrali
MENU”
[q
3
the
timer,
“REGISTER
SETTING?”
ALARM”
press
[qOK]
OK]toto
"REGISTER
SETTING?"
(Zapamtiti
Set items
such
as
4
may
be
Select “YES”
or “NO” and
Press
+, –and
to select
“TIMER
& enter.
3
press
[qdisplayed.
OK]
to enter.
the
same
volume
* may
The
sound
volume
atwhen
the
timer
playback
is
as
the(Da)
timer
set.
ALARM”
and
press
[q
OK]pritisnite
to
ALARM"
i“TIMER
zatim
be
displayed.
Select
“YES”
or “NO”
and
Press
+,&–
to select
& enter.
postavku?).
Odaberite
'YES"
iliwas
"NO"
Set
items
such
as
3
4 "TIMER
the
date
and
time,
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
ALARM” and press [q OK] to enter.
* The
sound
volume
the
timer
playback
the
volume
Set
the
appropriate
sound
volume
before
asat
when
theza
timer
was is
set.
press
OK]
to enter.
(Ne)same
i [q
zatim
pritisnite
[► OK]
unos.
Set
items
such
as
OK]
za
unos.
ALARM”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
4 [►
the
date
and
time,
*
The
sound
volume
at
the
timer
playback
is
and items
soundsuch
source.
Set
as
same
volume
asat
when
the
timer
was is
set.
setting
the
timer.
Set
the
appropriate
sound
volume
before
4
*
The
sound
volume
the timer
playback
●● the
the
Glasnoća
kod
reprodukcije
nakon
pokretanja
the
date
and
time,
Set
items
such
as
Postavite
stavke
same
volume assound
when volume
the timerbefore
was set.
4 For
on source.
the
and
sound
Set
the the
appropriate
setting
timer. as
thedetails
date
and
time,
mjerača
vremena
bit
će
ista
kao
i
u
trenutku
the
same
volume
when
the
timer
was
set.
kao
što
Set the the
appropriate
sound volume before
anddetails
sound
source.
the
date
and
time,
items,
seesu
page
56.
For
ondatum
the
setting
timer.
postavljanja
mjerača
vremena.
Postavite
Set
the appropriate
sound
volume
before
sound
source.
setting the timer.
For
details
the56.
iand
vrijeme
ionizvor
items,
see page
and
sound
source.
odgovarajuću
glasnoću prije postavljanja
setting
the timer.
For
details
on the56.
items,
see+,page
zvuka.
For
details
on
the
– to
select
1 Press
mjerača vremena.
items,
see
page
56. the item and press
Detalje
o
stavkama
items,
see+,to
page
56. the item and press
[q OK]
–enter.
to select
1 Press
potražite
na
str.
56.
–,
u,
ithe
to select
thepress
setting
to
select
item and
2 Press
[q OK]+,
to–
enter.
1
Press
+,
–
to
select
item and
press
1
and
press
[q
OK]
tothe
enter.
[q
OK]
Press
+,
–,
u,
i
to
select
the
setting
2

+,enter.
- da
biste
odabrali
stavku
Press
+,to
–
to
select
the
item and
press
1 Pritisnite
[q
OK]
to
enter.
+,
u,
i
to
the the
setting
Repeat
steps
and
to select
complete
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
2
1
2
iPress
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za unos.
[q
OK]
to–,
enter.
Press
+,
–,
u,
i
to
select
the
setting
2
and
press
OK]
settings.
Repeat
steps
and
to
complete
the
1
2enter.

Pritisnite
-,
, to
daselect
biste the
odabrali
Press
+, +,
–,[q
u,
i
to
setting
2
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Repeat
steps
and
to
complete
the
1
2
settings.
postavku
i
zatim
pritisnite
[►
OK]
za
unos.
+,
– to
“OK” and press
and press
[qselect
OK] to enter.
5 Press
Repeat
steps 1 and 2 to complete the
settings.
korake

i
da
dovršili
Press
+,
–
to
select
“OK”
and
press
Repeat
steps
and
to biste
complete
the
1
2
5 Ponovite
[q
OK]
to
enter.
settings.
Press
to select “OK” and press
settings.
5 postavljanje.
[q
OK]+,
to–
Press
– enter.
to select
“OK”
and press
To
exit
the+,to
setting
screen,
press
5
[q
OK]
enter.
Press
+, –+,
to- select
“OK”
and press
Pritisnite
da biste
odabrali
"OK"
5
To
exit
the
setting
OK] to enter.screen, press
[F2 [q
(CLOSE)].
OK]
to
enter.screen,
i[q
zatim
pritisnite
[► OK]press
za unos.
To
exit
the
setting
[F2
(CLOSE)].
To exit
the setting screen, press
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
To
the setting screen, press
[F2 (CLOSE)].
[F2 (CLOSE)].
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
ERASE/A-B
ERASE/A-B&
ERASE/A-B&
MENU
MENU
ERASE/A-B&
ERASE/A-B&
F2
MENU
ERASE/A-B&
MENU F2
MENU F2
MENU
F2
F2
Using the timer
Korištenje
mjerača vremena
Using
the
Zvuk
secan
može
snimati
natimer
određeni
datum
u određeno
vrijeme.
vremena
može
koristiti i
Audio
be
recorded
at the set
datei and
time. The
timerMjerač
can also
be used
assean
Using
the
timer
Audio
canna
benačin
recorded
at the
date
andthe
time.
Thecorrectly
timer
canbeforehand.
alsopodesite
be used
as
anstr.
kao
alarm
da setimer
reproduciraju
datoteke
ili zvukovi.
Prvo ispravno
sat.
(→
11)
alarm
by
playing
back
files
or set
sounds.
Set
clock
(➜
page
11)
Using
the
Using
the
timer
Audio
canplaying
be recorded
at the
date Set
andthe
time.
Thecorrectly
timer canbeforehand.
also be used
an 11)
alarm by
back files
or set
sounds.
clock
(➜as
page
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
Korištenje mjerača vremena
Stavka
postavljanja
SETTING
(Postavka)
Detalji
OFF: Mjerač vremena ne radi.
ON:: Mjerač vremena radi.
REPEAT
ONCE: Snimanje ili reprodukcija
(Ponavljanje) izvršavaju se samo jednom.
DAILY: Snimanje ili reprodukcija
izvršavaju se svaki dan.
SELECT: Snimanje ili reprodukcija
izvršavaju se svaki tjedan na odabrani dan.
 Pritisnite +, - da biste odabrali dan
i pomoću gumba [► OK] dodajte
kvačicu. (Ponovno pritisnite [► OK] da
biste poništili odabir.)
 Nakon odabiranja dana, odaberite
"OK" i pritisnite [► OK].
TIME*
(Vrijeme)
VQT4J69
1
56
56
Postavljanje vremena pokretanja i
zaustavljanja
Odaberite stavku (odaberite sat
i minute pokretanja i sat i minutu
zaustavljanja) pomoću
,
i
postavite je pomoću +,-.
• Razdoblje između pokretanja i
zaustavljanja može se postaviti na
maksimalno 12 sati.
REC/PLAY
PLAY: Reproducira se postavljena
(Snimanje/
datoteka ili reproducira zvuk alarma.
reprodukcija) REC: Snima se postavljeni izvor zvuka.
Stavka
postavljanja
Detalji
PLAY*2
ALARM: Reproducira se zvuk alarma.
(Reprodukcija) FILE: Reproducira se datoteka.
Prikazuje se popis datoteka za
odabranu mapu.
Pritisnite +, - da biste odabrali datoteku
i zatim pritisnite [► OK]. Kada datoteke
odabirete tako da mijenjate mape,
pritisnite
i na taj se način krećite kroz
hijerarhije. (Detalje o metodama odabira
datoteka i mapa potražite na str. 13.)
SOURCE*3
(Izvor)
MIC: Snimanje uz uporabu mikrofona.
LINE: Snima se zvuk s vanjskog uređaja.
MODE*3
(Način rada)
PCM 44,1kHz, MP3 320kb/s,
MP3 192kb/s, MP3 128kb/s,
MP3 64kb/s, MP3 32kb/s
REC TO*3
(Snimanje u
mapu)
Odaberite mapu u koju će se spremiti
snimljena datoteka.
• Ako odaberete mapu za SD-karticu,
umetnite SD-karticu.
*1 Kada postavljate vrijeme pokretanja i zaustavljanja,
nemojte pomiješati a.m. i p.m.
AM12:00 označava ponoć ,a PM12:00 podne. Kada
izvršavate snimanje mjeračem vremena u ponoć,
postavite vrijeme pokretanja na "AM12:00".
*2 Prikazuje se kada se "PLAY" odabere za "REC/PLAY".
*3 Prikazuje se kada se "REC" odabere za "REC/PLAY".
Timer indication
: Mjerač
Timer is set. The postavljen.
display flashes
when
the timer
Oznaka
treperi
na is
: Timer isvremena
set. The display flashes
when
the timer
is
executed.
executed.
zaslonu
nakon izvršenja mjerača vremena.
: When the repeat settings are “ONCE”, this is dis: Kada
Whensu
thepostavke
repeat settings
are “ONCE”,
thisnais disponavljanja
podešene
: Timer
The display
flashes
when
thethe
timer
is
playedisif set.
the timer
recording
fails.
To clear
display,
played if the
timer
recording
fails. ako
To clear
the display,
"ONCE",
ta settings
se
oznaka
pojavljuje
je snimanje
executed.
change the
to “OFF”,
or set the
timer again.
change
the
settings
to
“OFF”,
or
set
the
timer
again.
vremena
neuspješno.
Da
: mjeračem
When the repeat
settings
“ONCE”,
thisobrisali
is dis-this
setting
isare
“DAILY”
orbiste
“SELECT”,
: zaslon,
When the
repeat setting
is “DAILY”
or “SELECT”,
this
postavke
na "OFF"
ponovno
played
ifpromijenite
the iftimer
recording
fails.
To clear
the
display,
is displayed
the timer
recording
fails.
Ifilithe
next
timer
is displayed if the timer recording fails. If the next timer
change
settings
to ““OFF”,
or set the
timer again.
postavite
mjerač
vremena.
operatesthe
normally,
the
” indication
is redisplayed.
operates normally, the “ ” indication is redisplayed.
: Kada
Whensu
thepostavke
repeat setting
is “DAILY”
or “SELECT”,
this
ponavljanja
podešene
na
is
displayed
theattimer
recording
fails.
If the
next
timer
* If "DAILY"
the
power
isifoff
the specified
time,
the
power
ili "SELECT",
se oznaka
pojavljuje
ako
* If the power
is off at the ta
specified
time,
the power
operates
normally,
therecording
“vremena
” indication
isand
redisplayed.
turns
on and
the
timer
starts,
then
je
snimanje
mjeračem
neuspješno.
Akothe
turns
on and the
timer recording
starts,
and then
the
power
turns
off atvremena
the end time.
the power
off
sljedeći
mjerač
budeWhen
normalno
radio, is
power
turns
offoff
at at
thethe
end
time.
When
the
power
is off
* If
the
power
is
specified
time,
the
power
atponovno
timer playback
time, thepokazatelj
file playback
starts
a little
će
se
prikazati
“
“.
at
timer
playback
time,
the
file
playback
starts
a
little
turns
and
the timer time.
recording starts, and then the
behindonthe
scheduled
the
scheduled
time.time.
power
off
at thevrijeme
end
When
the
power
is off
●● behind
Ako je turns
utimer
postavljeno
uređaj
ugašen,
uređaj
*
During
recording
(playback),
only
stop
operation
* During
timer
recording
(playback),
only
stop
operation
at
playback
time,će
the
file
starts
a little
ćetimer
se
upaliti
i započet
snimanje.
Kada
istekne
and
volume
adjustment
can
beplayback
performed.
Switch
the
and
volume
adjustment
can
be
performed.
Switch
the
behind
the scheduled
time.operation
postavljeno
vrijeme,
uređaj
će se ugasiti.
Hold
function
to off before
if it isKada
on. je
Hold
function
to off
before
operation
ifsitmjeračem
is on.operation
*
During
timer
recording
(playback),
only
stop
uređaj
isključen
tijekom
reprodukcije
* To stop an alarm, press one of the buttons on this unit.
* and
To
stop
anreprodukcija
alarm, pressdatoteke
one be
of the
buttons
on nakon
this the
unit.
volume
can
performed.
Switch
vremena,
počinje
malo
You
can
stopadjustment
an alarm even
if the
Hold function
is on.
You
can
stop an
alarm even
if the Hold
function
to off
operation
if itfunction
isplayback,
on. is on.
zakazanog
* Hold
After
settingvremena.
the
file before
to be played
for timer
if
*● To
After
setting
the file
to beone
played
forbuttons
timer
playback,
if
*
stop
an
alarm,
press
of
the
on this
●
Tijekom
snimanja
mjeračem
vremena,
moguće
je unit.
the
set file
is
deleted,
the alarm
sounds
at the
timer
the
set
file
is
deleted,
the
alarm
sounds
at
the
timer
samo
zaustaviti
i podesiti
glasnoću.
Ako
You
can
stop an snimanje
alarm even
if the Hold
function
is on.
start
time.
start
time. zaključavanja
jeafunkcija
uključena,
isključite
prije
*
After
the
filethe
to be
played
timer
* If
filesetting
shorter
than
period
fromforthe
startplayback,
to je
end
is if
* If
a file
shorter
than the
period
from
the start
to end
is
snimanja
mjeračem
vremena.
the
set
file
istimer
deleted,
the
alarm
sounds
at the
timer
specified
for
playback,
that file
is played
repeatedly.
specified
for
timer
playback,
that
file
is
played
repeatedly.
start time.
* If a file shorter than the period from the start to end is
specified for timer playback, that file is played repeatedly.
●● Da biste zaustavili alarm, pritisnite bilo koji gumb
* When
the fileMoguće
playback
assignedalarm
as playback
na uređaju.
je is
zaustaviti
čak i ako je
* When
the file playback
is
assigned as playback
source,
thefunkcija
files are played back at the scheduled time
uključena
source,
the files arezaključavanja.
played back at the scheduled time
with
the
playback
settings
(SOUND
EQ
(➜
page 45)
●● with
Nakon
postavljanja
datoteke
koja će
se
reproducirati
the
playback
settings
(SOUND
EQ
(➜
page 45)
*
When
the
file
playback
isbeen
assigned
as
playback
etc.)
which
have
already
set when
thedatoteka
timer
s
mjeračem
vremena,
ako
se
postavljena
etc.)
which
have
already
been
set
when
the
timer time
source,
the
files
are
played
back
at
the
scheduled
playback
setting
made.
izbriše,
alarm
ćewas
zvoniti
u (SOUND
vrijeme pokretanja.
playback
setting
was
made.
with
the
playback
settings
EQ
(➜
page
45)
*
or LINE
is assigned
as recording
source,
●● When
Ako which
jeMIC
datoteka
kraća
odbeen
postavljenog
vremena
*
When
MIC
or
LINE
is assigned
as when
recording
source,
etc.)
have
already
set
the timer
the
recording
is
made
at
the
scheduled
time
with
reprodukcije
sismjeračem
vremena,
ta će
se with
datoteka
the
recording
made
at the
scheduled
time
playback
setting
was made.
the
recording
settings
(microphone sensitivity
reproducirati
iznova.
the
recording
settings
(microphone
sensitivitysource,
* When
MIC
or the
LINE
is input
assigned
as (➜
recording
(➜
page
26),
line
setting
page
35),
etc.)
●● (➜
Kada
se 26),
reprodukcija
datoteke
odredi
kao
page
the
line input
setting
(➜ page
35),
etc.)
the
recording
is made
at
the
scheduled
timeizvor
with
which
have already
been
set
when the timer
recording
reprodukcije,
datoteke
se
reproduciraju
u
zakazano
which
have
already
been
set
when
the
timer
recording
the
recording
settings
(microphone
sensitivity
setting
was
made.
(excluding
the
recording
mode
vrijeme
s26),
postavkama
reprodukcije
(SOUND
EQetc.)
setting
was
made.
(excluding
the recording
(➜
page
the line
input
setting
(➜
page mode
35),
(➜
page
25))
(→page
str. 45)
itd.) koje su već postavljene kada je
(➜
25))
which
have
already
been
set
when
the
timer
recording
* Ifpostavljanje
the clock setting
(DATE &s TIME)
is returned
to the
reprodukcije
mjeračem
vremena
* setting
If the clock
setting
(DATE & TIME)
is returned
to the
was
made.
the recording
mode
factory
setting,
the (excluding
timer operation
setting (SETTING)
izvršeno.
factory
setting,
the timer operation setting (SETTING)
(➜
page
25))
automatically
turned
OFF. kao izvor snimanja,
●● is
K
ada
se
MIC
ili
LINE
odrede
is the
automatically
turned
OFF.
*
clock
setting
& TIME) isstart
returned
to the
* If
1snimanje
minute
before
the(DATE
timer
recording
time,
se izvršava
u zakazano
s the
* factory
1 minute
before
thetimer
timer
recordingvrijeme
start time,
the
setting,
the
operation
setting
(SETTING)
recording
indicator
blinks,
and
the
mode
switches
to
postavkama
snimanja
(osjetljivost
mikrofona
(→ str.
recording
indicator
blinks,
and the mode
switches
to
is automatically
turned
OFF.
recording
standby.
26), postavkama
linijskog ulaza (→ str. 35), itd.) koje
recording
standby.
* 1 minute before the timer recording start time, the
su već postavljene kada je postavljanje reprodukcije s
recording indicator blinks, and the mode switches to
mjeračem vremena izvršeno. (Osim načina snimanja
recording standby.
(→ str. 25))
●● Ako se postavka sata (DATE & TIME) vrati na
tvorničke postavke, postavka mjerača vremena
(SETTING) automatski se postavlja na OFF.
●● Minutu prije pokretanja snimanja mjeračem vremena
pokazatelj snimanja počinje treperiti i način se
prebacuje u stanje čekanja snimanja.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
g
Checking
g provedbe
Checking the
the timer
timer condition
condition or
or execution
execution
state
state
Pokazatelj
mjerača
Timer indication
Timer
indication
g Checking
the
timer condition or execution
vremena
state
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
■■Provjera stanja mjerača vremena i stanja
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 57
2012/05/29 9:35:48
Zajednički
izbornik
Common menu
Common menu
Common
menu
The following
following are
are the
the settings
settings
used for
for both
both recording
recording and
and playback.
playback.
The
used
The
the
used
for
both
and
Sljedeće
se are
postavke
koriste
i za
i reprodukciju.
The following
following
are
the settings
settings
used
for snimanje
both recording
recording
and playback.
playback.
Common
settings
operation
BEEP
SOUND
The
following
are
the settings
used for both recordingBEEP
and playback.
Rad
zajedničkih
postavki
SOUND
MENU
MENU
Common settings
operation
BEEP
SOUND
MENU
settings
operation
BEEP
SOUND
The
button
operation
can be set.
Moguće
je
podesiti
zvuksound
rada gumba.
••Common
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to
stop
the
unit.
[STOP
g/RETURN]
to stop
the unit.
•Press
Pritisnite
[STOP
■/RETURN]
da biste
MENU
Common
settings
operation
BEEP
SOUND
MENU
The
button
operation
sound
can
be
set.
Press
[STOP
g/RETURN] to
to stop
stop the
the unit.
unit.
zaustavili
uređaj.
The button operation sound can be set.
MENU
••1Press
[STOP
g/RETURN]
Press
[MENU].
The
button
operation
sound
can
be
set.
• Press [STOP g/RETURN] to stop the unit.
Press [MENU].
[MENU].
Pritisnite
[MENU].
1
Press
1
Press
– to select “COMMON
2
Press +,
[MENU].
1 Pritisnite
+, -press
da biste
odabrali
–
“COMMON
MENU”
OK]
to enter.
2 Press
Press +,
+,and
– to
to select
select[q
“COMMON
OFF:
operation
2
OFF:
No
operation
beep.
OFF:No
Zvuk
rada je beep.
isključen.
i“COMMON
zatim
pritisnite
Press
–
select[q
2
MENU”
and
press
OK] to
to
enter.
Press +,
+,and
– to
toMENU"
3 "COMMON
ON:
Operation
beep
is
MENU”
press
[q OK]
enter.
OFF:
No
operation
beep.
ON:
Operation
beep
is ON.
ON.
ON: Zvuk
rada je
uključen.
OFF:
No
operation
beep.
[►
OK]
za
unos.
MENU”
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
Press
+,
–
to
select
the
setting
3 Press +, – to
(The
factory
setting
is
“ON”.)
ON:
Operation
beep
is
ON.
OFF:
No
operation
beep.
(The
factory
setting
isje
“ON”.)
(Tvornička
postavka
"ON".)
3
ON:
Operation
beep
is
ON.
Press
+,
–
to
Pritisnite
+,
da
3 select
select
thepress
setting
••• When
“ON”
is
press
+,
to
ON:
Operation
beepis
is
ON.
(The
factory
setting
“ON”.)
item and
When
“ON”
is selected,
selected,
press
+, –
– +,
to -select
select
Kada
se odabere
pritisnite
da biste
the
setting
(The
factory
setting
is"ON",
“ON”.)
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
select
the
setting
biste
odabrali
item
and
[q
OK]
topress
enter.
item
and
press
item
and
postavku
ienter.
zatim
[q OK]
OK]
topress
[q
to
enter.
pritisnite
OK]
[q OK] to[►
enter.
+, – to change the setting
za unos.
4 Press
+,
the
setting
and press
[q
OK]
to enter.
4 Press
Press
+, –
–+,to
to
change
the
setting
Pritisnite
- change
da
biste
promijenili
4
+, – to
change
the setting
4 Press
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
and
pressi [q
OK]pritisnite
to enter. [► OK]
postavku
zatim
and the
press [q OK] to enter.
To exit
za unos.setting screen, press
To
exit
the setting
setting screen,
screen, press
press
[F2exit
(CLOSE)].
To
the
To
exit
the
setting screen,
press
Za
izlaz
iz zaslona
za postavljanje
[F2
(CLOSE)].
[F2
(CLOSE)].
For
details
on
“DATE
&
TIME”
(➜
page
For
details
on
“DATE
&
TIME”
(➜
page 11)
11)
[F2 (CLOSE)].
pritisnite
[F2 (CLOSE)].
and “TIMER & ALARM” (➜ page 55), see the
58
58
585858
5858
58
58
For
&
(➜
page
11)
and
“TIMERon
ALARM”
(➜ page
For details
details
on&“DATE
“DATE
& TIME”
TIME”
(➜ 55),
pagesee
11)the
respective
pages.
and
“TIMER
ALARM”
(➜
For
details
on&
& TIME”
(➜ 55),
pagesee
11)the
respective
pages.
and
“TIMER
&“DATE
ALARM”
(➜ page
page
55),
see
the
respective
pages.
and
“TIMER
& ALARM”
55),i see the
Detalje
o "DATE
& TIME"(➜
(→page
str. 11)
respective
pages.
'TIMER
& ALARM"
respective
pages. (→ str. 55) potražite na
navedenim stranicama.
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
your
preferred
volume
and
press
[q
OK]
•• your
When
“ON”
is
press
+,
to
select
(The
factory
setting
is “ON”.)
odabrali
željenu
glasnoću
i pritisnite
[► to
OK]
preferred
volume
and
press
to
When
“ON”
is selected,
selected,
press
+, –
–[q
toOK]
select
enter.
(The
factory
setting
is
“MIDDLE”.)
your
preferred
volume
and
to
• When
“ON”(Tvornička
is selected,
press
+,je–[q
toOK]
select
za unos.
postavka
"MIDDLE".)
enter.
(The
factory
setting
ispress
“MIDDLE”.)
your
preferred
volume
and
press
[q
OK]
to
enter.
(The
setting
“MIDDLE”.)
your
volume
andis
[q OK] to
enter.preferred
(The factory
factory
setting
ispress
“MIDDLE”.)
REC
LED
(Pokazatelj
snimanja)
enter. (The
setting is “MIDDLE”.)
REC
LEDfactory
(Recording
indicator)
REC LED (Recording indicator)
Možete
postavku
ilithe
gašenja
REC
LED
(Recording
indicator)
You
canodabrati
choose
whetherpaljenja
to set
REC
LED
(Recording
indicator)
svjetla
pokazatelja
snimanja
(ON
ili the
OFF).
recording
indication
light
ON
or
OFF.
You
can
choose
whether
to
set
You can choose whether to set the
You
can choose
whether
to set
recording
indication
light
or
OFF.
recording
indication
light ON
ON
or the
OFF.
recording indication light ON or OFF.
OFF:
ON:
OFF:
Not
litupaljeno
ON: Lit
Lit ON: Upaljeno
OFF: Not
Nijelit
(The
factory
setting
OFF:
Not lit
litpostavka
ON: Lit
Litis
(The
factory
setting
isje“ON”.)
“ON”.)
(Tvornička
"ON".)
OFF:
Not
ON:
STOP
STOP■g/RETURN
g/RETURN
*
itit is
set
to
OFF,
REC
LED
lights
on
STOP
/RETURN
(The
factory
setting
is
“ON”.)
OFF:
Not
lit
ON:
*
Even
issetting
set
toLitis
OFF,
REC
LED
lights
on
• Even
Čak
i ififkada
se postavi
na
OFF,
REC
LED
(The
factory
“ON”.)
STOP
g/RETURN
(blinks)
as
a
status
indicator
while
charging
STOP
g/RETURN
*
Even
if
it
is
set
to
OFF,
REC
LED
lights
on
(The
factory
setting
is
“ON”.)
(blinks)
as
a
status
indicator
while
charging
nastavit
će
svijetliti
(treperi)
kao
pokazatelj
* Even if it is set to OFF, REC LED lights on
STOP
g/RETURN
or
editing
(blinks)
* Even
if itas
isfiles.
topunjenja
OFF,
REC
LED
on
a
status
indicator
while
charging
or
editing
files.
statusa
tijekom
ili tijekom
uređivanja
(blinks)
as
aset
status
indicator
whilelights
charging
(blinks)
or
editing
asfiles.
a status indicator while charging
datoteka.
or
editing
files.
or editing files.
Set the type of batteries used (rechargeable nickel
Set
the
type ofbatteries
batteries
nickel
metal-hydride
or
alkaline
batteries).
nikal
metal-hidridne
baterije
ili(rechargeable
alkalne
baterije).
metal-hydride
batteries
orused
alkaline
batteries).
metal-hydride batteries Type
orVrsta
alkaline
baterijebatteries).
Type of
of battery
battery
BACKLIGHT
BACKLIGHT
BACKLIGHT
BACKLIGHT
Postavljanje
vremena
svijetljenja
pozadinskog
Set
the backlight
lighting
time when
the button is
Set the backlight lighting time when the button is
Set
the backlight
timegumb.
when the button is
pressed.
osvjetljenja
kada lighting
se pritisne
pressed.
pressed.
:ofPunjiva
Type
batterybaterija
:: Rechargeable
Rechargeable battery
battery
: Alkalna
baterija
Rechargeable
battery
Alkaline
battery
:: Alkaline
battery
: Alkaline
battery ALKALINE
Vrsta
baterije:
(punjiva),
Type of
of
battery:RECHARGEABLE
RECHARGEABLE,
ALKALINE
Type
battery:
RECHARGEABLE,
ALKALINE
AUTO
AUTO POWER
POWER OFF
OFF
AUTO POWER OFF
AUTO
POWER OFFturns the power off if there
This
This function
function automatically
automatically turns the power off if there
This
automatically
turns
theof
power
offako
ifas
there
Ovom
se funkcijom
automatski
is no
no function
operation
for a
auređaj
certain
period
ofisključuje
time such
such
as
is
operation
for
certain
period
time
određeno
vrijemefor
aktivnosti,
primjerice
kadayou
se
is
no operation
a certain
period
of timehelps
such
as
when
recording
is
stopped.
This
function
when
recording
isnema
stopped.
This
function
helps
you
snimanje
zaustavi.
taj se način
štedioff
baterija
kada
when
recording
is Na
stopped.
This
function
helps
you
save
battery
when
you
to
power.
save
battery
when
you forget
forget
to turn
turn
off the
the
power.
zaboravite
isključiti
save
battery
whenuređaj.
you forget to turn off the power.
AUTO
AUTO POWER
POWER OFF:
OFF: 0
0 min
min (OFF)
(OFF) to
to 15
15 min
min
(The
setting
AUTOfactory
POWER
OFF:is
min (OFF) to 15 min
(The
factory
setting
is00“15min”.)
“15min”.)
AUTO
POWER
OFF:
min
(OFF)
do
15 min
*
You
can
set
the
time
in
1-minute
increments.
(The
setting
is “15min”.)
*
Youfactory
can set
the time
in 1-minute
increments.
(Tvornička
postavka
jethe
"15
min".) POWER
When
“OFF”
is
OFF” function
*
You
can
set
the
time
in “AUTO
1-minute
increments.
*
“OFF”
is set,
set,
the
“AUTO
POWER
function
●● When
Vrijeme
možete
podesiti
u koracima
od 1OFF”
minute.
does
not
operate.
*
When
“OFF”
is
set,
the
“AUTO
POWER
OFF”
function
does not operate.
●● does
Kada not
se podesi
na "OFF", funkcija "AUTO POWER
operate.
OFF" neće raditi.
Lighting time:
time: OFF
OFF (does
(does not
not light),
light), 5
5 sec,
sec, 15
15 sec,
sec, always
always
Lighting
ON
Lighting
OFF
5 sec,
15 sec,
always
Vrijeme time:
svijetljenja:
OFFnot
(nelight),
svijetli),
5 sek.,
15 sek.,
ON (does
uključeno (ON)
(The
factory
“15
ON is
(The
factory setting
setting
isuvijek
“15 sec”.)
sec”.)
(Tvornička
postavka
"15
sek.")
*
The
backlight
may
not
light
when
(The
factory
setting
“15
sec”.)
*
The
backlight
mayisje
not
light
when the
the remaining
remaining
●● The
Pozadinsko
možda
neće
upaliti kada je
battery
*
backlight
may
not light
whense
the
remaining
power
is
battery
powerosvjetljenje
is low.
low.
preostala
baterija
vrlo
slaba.
battery
*
The
backlight
does
not
light
in
the
following
power
is
low.
* The backlight does not light in the following conditions.
conditions.
●● The
ne svijetli
sljedećim
uvjetima.
–
*
backlight
notmoved,
light
incopied
the ufollowing
conditions.
While
a
is
being
or
–Pozadinsko
While
a file
fileosvjetljenje
isdoes
being
moved,
copied
or combined.
combined.
Tijekom
premještanja,
kopiranja
ili
kombiniranja
– While a file is being moved, copied or combined.
datoteke.
CONTRAST
CONTRAST
CONTRAST
CONTRAST
Use
this
Use
this function
function to
to adjust
adjust the
the contrast
contrast of
of the
the
Use
thisse
function
to adjust
the10
contrast
of
screen.
You
can choose
choose
from
10
levels for
for
the
Ovom
funkcijom
podešava
kontrast
nathe
screen.
You
can
from
levels
the
screen.
You
can choose
from
10 levels for the
adjustment.
zaslonu.
Postoji
10 razina
podešavanja.
adjustment.
adjustment.
Contrast
adjustment:
1 (L) to
10
(H)
Contrast
adjustment:
1010
(H)
Prilagodba
kontrasta:11(L)
(L)todo
(H)
(The
factory
setting
“5”.)
Contrast
adjustment:
(L) to 10 (H)
(The
factory
setting is
is1
(Tvornička
postavka
je“5”.)
"5".)
(The factory setting is “5”.)
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
(alkalna)
(The
factory
setting
is “RECHARGEABLE”.)
“RECHARGEABLE”.)
Type
of battery:
RECHARGEABLE,
ALKALINE
(The
factory
setting
is
*
If the
the
type
of battery
battery
and
setting do
do not
not match,
match, the
the
(Tvornička
postavka
“RECHARGEABLE”.)
(The
factory
setting
isje“RECHARGEABLE”.)
*
If
type
of
and
setting
battery
indicator
is not
not
displayed
correctly.
*
If
these
type
of battery
and
setting ne
do
not match, the
●● battery
Ako
vrsta
baterije
i postavka
poklapaju,
indicator
is
displayed
correctly.
* If
Ifpokazatelj
BATT.indicator
SETTING
is
set
to “ALKALINE”,
“ALKALINE”,
the
battery
is is
not
displayed
correctly.
baterije
neće
se
ispravno
prikazivati.
*
BATT.
SETTING
set
to
the
rechargeable
battery
cannot
be charged.
charged.
*
If
BATT.
SETTING
is set
to(BATT.
“ALKALINE”,
the postavi
●● rechargeable
Ako
se postavka
baterije
SETTING)
battery
cannot
be
rechargeable
battery
cannot
be charged.
na "ALKALINE",
punjivu
bateriju
nije moguće napuniti.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
BATT.
SETTING
BATT.
BATT.SETTING
SETTING
BATT.
SETTING
Podesite
vrstu
se (rechargeable
koristi (punjivenickel
Set
the type
of baterija
batterieskoji
used
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 59
59
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 59
2012/05/29
2012/05/29 9:35:48
9:35:48
2012/05/29 9:35:48
Zajednički
izbornik
Common
menu
RECYCLE
RECYCLEBIN
BIN
Kada
funkcija
koša smeće,
Whense
thekoristi
recycle
bin function
is used,datoteke
deleted
se premještaju
smeće.
Prije
pražnjenja
files
are moved utokoš
theza
recycle
bin.
Before
the
koša zabin
smeće
izbrisane
je datoteke
moguće
recycle
is emptied,
deleted
files can
be
vratiti
tako
sedo
nenot
morate
o slučajnom
restored
soda
you
havebrinuti
to worry
about
brisanju datoteka.
deleting
files by mistake.
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
OFF:
Do not
use
the
recycle
bin
OFF:
usese
the
recyclekoša
bin function
function
OFF: Do
Ne not
koristi
funkcija
za smeće
ON:
Use
recycle bin
function
ON: Koristi
Use the
the
function
ON:
serecycle
funkcijabin
koša
za smeće
(The
factory
setting
is
“ON”.)
(The factorypostavka
setting isje“ON”.)
(Tvornička
"ON".)
*
the
recycle
bin
is
“OFF”,
that
are
*● When
When
the
recyclekoša
bin function
function
is podešena
“OFF”, files
filesna
that
are
●
Kada je
funkcija
za smeće
"OFF",
deleted
cannot
be
deleted
cannot
be restored.
restored.
izbrisane
datoteke
nije moguće vratiti.
60
6060
60
60
FORMAT
FORMAT
Brišu se sve datoteke na unutarnjoj memoriji ili
All files on the internal memory or SD card are
SD-kartici.
Izbrisani
više
ne mogu vratiti.
deleted.
Deleted
filespodaci
cannot
be se
recovered.
 Select
Odaberite
"INTERNAL
MEMORY"
“INTERNAL
MEMORY”
1
Select
“INTERNAL
MEMORY”
ili "microSD
i zatim
or
“microSD
CARD”
press
or
“microSD CARD"
CARD” and
and
press
pritisnite
OK] za unos.
[q
OK]
enter.
[q
OK] to
to[►
enter.
 Select
Odaberite
"YES"
(Da)
i
zatim
“YES”
and
press
2
Select “YES” and press
pritisnite
OK] za unos.
[q
OK]
enter.
[q
OK] to
to[►
enter.
●
●
Spremite
važne files
datoteke
računaloor
vanjske
*
Save
necessary
to
computer
* Save
necessary
files
to the
thena
computer
oriliexternal
external
uređajebefore
prije formatiranja.
devices
formatting.
devices
before
formatting.
●● When
Kada formatted,
ih se formatira,
datoteke
iz koša
*
files
the
bin
are
also
*
When
formatted,
files in
in
the recycle
recycle
bin za
aresmeće
also
takođerand
se brišu
i nije
moguće vratiti.
deleted
cannot
be
restored.
deleted
and
cannot
be ih
restored.
●● Cancelling
Poništavanje
nijepossible
mogućewhile
tijekom
formatiranja.
*
Cancelling
is not
not
possible
while
formatting.
*
is
formatting.
●● Do
Nemojte
uklanjati
tijekom
*
Do
not remove
remove
the bateriju
battery ili
orSD-karticu
SD card
card while
while
formatting.
*
not
the
battery
or
SD
formatting.
formatiranja.
*
this
* Use
Use
this unit
unit to
to format
format a
a new
new SD
SD card
card before
before use.
use.
●● Na ovom uređaju formatirajte novu SD-karticu prije
uporabe.
Moguće je provjeriti verziju upravljačkog
You
can check
the firmware
programa
na ovom
uređaju.version of this unit.
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Ako se postavke na ovom uređaju inicijaliziraju,
If
thepostavke
settings osim
of this"DATE
unit are
initialised,
settings
sve
& TIME"
vraćaju
se u
except for the “DATE & TIME” setting are restored
zadano stanje.
to the default state.
Odaberite
"YES",(Da),
[► OK]
Select “YES”,
press [q pritisnite
OK] to enter
andza
theunos i
postavke
će
se
inicijalizirati.
settings are initialised.
VERSION
VERSION
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
INIT MENU
INIT MENU
61
61
61
61
VQT4J81_RR-XS450_420-E_En.indd 61
2012/05/29 9:35:48
Zahtjevi sustava
Računalo
Uređaji kompatibilni s računalima IBM PC/AT, Macintosh
Operativni sustav
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition/Professional i Service
Pack 2, Service Pack 3
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic/Home Premium/
Business/ Ultimate i Service Pack 1, Service Pack 2
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 Starter/Home Basic/Home Premium/
Professional/Ultimate i Service Pack 1
(Od svibnja 2012.)
• Predinstalirana verzija
• Mac OS X 10.2.8 - 10.7
VQT4J69
Sučelje
62
62
USB-ulaz (Rad nije zajamčen ako koristite USB-čvorište).
ÍÍ Čak i ako se ispune zahtjevi sustava navedeni u ovim uputama za uporabu, neka se računala neće moći koristiti.
ÍÍ (Macintosh) Ovaj se softver može instalirati na standardni pogon operativnog sustava.
ÍÍ Rad je zajamčen samo s kompatibilnim operativnim sustavima.
ÍÍ Rad nije zajamčen s nadograđenim operativnim sustavima.
ÍÍ Rad nije zajamčen s računalima sastavljenima kod kuće.
ÍÍ Kada koristite Windows Media® Player, vaše računalo mora ispunjavati zahtjeve sustava Windows Media®
Playera. Savjetujte se s tvrtkom Microsoft Corporation o detaljima Windows Media® Playera.
ÍÍ Microsoft, Windows, Windows Media i Windows Vista registrirani su zaštitni znakovi ili zaštitni znakovi tvrtke
Microsoft Corporation u SAD-u i ostalim državama.
ÍÍ Tehnologija audiokodiranja MPEG Layer-3 pod licencijom je tvrtke Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
ÍÍ IBM i PC/AT zaštitni su znakovi korporacije International Business Machines u Sjedinjenim Američkim Državama.
ÍÍ Macintosh i Mac OS zaštitni su znakovi tvrtke Apple Inc.
ÍÍ Drugi nazivi sustava i proizvoda koji se pojavljuju u ovom dokumentu uglavnom su registrirani zaštitni znakovi ili
zaštitni znakovi tvrtki koje su ih proizvele. Upamtite da se oznake ™ i ® ne pojavljuju u ovom dokumentu.
ÍÍ Ovisno o okolini u kojoj se nalazi računalo, može doći do kvarova (npr. audiozapisi snimljeni ovim uređajem ne
mogu se koristiti, itd.). Tvrtka Panasonic i njeni distributeri nisu odgovorni ni za kakav gubitak audiozapisa ili
druge direktne ili indirektne štete osim u slučajevima namjernog nemara.
Prethodno
uređaj.
•••Turn
the
off
Turn
the unit
unitisključite
off beforehand.
beforehand.
• Start the computer beforehand.
Take
the
unit’s USB
plug.
Izvucite
iz uređaja.
•1Turn
theout
unitUSB-utikač
off beforehand.
1
Push and
and
slide
Gurnite
i povucite
Push
slide
Storing
USB
Spremanje
Storing the
theUSB-utikača:
USB plug:
plug:
Take
out
the unit’s USB plug.
until
a
dok
ne
začuje
untilse
a “click”
“click”
sound
is
zvuk
klika.
Push
and
slide
sound
is heard.
heard.
until a “click”
sound is heard.
Storing the USB plug:
Caution:
Use
the
USB
extension
cable
Do
not use
theonly
supplied
cable with
other
devices.
Caution:
Use
only
the
supplied
USB
extension
cable
Oprez:
Za
spajanje
nasupplied
računalo
koristite
isključivo
with
a
core
to
with
a ferrite
ferriteUSB-produžni
core when
when connecting
connecting
to computer.
computer.
isporučeni
kabel s feritnom
jezgrom.
Caution: Use only the supplied USB extension cable
*
Thea first
time
connect
the
unit
to
with
ferrite
coreyou
when
connecting
to computer.
*
first
time
connect
thena
unit
to your
your PC
PC
●●The
Kada
prvi
putyou
spajate
uređaj
računalo
Because
Because multiple
multiple “Found
“Found New
New Hardware”
Hardware” messages
messages
Budući
da
će
se
pojaviti
nekoliko
poruka
s
tekstom
* The
first time
connect the
your
PCPC
will
do
not
the
unit
your
will appear,
appear,
do you
not disconnect
disconnect
theunit
unittofrom
from
your
PC
"Foundmessages
New
Hardware"
(Pronađen
je novimessages
hardver),
Because
multiple
“Found
New Hardware”
until
disappear.
until all
all messages
disappear.
nemojte
odspajati
uređaj
s
računala
dok
sve
poruke
will appear,
do not
disconnect
the unit
display
during
connection
with
PC
*
Screen
display
during
connection
withfrom
PC your PC
* Screen
ne nestanu.
until
all During
messages
disappear.During
connection
During
connection
During file
file transfer
transfer
●●Screen
Prikaz display
na zaslonu
tijekom
spajanja
računalo
during
connection
withnaPC
*
Tijekom
spajanja
During
connection
2
2
Connect
the unit na
to aračunalo
computerpomoću
using theUSBUSB
Spojite uređaj
ulaza.
port.
Connect the unit to a computer using the USB
port.
USB cover
cover
Poklopac
USB-a
USB
USB cover
Uređaj
Utaknite
USB-utikač
ravno Umetnite
USB-utikač
Insert
the
plug
Firmly
the
Insert
the USB
USB
plug straight
straight
Firmly insert
insert
the USB
USBdoplug
plug all
all
smjeru
(Poklopac
neće
in
same
direction
the
in.
USB
inuthe
the
samepriključka.
direction as
as that
that kraja.
the way
way
in. (The
(TheUSB-a
USB cover
cover
smetati
pri
umetanju
jer
je
of
the
terminal.
will
not
impede
insertion
as
itit
Insert
the USB plug straight
Firmly
theinsertion
USB plug
of the terminal.
will notinsert
impede
asall
unutar
uređaja.)
is
inside
unit.)
in the same direction as that pohranjen
the
way in.
(Thethe
USB
cover
is stored
stored
inside
the
unit.)
Ako uređaj
nije moguće direktnowill
spojiti
na računalo,
the cannot
terminal.
notcomputer
impede
insertion
as it
If
theofunit
unit
be connected
connected to
to the
the
directly,
If
the
cannot
be
computer
stored
inside thedirectly,
unit.)
upotrijebite
USB-produžni
kabel is(isporučen).
use
the
extension
cable
use
the USB
USB
extension
cable (supplied).
(supplied).
●
● Koristite
isključivo
isporučeni
USB-produžni
kabel.
If
cannot
connected
to
the computer
directly,
*
Do
not
any
other
USB
cables
the
*the
Do unit
not use
use
anybe
other
USB extension
extension
cables except
except
the
usesupplied
the
USB
extension
cable
(supplied).
one.
supplied one.
* Do not use any other USB extension cables except the
supplied one.
Tijekom
prijenosa
datoteka
During
file transfer
ACCESS...
ACCESS...
ACCESS...
*
* This
This unit
unit cannot
cannot be
be operated
operated while
while connected
connected to
to the
the
computer.
computer.
*
unit
operated
connected
tonathe
When
the
unit
is
connected
to
your
PC,
can
*
When
thecannot
unit
is be
connected
towhile
your
PC,
can operate
operate
●●This
Uređajem
se ne
može
upravljati
dok
je ititspojen
computer.
without
the
without
the battery,
battery, because
because power
power is
is supplied
supplied by
by the
the
računalo.
*
unit isspojen
connected
to your PC,
it can
operate
computer.
computer.
●●When
Kada the
je uređaj
na računalo,
može
raditi
bez
the
battery,
because
is supplied
*
When
the
connected
to
the
the
* without
When
the
unit
is
connected
topower
the computer,
computer,
theby the
baterije
jerunit
se is
napaja
na računalu.
computer.
may
start
(restart).
It
recommended
computer
may not
not
start na
(restart).
It is
isračunalo
recommended
●●computer
Kada je uređaj
spojen
računalo,
se
* When
unit
is
connected
tothe
thecomputer
computer,when
the
that
the
unit
is
removed
from
that
thethe
unit
ismoći
removed
from
the
computer
when
možda
neće
uključiti
(ponovno
pokrenuti).
computer
may not start
(restart). It is recommended
starting
(restarting)
the
computer.
starting
(restarting)
the
computer.
Preporučuje se da odspojite uređaj s računala kada
that the unit is removed from the computer when
uključujete
(ponovno
starting
(restarting)
thepokrećete)
computer.računalo.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
You can copy files recorded on this unit to the
•••Start
the
beforehand.
Prethodno
uključite
računalo.
Start
the computer
computer
beforehand.
computer.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Spajanje uređaja
na računalo
Connecting
this unit
to a computer
You
can
copy
files
recorded
on
this
unit
to
the
Datoteke
koje
snimite
ovim
uređajem
mogu
se
not
supplied
cable
with
devices.
Do
not use
use the
the
supplied
cable
withsother
other
devices.
Isporučeni
kabel
nemojte
koristiti
drugim
uređajima.
Connecting
this unit to a Do
computer
computer.
kopirati na računalo.
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Spajanje uređaja na računalo
VQT4J69
●● U
sljedećim slučajevima rad nije zajamčen.
• Kada su dva ili više USB-uređaja spojena na
jedno računalo (ne računajući miša i tipkovnicu u
normalnom radu)
• Kada se koristi USB-čvorište
• Kada se koristi drugi USB-produžni kabel osim
isporučenog
●● Ako uključite (ponovno pokrenete) računalo ili ako
se računalo prebaci u stanje čekanja kada je spojen
ovaj uređaj, računalo ga možda neće prepoznati.
Odspojite uređaj i ponovno ga spojite na računalo ili
ponovno spojite uređaj nakon ponovnog pokretanja
računala.
●● Pročitajte upute za uporabu računala.
64
64
■■Odspajanje uređaja
Dvaput kliknite na ikonu (Windows XP: [ ], Windows
Vista / Windows 7: [ ]) na alatnoj traci na dnu zaslona
računala i slijedite upute na zaslonu za odspajanje
uređaja. (Ikona se možda neće prikazati, ovisno o
postavkama operativnog sustava.)
Uređaj će se isključiti nakon što ga odspojite.
Kada se uređaj uključi nakon brisanja i sl., datoteka s
uređaja pomoću računala, prikazuje se "UPDATING
FILE NAME" (Ažuriranje naziva datoteke). Ažuriranje
može potrajati nekoliko minuta.
■■Funkcija USB-memorije
Ovaj uređaj radi kao USB-memorija i računalo ga
prepoznaje kao vanjski uređaj za pohranu podataka.
Podatkovne datoteke mogu se prenositi i pohranjivati na
ovaj uređaj.
The
illustrations
show
Windows
XP
The
display
depending
on
Na
je prikazan
operativni
sustav
Windows
Prikaz may
možediffer
varirati
ovisno o operativnom
Theslikama
illustrations
show
Windows
XP (OS).
(OS).
TheXP.
display
may
differ
depending
on the
the OS.
OS.sustavu.
Prethodno
na računalo.
(→ str. 63)
•••Connect
this
unit
a
beforehand.
Connect
thisspojite
unit to
to uređaj
a Computer
Computer
beforehand.
(➜ page
page 63)
(➜
63)
1. Kliknite na [Start] (Početak) →
1.
[start]
Computer].
[My Computer]
(Moje
računalo).
1. Click
Click
[start] →
→ [My
[My
Computer].
2. Desnim klikom
otvorite
"IC RECORDER
2.
2. Right-click
Right-click to
to open
open the
the “IC
“IC RECORDER
RECORDER (G:)”
(G:)”
(G:)"unit).
(ovaj uređaj).
(this
(this unit).
(Struktura mapaon
na uređaju
→ str. 69)
(Folder
(Folder structure
structure on this
this unit:
unit: ➜
➜ page
page 69)
69)
The
internal
memory
SD
of
Unutarnja
SD-kartica
seare
pod
The
internalmemorija
memory iand
and
SD card
cardprikazuju
of this
this unit
unit
are
displayed
as
the following
following names.
sljedećimas
nazivima.
displayed
the
names.
Internal
Memory:
IC
Unutarnja
memorija:
IC RECORDER
Internal
Memory:
IC RECORDER
RECORDER
½
SD
card:
SD
SD-kartica:
IC REC
SD
card: IC
IC REC
REC
SD½SD*
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Opening
of this
unit
Otvaranjefolders
mapa na
uređaju
3.
to
the
3.Right-click
Mapu otvorite
desnim
klikom.
3.
Right-click
to open
open
the folder.
folder.
This
unit’s
are
Prikazuju
se datoteke
na uređaju.
This
unit’s files
files
are displayed.
displayed.
an
SD
card
is
inserted
card
was
* If
umetne
seSD
umetne
SD-kartica
IfAko
an se
SDne
card
is not
not SD-kartica
inserted or
orilian
an
SD
card that
that
was
not
on
is
[Removable
kojaformatted
nije formatirana
na ovom
uređaju,
pojavit će Disk]
se
not
formatted
on this
this unit
unit
is inserted,
inserted,
[Removable
Disk]
is
displayed.
natpis
[Removable Disk].
is
displayed.
½
½
●●Depending
Ovisno o postavkama
računala,
pojavit
će with
se the
*
on
settings,
a
*
Depending
on the
the computer
computer
settings,
a file
file
with
the
ekstenzija“.INX”
".INX".
Ova
sadrži
extension
may
be
displayed.
This
file
extension
“.INX”
may
bedatoteka
displayed.
This indeksne
file contains
contains
podatke.
Ako
se
datoteka
izbriše
s
računala,
indeksni
index
information.
If
this
file
is
deleted
from
your
index information. If this file is deleted from your
podaci će the
se izbrisati.
computer,
index
computer,
the
index information
information will
will be
be deleted.
deleted.
VQT4J81
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
ユーザー名
ユーザー名
65
65
65
65
Importing
lesnatoračunalo/raspoređivanje
a computer/Organising
les
Uvoz datoteka
datoteka
• Connect this unit to a Computer beforehand.
• Prethodno spojite uređaj na računalo. (→ str. 63)
(➜ page 63)
Uvoz
datoteka
ovim
Importing
lessnimljenih
recorded on
this unit
uređajem
na
računalo.
to a computer
1.
daberite
datoteku
na uređaju
i desnim
1. O
Select
thesnimljenu
recorded
le in this
unit, rightklikom
odaberite
(Kopiraj).
click and
select[Copy]
[Copy].
2. Odaberite mapu na računalu i desnim klikom
2. Select a folder in the computer, right-click
odaberite [Paste] (Zalijepi) za uvoz podataka na
and select [Paste] to import to the computer.
računalo.
Folder in this unit
Folder in the computer
Playing
computer:
Maparecorded
na uređaju les on the
Mapa
na računalu
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
Select the recorded file in this unit, right-click and select
66
66
66
66
Reprodukcija
snimljenih datoteka na
[Play].
računalu:
Delete unnecessary
les
usingi desnim
the klikom
Odaberite
snimljenu datoteku
na uređaju
odaberite
[Play] (Reprodukcija).
computer:
Select the recorded file in this unit, right-click, select
[Delete] and [Yes] to enter.
* Using [drag and drop], you can import the files to the
Brisanje
nepotrebnih datoteka pomoću
computer as well.
računala:
*
Never disconnect the unit or remove the SD card
Odaberite
snimljenu datoteku
na ovom
uređaju,this
desnim
while “ACCESS…”
is displayed,
otherwise
unit
klikom
odaberite
[Delete] (Izbriši) i zatim [Yes] (Da) za
may be
damaged.
unos.
*
Do not format this unit or the SD card using a
●●computer.
Datoteke možete uvesti na računalo i tako da ih
pomoću
funkcije
[drag and
povučeteare
i ispustite
* File
extensions
displayed
ondrop]
the computer
“MP3”
naMP3
računalo.
for
recording files and “WAV” for PCM recording
●●files.
Nikada nemojte isključivati uređaj ili vaditi SDkarticu
dok sefolder
prikazuje
poruka
"ACCESS..."
* Use
the “DATA”
to save
data files
from the jer bi
se uređaj mogao oštetiti.
computer.
●● Nemojte formatirati ovaj uređaj ili SD-karticu na
* If you change the names of folders such as
računalu.
“MIC_A(MIC_A_SD), MIC_B(MIC_B_SD),
●● Ekstenzije datoteka koje se prikazuju na računalu su
MIC_C(MIC_C_SD), MIC_D(MIC_D_SD), LINE(LINE_
"MP3" za MP3-datoteke i "WAV" za PCM-datoteke.
SD), MUSIC”, etc. of this unit on the computer, new
●● Podatkovne datoteke s računala spremite u mapu
folders of the original names will be generated next
"DATA".
time the unit is turned on. (The indications in the
●● Ako na računalu preimenujete mape poput
brackets are displayed when using the SD card.) The
mapa “MIC_A(MIC_A_SD), MIC_B(MIC_B_SD),
folders with changed names are shown in the OTHER
MIC_C(MIC_C_SD), MIC_D(MIC_D_SD),
FOLDER ( ) on this unit (➜ page 70).
LINE(LINE_ SD), MUSIC”, itd. ovog uređaja, sljedeći
put kada uključite uređaj stvorit će se nove mape s
izvornim nazivima. (Oznake u zagradama prikazuju
se kada se koristi SD-kartica). Mape s promijenjenim
nazivima prikazuju se u mapi OTHER FOLDER (
)
na ovom uređaju (→ str. 70).
Filenaming
namingrules
ruleswhen
whenrecording
recordingon
onthis
thisunit:
unit:
File
Primjer:
Informacije
snimanju: 20.
rujna 2012.,
17:20/mapa
A/MP3A/MP3
Example:
Recordingoinformation:
information:
September
20,2012,
2012,17:20/folder
17:20/folder
A/MP3
Example:
Recording
September
20,
File
number
(001
to199)
199)
Broj
datoteke
(001
do 199)
1File
number
(001
to
1
001_120920_1720A0.MP3
001_120920_1720A0.MP3 2 Recording
information
(1-byte
number,
characters)
Informacije
o snimanju
(broj number,
od
1 bajta,
6 znakova)
Recording
information
(1-byte
66characters)
1 2
2
345
45 6
6 2
Recording
time(1-byte
(1-byte
number,
characters)
Vrijeme snimanja
(broj
od 1 bajta,
4 znaka)
3Recording
1
3
time
number,
44characters)
3
Folder
name
(Atoto(A
and
Nazivname
datoteke
DL)
iL)L)
4Folder
(1
bajt)
“_”(1-byte)
(1-byte)
(A
DDdo
and
4
“_”
Keyword
Number
thisovom
unit)uređaju)
Broj ključnih
riječi
na
5Keyword
Number
(0(0(0
ininthis
unit)
5
File
extension
(.MP3/.WAV)
Ekstenzija
datoteke
(.MP3/.WAV)
6File
extension
(.MP3/.WAV)
6
Theabove
abovefile
filename
nameis
isdisplayed
displayed
onthe
thecomputer,
computer,
however,
“001_”
notse
displayed
onthis
this
unit’s
screen.
The
on
“001_”
isisnot
displayed
on
screen.
Prethodno
navedeni
naziv
datoteke
prikazuje
se nahowever,
računalu,
no "001_"
ne prikazuje
naunit’s
zaslonu
uređaja.
“120920_1720A0.MP3”
isdisplayed
displayed
instead.
“120920_1720A0.MP3”
instead.
Umjesto
toga prikazuje is
se
"120920 1720A0.MP3".
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Naziv
datoteke
File name
name
File
Pravila o nazivanju datoteka za snimanje ovim uređajem:
Automatska
promjena
naziva
datoteke
brisanja/podjele:
Automaticchange
changeof
of
lename
name
byzbog
le
ledeletion
deletion
orediting:
editing:
Automatic
le
by
or
Brisanjem/kombiniranjem
snimljenih
datoteka
uređaju
daljnje će se
datoteke
pomaknuti
unaprijed,
aautomatically
brojevi
Deleting/combiningaarecorded
recorded
fileon
on
thisunit
unitna
will
movesubsequent
subsequent
files
forward
andfile
filenumbers
numbers
are
automatically
Deleting/combining
file
this
will
move
files
forward
and
are
datoteka
automatski će se promijeniti.
reassigned.
reassigned.
Example:
When
“002_120925_0905A0.MP3”
deleted
Example:
When
isisdeleted
Primjer:
Kada
se“002_120925_0905A0.MP3”
izbriše
“002_120925_0905A0.MP3”
001_120920_1720A0.MP3
001_120920_1720A0.MP3
002_120925_0905A0.MP3
002_120925_0905A0.MP3
003_121003_1233A0.MP3
003_121003_1233A0.MP3
004_121231_1915A0.MP3
004_121231_1915A0.MP3
001_120920_1720A0.MP3
001_120920_1720A0.MP3
002_121003_1233A0.MP3
002_121003_1233A0.MP3
003_121231_1915A0.MP3
003_121231_1915A0.MP3
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
Filenumber
numberparts
partsofofall
all lelenames
namesfollowing
followingthe
thedeleted
deleted orcombined
combinedleleare
arechanged.
changed.
File
Dijelovi
s brojevima
u nazivudatoteke
promijenit će
se nakonor
brisanja ili kombiniranja
datoteka.
fileisisnewly
newlyadded
addedby
bydividing
dividingororcopying
copyingaafile,
file,etc.
etc.The
Thefile
filenumbers
numbersofofthe
thefiles
filesfollowed
followedby
bythe
theadded
addedfile
fileare
are
11file
Nakon
dijeljenja
ili kopiranja
datoteke
dodaje
se 1parts
nova datoteka.
Brojevi
datoteka
koje slijede iza dodane datoteke
automatically
moved
backward
andfile
file
number
thosefile
filenames
namesare
arechanged.
changed.
automatically
moved
backward
and
number
parts ofofthose
pomiču se unatrag i mijenjaju se dijelovi s brojevima u nazivu datoteke.
67
67
67
67
67
67
Naziv datoteke
Vraćanje datoteka uvezenih na računalo na
ovaj uređaj
VQT4J69
Kada se datoteke vrate s računala na uređaj, takve se
datoteke mogu reproducirati na uređaju. (Preimenovane
datoteke neće se moći reproducirati.) No, ako se nazivi
datoteka na uređaju promijene tako da se datoteke
izbrišu, vraćene datoteke mogle bi duplicirati brojeve
datoteka na uređaju. U tom slučaju, vraćene datoteke
možda se neće moći reproducirati na uređaju. Kada
na uređaju želite reproducirati vraćene datoteke koje
su jednom uvezene na računalo, preporučuje se
reprodukcija na način da se takve datoteke prenesu u
mapu MUSIC. (→ str. 48, 71)
68
68
Naziv datoteke u mapi MUSIC i redoslijed
reprodukcije;
Ako se brojevi dodaju na početku naziva datoteka
u mapi MUSIC, reprodukcija započinje od datoteke
s najmanjim brojem. Moguće je identificirati do 3
znamenke. Ako se dodatne metode razlikuju, kao
primjerice 1, 01, 001, onda oznaka "001 do 999" ima
prioritet, datoteke s oznakama "01 do 99" reproduciraju
se druge po redu, a od "1 do 9" treće. Moguće je
promijeniti redoslijed reprodukcije prema svojim željama
tako da na početak imena datoteke dodate brojeve,
primjerice 001musicA.MP3, 002musicB.MP3. Redoslijed
prikaza bit će identičan redoslijedu reprodukcije.
Detalje o prijenosu datoteka u mapu MUSIC potražite na
str. 71. Detalje o reprodukciji takvih datoteka potražite
na str. 48
Folders
“A”,"B",
“B”,"C",
“C”,"D",
“D”,"L'
“L”i and
“M” are displayed
as “MIC_A”,
“MIC_B”,
“MIC_C”,
“MIC_D”,
“LINE”
Mape
"A",
"M" prikazuju
se kao "MIC_A",
"MIC_B",
"MIC_C",
"MIC_D",
"LINE"
i and
“MUSIC”
internal
memory)na
respectively
the computer
or the
screenMapa
of this
unit. koristi se
"MUSIC" (for
(za the
unutarnju
memoriju)
računalu ilion
zaslonu
s popisom
na list
uređaju.
"DATA"
The “DATA” folder is used to store data files.
za pohranu podatkovnih datoteka.
Folder hierarchy
thisuređaju:
unit:
Hijerarhija
mapa naof
ovom
: Mapa
Folder
MIC_A (MIC_A_SD)
001_120920_1720A0.MP3
002_120925_0905A0.MP3
MIC_B (MIC_B_SD)
MIC_C (MIC_C_SD)
MIC_D (MIC_D_SD)
LINE (LINE_SD)
MUSIC ✽
MUSIC
RECYCLE
RECYCLE
: Datoteka
File
✽ The
MUSIC
folder
is used
when
WMA/MP3
musicformata
files, etc.
from the computer.
*
Mapa
MUSIC
koristi
se kada
setransferring
prenose glazbene
datoteke
WMA/MP3
s računala.
You
can create
subfolders
in the
MUSIC
folder.
The structure
as below.
Moguće
je stvoriti
podmape
u mapi
MUSIC.
Primjer
struktureexample
prikazanisjeshown
u nastavku.
Prva
First hijerarhija
hierarchy
Druga hijerarhija
Second
hierarchy
Treća
hijerarhija
Third hierarchy
MUSIC
MUSIC
Music 01.MP3
PLAYLIST
PLAYLIST1.M3U
PLAYLIST2.M3U
Artist A
A
Music A.MP3
Playlist
files
Datoteke
popisa za
(➜
page 49)
izvođenje
(str. 49)
Album A1
A1
(➜ page
70)
OTHER FOLDER
FOLDER (→
str 70)
DATA
DATA
Artist B
B
Music A1-1.MP3
Album A2
A2
Playback is available
to
Reprodukcija
je moguća
thedruge
second
hierarchy.
do
hijerarhije.
Files
on
the
third
Datoteke s treće
hierarchy and
after
hijerarhije
i iznad
nije
cannot be
played.
moguće
reproducirati.
Album A2-1
A2-1
• In MUSIC folder and OTHER FOLDER, up to 199 files per one folder can be recognised and played back. (If
subfolders are created, number of files playable is reduced by the equivalent number of subfolders created.)
• U mapama MUSIC i OTHER FOLDER moguće je prepoznati i reproducirati najviše 199 datoteka u jednoj mapi.
(Ako se stvaraju podmape, broj datoteka koje je moguće reproducirati smanjuje se za broj koji odgovara broju
stvorenih podmapa).
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Unutarnja
memorija
(SD-kartica)
Internal memory
(SD
card)
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
Folder structure
onuređaju
this unit
Struktura
mapa na
69
69
Folder
structure
this
unit
Struktura
mapaonna
uređaju
■
g■OTHER
OTHER FOLDER
FOLDER ((
)
Folders
creating
using ana
device
other
than this
unit and
Mape
koje
su stvorene
drugom
uređaju
te mapa
the “DATA”
folderseare
displayedFOLDER".
in “OTHER"OTHER
FOLDER”.
DATA
prikazuju
u "OTHER
“OTHER FOLDER”
is displayed
this unit,
the
FOLDER"
se prikazuje
na ovomon
uređaju,
no but
na računalu
folderssu
are
directly displayed
without
displaying"OTHER
“OTHER
mape
prikazane
direktno, bez
prikazivanja
FOLDER” on a computer.
FOLDER".
Reprodukcija
datoteka
mapi OTHER FOLDER:
Playing les in
OTHERuFOLDER:
Postupak
odabira
datoteka
jednak
je kao
You can select
andi reprodukcije
play files in the
same way
as with
thei
za
mapu(M)
MUSIC
str.48).
48).
MUSIC
folder(M)
(➜ (→
page
Funkcija
mape (→
49)49)
secan
također
The folderoznake
cue function
(➜ str.
page
also može
be used in
koristiti
naway.
isti način.
the same
(Primjer
(Examplestrukture
of foldermape)
structure)
First hierarchy
Prva
hijerarhija
OTHER FOLDER
FOLDER
DATA
DATA
TIMER
TIMER
Second
hierarchy
Druga hijerarhija
Playback is available
to do
Reprodukcija
je moguća
the second
hierarchy.
Files
druge
hijerarhije.
Datoteke
the hijerarhije
third hierarchy
and
son
treće
i iznad
aftermoguće
cannot reproducirati.
be played.
nije
T1
Meeting1.MP3
T2
VQT4J69
VQT4J81
VOICE
VOICE
Lecture1.MP3
70
70
Third hierarchy
Treća
hijerarhija
*
types
of files
thatjecan
be played,
number broj
of files
●●The
Vrsta
datoteka
koju
moguće
reproducirati,
that
can be
recognised,
other conditions
are the
datoteka
koje
je mogućeand
prepoznati
i drugi uvjeti
same
assu
forkao
the iMUSIC
(M)
folder (M)
(➜ page
48).
jednaki
za mapu
MUSIC
(→ str.
48). Ako
When
are subfolders
“OTHER
FOLDER”,
files
u mapithere
"OTHER
FOLDER"inpostoje
podmape,
moguće
up
to the seconddatoteke
level cando
bedruge
played.
je reproducirati
razine.
*
transferred
directly
to thena
internal
memory
or an
●●Files
Datoteke
prenesene
izravno
unutarnju
memoriju
SD
card cannot
played
with this unit.na
Transfer
ili SD-karticu
nebe
mogu
se reproducirati
ovom files
to
the MUSIC
(M) folder
or insert
themMUSIC
in a folder
and
uređaju.
Datoteke
prenesite
u mapu
(M) ili
ih
then
them.
prvotransfer
spremite
u mapu i zatim prenesite.
■■RECYCLE
Mapa RECYCLE
g
folder
This
bin. Kada
Whense
thefunkcija
recyclekoša
bin za
Ovo is
je the
košrecycle
za smeće.
function
is “ON”,datoteke
deleted se
recording
files are
smeće uključi,
premještaju
u koš za
moved
the RECYCLE
folder (recycle bin).
smeće to
(mapu
RECYCLE).
*
in theuMUSIC
(M)
folder (M)
or OTHER
FOLDER
●●Files
Datoteke
mapama
MUSIC
i OTHER
FOLDER
(( ))are
not moved
bini and
are
ne prenose
seto
u the
koš recycle
za smeće
u potpunosti
se
completely
deleted
thena
unit
irrespective
of the
brišu s uređaja
bezfrom
obzira
postavke
funkcije
koša
recycle
bin
function
settings.
za smeće.
*
such
as “001_”
are attached
to the
start of
●●Numbers
Brojevi kao
"001_"
pridružuju
se početku
naziva
file
namesza
fordatoteke
files moved
to the recycle
show da
datoteke
premještene
u košbin
zato
smeće
the
order
in which
they were
moved.
This numberOvaj
is
bi se
prikazao
redoslijed
kojim
su premještane.
only
displayed
on a computer.
se broj
samo prikazuje
na računalu.
Only PCM (WAV) files recorded on this unit.
½
Prijenos
glazbenih
datoteka
sfiles to the
*Transferring
Using [drag and drop],
you can
import
music
les
tothe
this
unit
računala
na
ovaj
uređaj
computer as well.
from
the
computer
* Never disconnect the unit or remove the SD card
• Prethodno otvorite mapu MUSIC na ovom uređaju.
while MUSIC
“ACCESS…” is displayed, otherwise this unit
• Open
(→ str. 65) folder of this unit beforehand.
maypage
be damaged.
(➜
65)
* You
can create
subfolders
in thei MUSIC
to
1.
Odaberite
glazbenu
datoteku
desnimfolder
klikom
transfer
and
play back
For folderand
structure,
see
odaberite
[Copy]
(Kopiraj).
1. Select a music
le,files.
right-click
select
2.page
O
daberite
69. mapu MUSIC na uređaju i desnim
[Copy].
klikom
odaberite
[Paste]
(Zalijepi)
zafolder,
prijenos
na
*
back
files inof
the
MUSIC
the order
2. When
Selectplaying
MUSIC
folder
this
unit,
right-click
uređaj
of
playback will be the same as the order of transfer to
and
select [Paste] to transfer to this unit.
this unit. (When transferring multiple files at a time, the
computer determines the order of transfer.) However,
if numbers are added at the beginning of file names,
the order of playback is determined based on the
numbers. (➜ page 68)
* This unit does not support PD-DRM and DRM10.
Up
199 ofjetransferred
files can be do
played
on this unit.
Na to
uređaju
moguće reproducirati
199 prenesenih
If
subfolders
of files
playable is
datoteka.
Akoare
se created,
stvaraju number
podmape,
broj datoteka
koje je
moguće reproducirati
smanjuje
se za
broj koji odgovara
reduced
by the equivalent
number
of subfolders
created.
broju stvorenih podmapa.
●● Nikada nemojte isključivati uređaj ili vaditi SD* Never
disconnect
the unitporuka
or remove
the SD card
karticu
dok se prikazuje
"ACCESS..."
jer bi
while
“ACCESS…”
is displayed, otherwise this unit
se uređaj
mogao oštetiti.
be damaged.
●●may
Moguće
je stvoriti podmape u mapi MUSIC za
* You
can create
subfolders
in the MUSIC
to
prijenos
i reprodukciju
datoteka.
Detalje folder
o strukturi
transfer
and playna
back
mape potražite
str. files.
69. For folder structure, see
69.
●●page
Dodavanjem
brojeva na početak naziva datoteka
* You
can play
the files
in each folder
in themapi
desired
možete
omogućiti
reprodukciju
u svakoj
željenim
order
by
adding
numbers
redoslijedom. (→
str. 68) to the beginning of file
(➜ page
68)
●●names.
Ovaj uređaj
ne podržava
PD-DRM i DRM10.
* This unit does not support PD-DRM and DRM10.
HRVATSKI
ENGLISH
You
can
music
by reproducirati
transferring music
filesdatoteke
stored informata
the computer
to this PCM
unit. (WAV)*.
ovom
seenjoy
uređaju
mogu
glazbene
MP3, WMA,
½
*
Samo
formata
PCM (WAV)
ovim
uređajem.
This
unitdatoteke
can play
back MP3,
WMA,snimljene
and PCM
(WAV)
music files.
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Prijenos glazbenih datoteka na uređaj
Transferring
music
les to
this
unit
Možete uživati u slušanju glazbe
tako da s
računala
prenesete
glazbene
datoteke na ovaj uređaj. Na
71
71
71
71
Pitanja i odgovori (često postavljana pitanja)
Pitanje
Odgovor
Mogu li se na ovom uređaju
reproducirati datoteke snimljene
drugim Panasonicovim
diktafonima?
• Datoteke snimljene pomoću diktafona u formatima MP3 ili PCM možete
reproducirati tako da ih prenesete u mapu MUSIC. (→ str. 71) Datoteke
drugih formata (npr. formata ADPCM i TRC ) nećete moći reproducirati
jer je format za snimanje drukčiji.
Koje se vrste datoteka mogu
reproducirati?
• Mogu se reproducirati samo WMA/MP3-datoteke i datoteke formata PCM (WAV)
snimljene ovim uređajem. AAC i druge datoteke ne mogu se reproducirati.
Poruke o pogreškama
Poruka o pogrešci
Kontrolne točke
• NO PLAYABLE FILES (Nema
datoteka koje se mogu reproducirati)
• NO FILE (Nema datoteke)
• Prikazuje se kada nema datoteka u mapi, a vi pokušate reproducirati
datoteku, izvršiti vremensku pretragu datoteke ili je obrisati.
PLEASE INSERT microSD CARD
(Umetnite microSD-karticu)
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate izvršiti formatiranje bez umetnute SD-kartice.
• Prikazuje se kada kopirate ili premještate datoteku u mapi LINE bez
umetnute SD-kartice.
VQT4J69
CAN'T READ microSD CARD.
• Prikazuje se kada uređaj ne prepozna SD-karticu ili kada postoji kvar na
INSERT CARD AGAIN (Nemoguće
kartici. (→ str. 46) Ponovno umetnite karticu.
očitati microSD-karticu. Umetnite karticu)
72
72
CAN'T READ INTERNAL MEMORY
• Formatirajte je na ovom uređaju. (→ str. 60) Ako se problem nastavi,
(Nemoguće očitati unutarnju memoriju)
moguće je da je unutarnja memorija oštećena. Obratite se dobavljaču.
CAPACITY FULL (Memorija puna)
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate snimati na unutarnju memoriju ili SD-karticu
na kojima nema slobodnog prostora.
• Prikazuje se kada pokušavate kombinirati datoteke, a slobodni je prostor
manji od veličine nove datoteke.
INDEX FULL (Indeks pun)
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate dodati broj indeksa veći od maksimalnog
dopuštenog broja indeksa (36) u jednoj datoteci.
INDEX ERROR (Pogreška indeksa)
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate dodati indeks na isti položaj.
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate dodati indeks dok pokazatelj baterije
pokazuje “
“ (treperi).
CAN'T CREATE ANY MORE FILES
IN THIS FOLDER (Nemoguće stvoriti
nove datoteke u mapi)
• Datoteku nije moguće podijeliti jer je broj datoteka u mapi dosegao
maksimum (199). Izbrišite nepotrebne datoteke i podijelite. (→ str. 19)
NOT ENOUGH SPACE FOR
DIVIDING (Nema dovoljno mjesta za
podjelu)
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate podijeliti datoteku, a nema dovoljno
slobodnog prostora za njenu podjelu. Izbrišite nepotrebne datoteke i
podijelite.
HRVATSKI
Kontrolne točke
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate snimiti broj datoteka veći od maksimalnog
dopuštenog broja snimljenih datoteka (199) u jednoj mapi. (→ str. 12)
VQT4J69
Poruka o pogrešci
FILE FULL (Datoteka puna)
73
73
Poruke o pogreškama
Poruka o pogrešci
• M
EMORY WRITE SPEED IS
SLOW (Mala brzina pisanja u
memoriju)
• microSD CARD WRITE SPEED
IS SLOW (Mala brzina pisanja na
microSD-karticu)
Kontrolne točke
• Može se pojaviti kada se snimanje izvrši s SD-karticom male brzine
pisanja ili ako se koristi unutarnja memorija/SD-kartica čija je brzina pisanja
privremeno manja zbog fragmentacije*. Problem se može riješiti promjenom
načina snimanja u MP3. Da biste riješili problem fragmentacije, spremite
potrebne datoteke na računalo ili vanjski uređaj i formatirajte unutarnju
memoriju ili SD-karticu pomoću ovog uređaja. (→ str. 60)
• Ako se greška prikazuje i nakon formatiranja, provjerite je li kompatibilnost
vaše SD-kartice u skladu s našim standardima proizvodnje. (→ str. 46)
• Ako ponovite pisanje ili brisanje datoteka, poravnavanje datoteka postaje
diskontinuirano u unutarnjoj memoriji, a kontinuirano područje može
se smanjiti (fragmentacija). Ako se fragmentacija nastavi, smanjuje se
brzina pisanja datoteke te se pisanje može izvršiti neispravno.
VQT4J69
CAN’T DIVIDE.
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate podijeliti vrlo kratku datoteku (kraću od 2
REC TIME IS TOO SHORT (Podjela
sekunde).
nemoguća. Vrijeme snimanja prekratko)
74
74
CAN'T DIVIDE FILE AT THIS
POSITION (Dijeljenje datoteke na
zadanom položaju nemoguće)
• Pojavljuje se kada pokušate podijeliti datoteku na položaju na kojem
podjela datoteke nije moguća (pri samom početku ili kraju datoteke).
CAN'T COMBINE.
TOTAL SIZE EXCEEDS 2GB
(Kombiniranje nije moguće. Ukupna
veličina premašuje 2 GB)
• Prikazuje se kada ukupna veličina datoteka koje se kombiniraju
premašuje 2 GB.
CAN’T COMBINE.
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate kombinirati datoteke snimljene različitim
DIFFERENT FILE FORMATS (REC
načinima snimanja.
QUALITY) (Kombiniranje nije moguće.
Različiti formati datoteke (Kvaliteta
snimanja))
Kontrolne točke
HRVATSKI
Poruka o pogrešci
• LOW BATTERY. CHARGE
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate kopirati, kombinirati ili premjestiti datoteke
BATTERY BEFORE  FILES
dok pokazatelj baterije pokazuje “
“ (treperi) ili "
". (→ str. 10)
(Baterija prazna. Napunite bateriju
prije  datoteke)
• LOW BATTERY. REPLACE
BATTERY BEFORE  FILES
(Baterija prazna. Zamijenite bateriju
prije  datoteke)
COPY/MOVE DESTINATION
• Datoteku nije moguće kopirati (premještati) jer je broj datoteka u
FOLDER FULL (Odredišna mapa za
odredišnoj mapi za kopiranje/premještanje dosegao maksimum (199).
kopiranje/premještanje datoteka puna)
Izbrišite datoteke u odredišnoj mapi za kopiranje (premještanje) ili
namijenite drugu mapu kao odredište za kopiranje (premještanje).
EMPTY RECYCLE BIN (Ispraznite
koš za smeće)
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate izbrisati datoteke ili mape, a u mapi koša
za smeće već je maksimalni broj izbrisanih datoteka (199) te više nije
moguće premještati datoteke u koš za smeće ( ). (→ str. 54)
 FOLDER FULL
CAN'T RESTORE (Mapa puna
Vraćanje nije moguće)
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate vratiti datoteke iz koša za smeće ( ) u
izvornu mapu u kojoj je već maksimalni broj datoteka. ( se odnosi na
naziv izvorne mape.) (→ str. 54)
CAN'T FORMAT (Formatiranje
nemoguće)
• Moguće je da je oštećena unutarnja memorija ili SD-kartica. Obratite se
dobavljaču.
CAN'T ADD FILES.
PLAYLIST FULL (Nemoguće dodati
datoteke. Popis za izvođenje pun)
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate registrirati datoteke na popis za izvođenje
kada je maksimalni broj (99) datoteka koje se mogu registrirati na jedan
popis za izvođenje već dosegnut. (→ str. 49)
VQT4J69
CAN'T MOVE FILE.
• Prikazat će se kada nema slobodnog prostora na SD-kartici.
EMPTY RECYCLE BIN (Premještanje
(→ str. 54)
datoteke nije moguće. Ispraznite koš
za smeće)
75
75
Poruke o pogreškama
Poruka o pogrešci
CAN'T ADD ALL FILES TO PLAYLIST
(Nemoguće dodati sve datoteke na
popis za izvođenje)
Kontrolne točke
• Prikazuje se kada nije moguće registrirati sve datoteke jer broj datoteka
prelazi maksimalni broj (99) datoteka koje se mogu registrirati na popis
za izvođenje. (→ str. 49)
VQT4J69
CAN'T EDIT PLAYLIST.
• Radnja uređivanja popisa za izvođenje nije moguća jer na odabranom
NO FILE (Uređivanje popisa za
popisu za izvođenje nema registriranih datoteka (PLAYLIST to 5.M3U).
izvođenje nemoguće. Nema datoteke)
(→ str. 49)
76
76
 USE ONLY ALPHANUMERICS
(Koristite samo alfanumeričke
znakove)
• Neki znakovi u nazivu datoteke ili mape nisu podržani (znakovi osim
japanskih ili engleskih). Takve datoteke nije moguće dodati na popis za
izvođenje.
INSERT microSD CARD FOR TIMER
RECORDING (Umetnite microSDkarticu za snimanje mjeračem
vremena)
• Prikazuje se kada se SD-kartica ne umetne na kraju postavljanja
snimanja mjeračem vremena.
CAN'T START TIMER OPERATION
(Nemoguće pokrenuti rad pomoću
funkcije mjerača vremena)
• Prikazuje se kod neuspješne funkcije mjerača vremena, npr. kada se ne
umetne SD-kartica ili je snimanje u tijeku tijekom postavljanja snimanja
mjeračem vremena.
CAN'T . FILE IS OUTSIDE
PLAY RANGE OF ALL SONG MODE
(MAX 3,000 SONGS) (Nemoguće
. Datoteka je izvan raspona
reprodukcije svih pjesama (maks.
3000 pjesama))
• Prikazuje se kada pokušate odabrati datoteke izvan raspona
reprodukcije (maks. 3000 datoteka) u svrhu ponavljanja reprodukcije
svih datoteka (repeat all) u mapama MUSIC ili OTHER FOLDER
(nasumično) ili kada pokušate postaviti ponavljanje svih datoteka
(nasumično) tijekom odabira datoteka iznad raspona reprodukcije (maks.
3000 datoteka). (→ str. 41)
“” pokazatelj se mijenja ovisno o radnjama.
Simptom
Kontrolne točke
Baterija
Ne može se koristiti baterija koja
se i dalje može koristiti na drugoj
opremi.
• Uređaj pokazuje da je baterija prazna iako ona to još nije. To se događa
da bi se sačuvale postavke sata.
• Jeste li podesili funkciju "AUTO POWER OFF"? (Ovom se funkcijom
uređaj isključuje ako određeno vrijeme* nema aktivnosti, primjerice
kada se uređaj zaustavi.) (→ str. 59)
* Tvornička postavka je 15 min.
Reprodukcija je izrazito kratka
unatoč napunjenoj bateriji
• Vijek trajanja punjive baterije je završen. (Broj punjenja isporučene
punjive baterije: približno 300) Zamijenite novom navedenom punjivom
baterijom (neobavezna).
Kada se baterija napuni, prikazuje
se "
". Punjenje baterija nije
moguće.
• Povećala se temperatura uređaja. Odspojite uređaj s računala i ne
dirajte ga neko vrijeme. Tada ponovo napunite bateriju.
• Pokušavate li napuniti bateriju koja nije navedena punjiva baterija ili
alkalnu bateriju? Umetnite navedenu punjivu bateriju (isporučena) i
ponovno je napunite.
• Punjiva baterija nije ispravno umetnuta. Izvadite bateriju u potpunosti.
Zatim je ponovno umetnite.
• Je li u postavci baterije navedena alkalna baterija?
Promijenite postavku u postavku punjive baterije i napunite je.
(→ str. 59)
VQT4J69
Prije pozivanja servisa obavite sljedeće provjere. Ako niste sigurni u neka ovdje navedena rješenja ili ona ne pomažu
u uklanjanju problema, obratite se prodavaču.
HRVATSKI
Vodič za rješavanje problema
77
77
Vodič za rješavanje problema
Simptom
Kontrolne točke
Funkcije
Uređaj se ne pali.
• P
rovjerite je li baterija pravilno umetnuta. U potpunosti izvadite bateriju i
ponovno je umetnite u uređaj.
• Baterija se potrošila. Kada koristite navedenu punjivu bateriju
(isporučena), ponovno je napunite. Kada koristite bateriju AAA (LR03),
zamijenite je novom. (→ str. 7)
Uređaj ne radi.
• Funkcija zaključavanja (Hold) uključena je. Isključite funkciju
zaključavanja. (→ str. 10)
• Ne možete koristiti uređaj kada je spojen na računalo.
VQT4J69
Snimanje
78
78
Memorija se popunila ranije nego
što ste očekivali.
• Preostalo vrijeme za snimanje znatno se razlikuje ovisno o načinu
snimanja. (→ str. 86) Odaberite odgovarajući način snimanja za namjenu
koja vam je potrebna. (→ str 25)
• Je li pohranjeno previše podataka? Izbrišite nepotrebne datoteke.
Snimanje se samo zaustavilo.
• VAS funkcionira. (→ str. 31)
Kada slušalicama slušate snimku u
tijeku, čuje se zavijanje.
• Smanjite glasnoću. (→ str. 17)
• Odspojite slušalice s uređaja. (→ str. 18)
• Kada koristite vanjski mikrofon, nemojte spojiti i slušalice.
Snimanje se zaustavlja usred rada.
• Ako dođe do udarca (npr. ako vam uređaj ispadne), ako baterija ispadne
ili se isprazni tijekom snimanja, snimljeni podaci možda se neće ažurirati.
• Moguće je da nema mjesta u memoriji.
Simptom
Kontrolne točke
• Formatirali ste unutarnju memoriju uređaja ili SD-karticu na računalu.
Ako se formatiraju na računalu, uređaj neće postići optimalne
performanse. Formatirajte je na ovom uređaju. (→ str. 60)
• Ovaj uređaj možda neće ispravno raditi, ovisno o proizvođaču ili vrsti
SD-kartice.
• Detalje o karticama za koje je potvrđeno da ispravno rade u skladu s
našim standardima proizvodnje potražite na web-mjestu za podršku u
nastavku.
http://panasonic.net/support/
• VAS funkcionira. (→ str. 31)
Uz snimljeni glas čuju se i šumovi.
• Ako za vrijeme snimanja prstom ili nekim predmetom dotaknete
uređaj, nastali šumovi snimit će se preko mikrofona. Tijekom snimanja
izbjegavajte kontakt s objektima.
Zvuk je izobličen. Na početku
audiozapisa čuju se šumovi.
• Osjetljivost mikrofona postavite na "LOW" ili držite mikrofon dalje od
izvora zvuka koji snimate. (→ str. 26)
Ako zvuk i dalje bude izobličen, postavite Low Cut filtar na ON (→ str.
26), postavite razinu snimanja na MANUAL i podesite razinu snimanja
prije snimanja. (→ str. 27)
Snimljeni zvukovi sadrže šumove
koji otežavaju preslušavanje
audiozapisa.
• Udaljite mobilni telefon od uređaja kada ih koristite na istom mjestu.
• Postavku "LOW CUT FILTER" postavite na "ON". Šumovi će se smanjiti
tako da ćete lakše preslušavati audiozapise. (→ str. 26)
• Izvršite probno snimanje tako da mijenjate način snimanja (→ str. 25)
ili osjetljivost mikrofona (→ str. 26) i podesite odgovarajuće uvjete za
snimanje.
Snimljeni zvuk razlikuje se od
stvarnog zvuka.
• Jesu li postavljene funkcije ekvalizatora (EQ) za snimanje (→ str. 29) ili
"LOW CUT FILTER" (→ str. 26)?
VQT4J69
Preskakanje zvuka na snimljenoj
datoteci.
HRVATSKI
Snimanje
79
79
Vodič za rješavanje problema
Simptom
Kontrolne točke
Snimanje
Zvuk se snima u načinima
• Jeste li prije snimanja promijenili položaj mikrofona? Kada je postavka
snimanja osim postavljenog načina
izravne scene postavljena na ON, promjenom položaja mikrofona način
snimanja.
snimanja prelazi u postavljeni način snimanja. (→ str. 23)
Snimljeni zvuk preglasan je ili
pretih.
• Je li razina snimanja postavljena na ručnu postavku? (→ str. 27) Ako
jest, postavite ispravnu razinu snimanja (→ str. 28) ili podesite postavku
razine snimanja na AUTO.
• Promijenite osjetljivost mikrofona. (→ str. 26)
Mjerač razine ne pomiče se tijekom
snimanja. Snimljena datoteka ne
proizvodi zvuk.
• Je li prilagodba razine zvuka postavljena na "MANUAL" i je li razina
zvuka podešena na "0"? Podesite razinu snimanja. (→ str. 28)
VQT4J69
Reprodukcija
80
80
Nema zvuka iz zvučnika.
• Nema zvuka iz zvučnika kada su spojene slušalice. (→ str. 18)
Ne čuje se zvuk.
• Podesite glasnoću. (→ str. 17)
Datoteke iz mapa MIC_A do MIC_D,
LINE ili mape RECYCLE nije
moguće reproducirati.
• Naziv datoteke je promijenjen. Samo datoteke nazvane prema pravilima
o nazivanju datoteka mogu se reproducirati u mapama MIC_A do
MIC_D, LINE ili mapi RECYCLE. Ako se u mapi neki brojevi datoteka
preklapaju, te datoteke neće biti moguće reproducirati čak i ako se nazivi
datoteka ne promijene. (→ str. 68) Reprodukcija će biti moguća ako ih
prenesete u mapu MUSIC (M). (→ str. 71)
• Odredište prijenosa nije ispravno. Ako se datoteka prenese s računala i
pohrani u mapu snimanja, neće se moći reproducirati na ovom uređaju.
Prenesite datoteku u mapu MUSIC (M). (→ str. 71)
Simptom
Kontrolne točke
Reprodukcija datoteke u mapi
MUSIC (M) ili OTHER FOLDER
( ) nemoguća ili neispravna
reprodukcija.
• D
atoteke formata PCM (WAV) snimljene ovim uređajem i WMA/MP3datoteke mogu se reproducirati na uređaju. Drugi formati datoteka, poput
AAC, ne mogu se reproducirati.
• U mapama MUSIC i OTHER FOLDER moguće je prepoznati i
reproducirati najviše 199 datoteka u jednoj mapi. (Ako se stvaraju
podmape, broj datoteka koje je moguće reproducirati smanjuje se za
broj koji odgovara broju stvorenih podmapa). Prenesene datoteke koje
premašuju maksimalni broj neće se moći reproducirati.
• Reprodukcija datoteka iz mapa MUSIC (M) i OTHER FOLDER ( )
moguća je do druge hijerarhije. Datoteke s treće hijerarhije i iznad nije
moguće reproducirati (→ str. 69)
• Datoteke zaštićene autorskim pravima ne mogu se reproducirati čak i
ako se prenesu pomoću programa Explorer.
• Je li datoteka izbrisana nakon registracije na popis za izvođenje?
Prenesite datoteku u izvornom obliku ili izbrišite naziv datoteke s popisa
za izvođenje. (→ str. 50)
HRVATSKI
Reprodukcija
Reprodukcija je prebrza ili prespora. • Promijenili ste brzinu reprodukcije. (→ str. 39)
Odabrana se datoteka sama
mijenja.
Prikazuje se "NO PLAYABLE
FILES".
• Ako se neka datoteka izbriše dok je uređaj spojen na računalo, datoteka
odabrana na uređaju mogla bi se promijeniti. Za mapu MUSIC, odabire
se datoteka odmah pod mapom MUSIC. Ako nema datoteka, prikazuje
se "NO PLAYABLE FILES" (Nema datoteka koje se mogu reproducirati).
Ponovno odaberite datoteku.
Tijekom ponavljanja reprodukcije
od točke A-B nema zvuka ili je
reprodukcija pretiha.
• Je li funkcija paralelnog ponavljanja postavljena na ON (Uklj.)? (→ str.
43)
VQT4J69
Ne čuje se zvuk iz slušalica, čuje se • Provjerite je li utikač umetnut do kraja.
• Očistite utikač.
slabo ili sa šumovima.
81
81
Vodič za rješavanje problema
Simptom
Kontrolne točke
Mjerač vremena
Mjerač vremena ne radi ispravno
(Snimanje mjeračem vremena
neuspješno.)
• Unesite ispravan datum i vrijeme. (→ str. 11)
• Odredišna mapa je puna. Izbrišite nepotrebne datoteke. (→ str. 19)
• Baterija se potrošila. Zamijenite je novom baterijom. (→ str. 7) Kada
koristite punjivu bateriju, ponovno je napunite. (→ str. 7)
• Ima li u memoriji dovoljno prostora? Izbrišite nepotrebne datoteke. (→ str. 19)
• Je li uređaj spojen na računalo, itd.? Odspojite ga s računala.
• Ako se uređaj koristi i nakon početka reprodukcije s mjeračem vremena,
aktualna radnja dobiva prioritet. Pritisnite [STOP ■/RETURN] da biste
zaustavili uređaj.
• Ako je drugo snimanje u tijeku i nakon postavljenog početnog vremena
za snimanje mjeračem vremena, aktualno snimanje dobiva prioritet.
Zaustavite snimanje. Ako uređaj koristite za radnje koje ne uključuju
snimanje, snimanje mjeračem vremena dobiva prioritet.
VQT4J69
Ostalo
82
82
Uređaj se ne može uključiti.
• Provjerite je li baterija istrošena. Zamijenite bateriju novom ili napunite
punjivu bateriju. (→ str. 7)
Uređaj se automatski isključuje.
• Jeste li postavili funkciju "AUTO POWER OFF"? (Ovom se funkcijom
uređaj isključuje ako određeno vrijeme* nema aktivnosti, primjerice kada
se uređaj zaustavi.) (→ str. 59) Tvornička postavka je 15 min.
SD-karticu ne može se prepoznati.
• SD-kartica nije ispravno umetnuta. Isključite uređaj i ponovno umetnite
SD-karticu. (→ str. 46)
• Je li SD-kartica formatirana na računalu, itd.? Formatirajte je na ovom
uređaju. (→ str. 60)
Simptom
Kontrolne točke
• Ako su WMA/MP3-glazbene datoteke prenesene s računala u formatu
Read-only (samo za čitanje) ili su stvorene podmape u mapama MUSIC
ili OTHER FOLDER, nije ih moguće izbrisati na uređaju. Izbrišite ih na
računalu. (→ str. 66)
Slobodni prostor ne povećava se
čak i nakon brisanja datoteka.
• Ispraznite mapu koša za smeće. (→ str. 54)
Nemoguće podijeliti datoteku.
• Ima li u unutarnjoj memoriji dovoljno prostora?
• U jednoj mapi može biti 199 snimljenih datoteka (maksimalni broj koji
je moguće snimiti). Ako mapa sadrži 199 snimljenih datoteka, dijeljenje
datoteka nije moguće.
• Je li vrijeme snimanja datoteke prekratko? Koristite datoteku s većom
duljinom snimanja. Da bi je se moglo podijeliti, datoteka mora biti duljine
približno 2 sekunde ili više.
• Reproducirajte datoteku do mjesta na kojem je želite podijeliti i zatim
pritisnite [STOP ■/RETURN]. (→ str. 51)
Računalo ne prepoznaje uređaj.
• Ispravno spojite uređaj na računalo. (→ str. 63)
• Odspojite uređaj s računala i ponovno ga spojite.
• Isključite sve USB-uređaje (osim miša i tipkovnice u normalnom radu)
i spojite samo uređaj. Ako je računalo opremljeno višestrukim USBpriključcima, povežite uređaj s drugim USB-priključkom.
• Je li uređaj povezan preko USB-čvorišta? Odspojite USB-čvorište i
direktno spojite uređaj s USB-priključkom.
• Operativni sustav računala možda nije kompatibilan s ovim uređajem.
(→ str. 62)
• Je li mrežni pogon dodijeljen? Ako je mrežni pogon dodijeljen, slova
pogona (abecedna slova u nazivu pogona) mogu biti u konfliktu zbog
čega bi naziv pogona ovog uređaja mogao postati nevidljiv. Promijenite
dodjelu mrežnog pogona prije spajanja.
VQT4J69
Nije moguće izbrisati datoteku ili
mapu.
HRVATSKI
Ostalo
83
83
Vodič za rješavanje problema
Simptom
Kontrolne točke
VQT4J69
Ostalo
84
84
Naziv snimljene datoteke ili
informacije o datumu i vremenu
snimanja možda će se razlikovati
od stvarnog datuma i vremena.
• Postavite sat. (→ str. 11)
Datum i vrijeme ne prikazuju se
ispravno.
• Je li proteklo dulje razdoblje nekorištenja od vađenja ili trošenja baterije?
Ponovno podesite sat (DATE & TIME). (→ str. 11)
Pretraga datoteka ne radi ispravno.
• Funkcija pretrage datoteka odnosi se na pretraživanje datoteka u mapi
snimanja na temelju naziva datoteka dodijeljenih u vrijeme snimanja
(→ str. 67). Njome se ne mogu pretraživati datoteke snimljene kada sat
nije bio ispravno postavljen te datoteke koje su preimenovane pomoću
računala ili su pomoću njega premještene u mapu MUSIC ili neku drugu
mapu.
• Pretraga datoteka izvršava se samo za datoteke spremljene u odabranoj
memoriji. Odaberite memoriju (unutarnja memorija ili SD-kartica) prije
nego što započnete pretragu datoteka.
Punjiva baterija
Baterija sa suhim
ćelijama
JS 1,2 V (1 AAA punjiva
Ni-MH (nikal-metal hidrid)
baterija, HHR-4AGE)
USB-punjenje (vrijeme
punjenja: približno 2 sata)
Ugrađeni mikrofon
S/N (signal i šumovi)
*1 Mape MUSIC (M) i OTHER FOLDER (
Frekvencija
uzorkovanja
(Zagradom [ ] se
prikazuje kvaliteta
zvuka.)
44,1 kHz [PCM 44,1kHz]
44,1 kHz [MP3 320kb/s]
44,1 kHz [MP3 192kb/s]
44,1 kHz [MP3 128kb/s]
22,05 kHz [MP3 64kb/s]
16 kHz [MP3 32kb/s] (Monotički)
Format snimanja
Linearni PCM (16 bitni)/MP3
Brzina prijenosa pri
reprodukciji*1
16 kb/s do 320 kb/s (MP3)
32 kb/s do 192 kb/s (WMA)
Frekvencija
uzorkovanja pri
reprodukciji *1
8 kHz do 48 kHz (MP3)
22,05 kHz do 48 kHz (WMA)
Karakteristika
frekvencije (-10 dB,
tijekom snimanja/
reprodukcije)
(Zagradom [ ] se
prikazuje kvaliteta
zvuka.)
20 Hz do 21 000 Hz [PCM 44,1kHz]
20 Hz do 21 000 Hz [MP3 320kb/s]
20 Hz do 20 000 Hz [MP3 192kb/s]
20 Hz do 17 000 Hz [MP3 128kb/s]
20 Hz do 7 500 Hz [MP3 64kb/s]
20 Hz do 6 700 Hz [MP3 32kb/s]
)
USB
USB 2.0 (velike brzine) JS 5
V /500 mA
Audioizlaz Slušalice
Ø 3,5 mm, 16 Ω,
Maks. 11 + 11 mW
Izlaz
zvučnika
JS 1,5 V (1 AAA LR03
baterija (alkalna baterija))
Zvuk
45 dB (PCM 44,1 kHz) Filtar
(JIS A)
Audioulaz Vanjski
mikrofon/
linijski ulaz
HRVATSKI
Potrošnja
Ø 20 mm, 8 Ω,
90 mW (RMS)
Ø 3,5 mm,
0,80 mV rad na struju
Maks. dimenzije (Š  V  D)
40,8 mm x 103,1 mm x 16,2 mm
Dimenzije kućišta (Š x V x D)
38,5 mm x 102,5 mm x 14,8 mm
Masa
približno 54 g s baterijom
približno 43 g bez baterije
Radna temperatura
0 °C do 40 °C
Radna vlažnost
20% do 80% relativne
vlažnosti (bez kondenzacije)
Radna temperatura
punjive baterije
5 °C do 35 °C
Unutarnja memorija:
4 GB*2 (RR-XS450)
2 GB*2 (RR-XS420)
*2 Iskoristivi kapacitet je manji.
VQT4J69
Tehnički podaci
85
85
Tehnički podaci
Vijek trajanja baterije (može biti kraći, ovisno o radnim
uvjetima.)
Kada se koristi punjiva baterija (HHR-4AGE)
Način snimanja
PCM 44,1kHz (Stereo)
MP3 320kb/s (Stereo)
MP3 192kb/s (Stereo)
MP3 128kb/s (Stereo)
MP3 64kb/s (Stereo)
Snimanje*1
približno 17 h i 30 min
približno 20 h i 30 min
približno 20 h i 30 min
približno 21 h
približno 25 h
Kada se koristi Panasonicova alkalna baterija (AAA
LR03)
Način snimanja
PCM 44,1kHz (Stereo)
MP3 320kb/s (Stereo)
MP3 192kb/s (Stereo)
MP3 128kb/s (Stereo)
MP3 64kb/s (Stereo)
Snimanje*
približno 25 h
približno 30 h
približno 30 h
približno 31 h
približno 36 h i 30 min
MP3 32kb/s (Monotički) približno 38 h
VQT4J69
86
86
Reprodukcija*
približno 19 h
približno 20 h i 30 min
približno 20 h i 30 min
približno 20 h i 30 min
približno 21 h i 30 min
2
približno 21 h i 30 min
Bez praćenja snimanja, Pokazatelj snimanja: OFF,
postavka prilagodbe razine snimanja: AUTO, Kada
koristite unutarnju memoriju:
*2 Kada zvuk izlazi iz zvučnika (Razina glasnoće: 11,
Kontrola brzine reprodukcije: 100%)
*1
RR-XS450: Kada se koristi unutarnja memorija (4 GB)
Način snimanja
Reprodukcija*2
približno 10 h
približno 10 h i 30 min
približno 10 h i 30 min
približno 10 h i 30 min
približno 11 h
MP3 32kb/s (Monotički) približno 27 h i 30 min približno 11 h
1
Standardno raspoloživo vrijeme snimanja (može biti
kraće, ovisno o radnim uvjetima.)
PCM
MP3
MP3
MP3
44,1kHz
320kb/s
192kb/s
128kb/s
(Stereo)
(Stereo)
(Stereo)
(Stereo)
Vrijeme snimanja
približno 6 h
približno 27 h
približno 45 h
približno 68 h
Brzina
prijenosa
1411 kb/s
320 kb/s
192 kb/s
128 kb/s
MP3 64kb/s (Stereo) približno 136 h
64 kb/s
MP3 32kb/s (Monotički) približno 272 h
32 kb/s
RR-XS420: Kada se koristi unutarnja memorija (2 GB)
Način snimanja
PCM
MP3
MP3
MP3
44,1kHz
320kb/s
192kb/s
128kb/s
(Stereo)
(Stereo)
(Stereo)
(Stereo)
Vrijeme snimanja
približno 3 h
približno 13 h
približno 22 h
približno 33 h i 30 min
Brzina
prijenosa
1411 kb/s
320 kb/s
192 kb/s
128 kb/s
MP3 64kb/s (Stereo) približno 67 h
64 kb/s
MP3 32kb/s (Monotički) približno 134 h
32 kb/s
●● Tehnički podaci podložni su promjenama bez najave.
■■Uređaj
• Izbjegavajte korištenje ili stavljanje ovog
uređaja u blizinu izvora topline.
• Da biste spriječili nastanak štete na uređaju,
nemojte ga izlagati kiši, vodi ili drugim
tekućinama.
• Zvučnik uređaja nije magnetski oklopljen.
Nemojte stavljati uređaj u blizinu TVprijamnika, osobnih računala, magnetskih
kartica (bankovne kartice, pokazi) ili drugih
uređaja koji su podložni utjecaju magnetizma.
■■Baterije
• N
emojte guliti zaštitni sloj s baterija niti koristiti
oguljene baterije.
• Umetnite baterije u skladu s oznakama polova
i
.
• Uklonite bateriju ako uređaj ne namjeravate
upotrebljavati dulje vrijeme.
• Nemojte zagrijavati niti izlagati otvorenom
plamenu.
HRVATSKI
Da biste smanjili rizik od radijskih smetnji
uzrokovanih kabelima slušalica ili mikrofona,
koristite samo odgovarajući pribor s kabelima
kraćima od 3 m.
• B
aterije nemojte ostavljati dulje vrijeme u
vozilu sa zatvorenim vratima i prozorima, ako
je vozilo izloženo izravnoj sunčevoj svjetlosti.
• Nemojte pokušavati puniti baterije sa suhim
ćelijama.
• Pogrešno rukovanje baterijama može
prouzročiti curenje elektrolita, a to može oštetiti
priključke i izazvati požar. Ako elektrolit iscuri
iz baterija, savjetujte se s dobavljačem. Ako
dio vašeg tijela dođe u kontakt s elektrolitom,
temeljito ga isperite vodom.
• AAA LR03 baterije i punjive baterije čuvajte
izvan dohvata djece da ih ne bi progutala.
Slučajno gutanje baterija može uzrokovati
oštećenja želuca i probavnog sustava.
• Ako baterije nosite u džepu ili torbi, pripazite
da uz njih ne držite metalne predmete, poput
ogrlice. Kontakt s metalom može dovesti do
kratkog spoja zbog kojeg može doći do požara.
Iz sigurnosnih razloga baterije nosite u kutiji za
baterije.
■■Punjiva baterija
• P
unjivu bateriju (isporučena) pohranite ili
prenosite tako da je stavite u kutiju za bateriju
(isporučena) te pazite da u blizini nema
metalnih predmeta (spajalice i sl.).
VQT4J69
Održavanje i rukovanje
87
87
Održavanje i rukovanje
■■Kompatibilnost SD-kartice
MicroSD-kartice i microSDHC-kartice mogu se
koristiti s uređajima koji ih podržavaju. (MicroSDkartice mogu se koristiti i s uređajima koji podržavaju
microSDHC-kartice). Ako se koriste s uređajima koji
ih ne podržavaju, SD-kartice mogle bi se formatirati ili
bi se snimljeni sadržaj mogao izbrisati. Na računalima
ili uređajima koji ne podržavaju microSDHC-karticu
mogla bi se prikazati poruka kojom vas se poziva da
formatirate SD-karticu. Ako formatirate SD-karticu,
podaci će se izbrisati. Izbrisani podaci više se ne mogu
vratiti. Nemojte formatirati SD-karticu.
■■Upozorenje kada SD-karticu ili uređaj
predajete trećoj osobi ili ih odlažete
VQT4J69
Ako se unutarnja memorija ili SD-kartica formatiraju
ili se podaci s njih izbrišu, takve podatke nije moguće
reproducirati, no, oni se ujedno ne brišu u potpunosti.
Ako iz sigurnosnih razloga želite u potpunosti izbrisati
podatke, koristite komercijalno dostupni računalni softver
za brisanje podataka. Da biste izbrisali sve podatke,
možete i formatirati unutarnju memoriju ili SD-karticu i
snimati na njima dok se ne popune.
88
88
■■Alergije
• Isključite uređaj ako osjetite neugodu za vrijeme
korištenja slušalica ili bilo kojih drugih dijelova koji
dolaze u kontakt s vašom kožom.
• Neprekidno korištenje može uzrokovati osip ili druge
alergijske reakcije.
• L
ogotip microSDHC zaštitni je znak tvrtke SD-3C,
LLC.
Ovaj je proizvod zaštićen određenim pravima
intelektualnog vlasništva tvrtke Microsoft
Corporation i trećih strana. Korištenje ili
distribucija te tehnologije izvan ovog proizvoda
zabranjuje se bez posjedovanja licencije
tvrtke Microsoft ili ovlaštene podružnice tvrtke
Microsoft i trećih strana.
• Ako koristite slušalice za preslušavanje audiozapisa, nemojte previše pojačati glasnoću. Liječnici ne savjetuju
neprekidno dugo slušanje.
• Ako osjetite da vam zvoni u ušima, smanjite glasnoću ili isključite uređaj.
• Nemojte koristiti slušalice dok vozite motorno vozilo. To povećava opasnost u prometu i u nekim područjima je
protuzakonito.
• U potencijalno opasnim situacijama budite posebno oprezni ili isključite uređaj.
• Ako su vaše slušalice namijenjene korištenju na otvorenom i omogućuju da čujete zvukove iz okoline, nemojte
pojačavati razinu glasnoće toliko da ne možete čuti zvukove koji vas okružuju.
Koristite isporučene ili preporučene slušalice.
Mobilni telefoni mogu izazvati radijske smetnje za
Na temelju standarda EN 50332-2:2003
vrijeme korištenja uređaja. Ako se pojave takve
1)Maksimalni izlazni napon (izlaz slušalica):
smetnje, povećajte udaljenost između uređaja i
≤ 150 mV
mobilnog telefona.
2)Specifičan širokopojasni napon (slušalice):
≤ 75 mV
OPREZ
HRVATSKI
Mjere opreza za preslušavanje audiozapisa na slušalicama
VQT4J69
• U slučaju nepravilne zamjene baterije postoji
opasnost od eksplozije. Baterije zamijenite isključivo
onim tipom baterija koji preporučuje proizvođač.
• Ako želite odložiti baterije, obratite se nadležnim
lokalnim tijelima ili dobavljačima i raspitajte se o
pravilnom načinu odlaganja.
89
89
Održavanje
Uređaj čistite mekom, suhom krpom
VQT4J69
• A
ko je uređaj jako prljav, očistite ga krpom koju ste prethodno namočili u vodi i dobro ocijedili, a zatim ga obrišite
suhom krpom.
• Za čišćenje nemojte koristiti otapala poput benzina, razrjeđivača, alkohola, kuhinjskih deterdženata i slično jer
mogu oštetiti kućište ili izazvati guljenje boje.
90
90
Cd
ENGLISH
HRVATSKI
VQT4J81
VQT4J69
Informationzafor
Users on
and
Disposal dotrajalih
of Old Equipment
used Batteries
Obavijesti
korisnike
o Collection
prikupljanju
i odlaganju
uređaja iand
baterija
These
symbols
on
the
products,
packaging,
and/or
accompanying
documents
mean
that usedda
Ovim se oznakama na proizvodu, ambalaži i/ili pratećim dokumentima
označava
andelektrični
electronic iproducts
and batteries
not bene
mixed
withodlagati
general household
waste.
seelectrical
korišteni
elektronički
uređajishould
te baterije
smiju
s otpadom
proper treatment,
recovery
and obrade,
recycling sanacije
of old products
and used dotrajalih
batteries, please
take them
izFor
domaćinstava.
Radi
pravilne
i recikliranja
proizvoda
i
to applicable
collection
in accordance
with your national
legislation
and the
Directives
baterija,
odnesite
ih upoints,
odgovarajuća
odlagališta,
u skladu
s lokalnim
zakonodavstvom
2002/96/EC and
2006/66/EC.i 2006/66/EZ.
i Direktivama
2002/96/EZ
By disposing
of these products
and batteries
correctly,
you will
help to ćete
save valuable
resources
and
Pravilnim
odlaganjem
navedenih
proizvoda
i baterija
pomoći
očuvanju
vrijednih
prevent any
potentialnegativne
negative effects
on na
human
health
and the ienvironment
could
otherwise
resursa
i spriječiti
učinke
ljudsko
zdravlje
okoliš koji which
bi mogli
nastati
arise neprimjerenog
from inappropriaterukovanja
waste handling.
zbog
otpadom.
Detaljne
informacije
o
prikupljanju
i recikliranju
dotrajalih
i baterija
potražite
For more information about collection and
recycling of old
products proizvoda
and batteries,
please contact
your
ulocal
lokalnom
poglavarstvu,
odlaganje
otpada
ili na
prodajnome
mjestu
na
municipality,
your waste službi
disposalza
service
or the point
of sale
where
you purchased
the items.
kojem ste kupili proizvod.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
Za nepropisno odlaganje ovog otpada mogli biste biti kažnjeni sukladno lokalnom
For business users in the European Union
zakonodavstvu.
If you
wish to discard
electrical
and electronic
equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for
Za
poslovne
korisnike
u Europskoj
uniji
further
information.
Ako
želite
odložiti električnu i elektroničku opremu, detaljne obavijesti zatražite od
svojeg
prodavača
ili dobavljača.
[Information
on Disposal
in other Countries outside the European Union]
[Informacije
odlaganju
u the
zemljama
These symbolsoare
only valid in
Europeanizvan
Union.Europske
If you wish tounije]
discard these items, please
Ovi
su simboli
važeći
samoorudealer
Europskoj
Ako
želite
odložiti
ove uređaje, obratite
contact
your local
authorities
and askuniji.
for the
correct
method
of disposal.
se nadležnim lokalnim tijelima ili dobavljačima i raspitajte se o pravilnoj metodi
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
odlaganja.
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the
Napomene
o simbolima
na for
bateriji
(dva primjera
requirement set
by the Directive
the chemical
involved. simbola u nastavku):
Ovaj se simbol može koristiti u kombinaciji s kemijskim simbolom. U tom je slučaju
usklađen sa zahtjevom navedenim u Direktivi za korištene kemikalije.
91
91
91
91
▲ZOOM/STEREO▼
ZOOM/STEREO
F2
F1
OPR/HOLD
OPR/HOLD
MENU
STOP "/RETURN
■/RETURN
VOL
LIST
LIST
REC ●
MIC/LINE
USB
ERASE/A-B EU
EU
EU
Pursuant
at the directive
2004/108/EC,
article
U skladu to
s direktivom
2004/108/EZ,
članak
9(2) 9(2)
Panasonic
Testing
Centre
Panasonicov
centar za
ispitivanje
Panasonic
Marketing
Europe
GmbH
Panasonic Marketing
Europe
GmbH
Winsbergring 15,
15, 22525
22525 Hamburg,
Hamburg, Germany
Njemačka
Winsbergring
Web
Site: http://panasonic.net
Web-mjesto:
http://panasonic.hr
©
© Panasonic
Panasonic Corporation
Corporation 2012
2012.
En
Ge
It
Fr
Sp
Pr
Hr
VQT4J81
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement